project manual bid set documents - conventional builders inc.€¦ · project manual bid set...

Project Manual Bid Set Documents

Columbarium Expansion Project Project Number: DE-16-23

Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery 26669 Patriots Way

Millsboro, Delaware 19966

May 15, 2019

Owner: State of Delaware

Delaware Commission of Veterans Affairs, Executive Director 802 Silver Lake Boulevard, Suite 100, Dover, DE 19904

Consultant: VanDemark & Lynch, Inc.

4305 Miller Road Wilmington, DE 19802

Subconsultants:

Quality Control The LA Group 40 Long Alley

Saratoga Springs, New York 12866

Structural Steinle Construction Engineers

4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802

Geotechnical Geo-Technology Associates, Inc.

18 Boulden Circle, Suite 36 New Castle, Delaware 19729

Electrical Engineer

DEDC, LLC 315 South Chapel Street Newark, Delaware 19711

DELAWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23 MILLSBORO, DELAWARE 05-15-19

SEALS PAGE

00 01 07

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD SEAL

A. Civil Engineer & Cemetery Design:

1. Stephen L. Johns, P.E. 2. DE 5976 3. Vice-President 4. VanDemark & Lynch, Inc. 5. 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802 6. Ph. 302.764.7635 x103, Fx. 302.764.4170

7. [email protected] 8. Responsible for Division 01-49 Sections except where

indicated as prepared by other design professionals of record.

B. Landscape Architect:

1. Mark A. Russo, RLA 2. DE 260 3. Project Manager 4. VanDemark & Lynch, Inc. 5. 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802 6. Ph. 302.764.7635 x118, Fx. 302.764.4170

7. [email protected]

8. Responsible for Division 32 – Exterior Improvements.

C. Structural Engineer:

1. Darryl C. Jones, P.E. 2. DE 13184 3. Associate 4. Steinle Construction Engineers 5. 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802 6. Ph. 302.764.7635 x154, Fx. 302.764.4170

7. [email protected] 8. Responsible for Division 03 – Concrete, Division 04 - Masonry

& Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

D. Electrical Engineer:

1. John R. Farina, Jr., P.E. 2. DE 13559 3. Senior Mechanical Engineer 4. DEDC, LLC 5. 325 South Chapel Avenue Newark, Delaware 19711 6. Ph. 302.738.7172, Fx. 302.738.7175

7. [email protected]

8. Responsible for Division 26 - Electrical.

END OF SECTION

SEALS PAGE 00 01 07-1

5/21/19

5/22/2019

5/21/2019


THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

SEALS PAGE 00 01 07-2


TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10-1

DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS

NCA MASTER SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 10

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING

REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 Project Title Page

00 01 07 Seals Page

00 01 10 Table of Contents

00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets

00 11 16 Invitation to Bid

00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders

00 41 13 Bid Form

00 43 13 Bid Bond

00 52 13 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor A101-2017

00 54 13 Supplement to Agreement Between Owner and Contractor A101-2017

00 54 14 Supplement to A101-2017 – Exhibit A Insurance and Bonds

00 61 13.13 Performance Bond

00 61 13.16 Payment Bond

00 72 13 General Conditions to the Contract

00 73 13 Supplementary General Conditions A201-2017

00 73 46 Wage Rate Requirements

00 81 13 General Requirements

00 81 14 Drug Testing Forms

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary of Work

01 22 00 Unit Prices

01 23 00 Alternates

01 25 00 Substitution Procedures

01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures

01 29 00 Payment Procedures

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

01 42 00 References

01 42 19 Reference Standards

01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 73 00 Execution

01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

01 78 39 Project Record Documents



DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 30 53 Cast-in-Place Concrete

03 48 24 Precast Concrete Columbarium Units

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 05 13 Masonry Mortaring

04 20 00 Unit Masonry

04 26 13 Masonry Veneer

04 40 10 Cut Stone Assemblies

04 73 00 Columbarium Niche Covers

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems

26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 05 83 Wiring Connections

26 28 16.13 Enclosed Circuit Breakers

26 28 16.16 Enclosed Switches

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Preparation

31 20 00 Earthwork

31 23 19 Dewatering

31 25 13 Erosion Controls

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 05 23 Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements

32 14 16 Brick Unit Paving

32 17 23 Pavement Markings

32 30 00 Site Furnishings

32 31 14 Slide Gate Operator

32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates

32 84 00 Planting Irrigation

32 90 00 Planting



DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 40 00 Storm Sewer Utilities

33 46 13 Foundation Drainage

DELAWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23

MILLSBORO, DELAWARE 05-15-19

DRAWING LIST

00 01 15 - 1

DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS

NCA MASTER SPECIFICATIONS

DRAWING LIST

00 01 15

1 GI001: COVER SHEET/INDEX TO DRAWINGS

2 GI002: LEGEND & GENERAL NOTES

3 V-101: EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN/SURVEY

4 B-101: GEOTECHNICAL SITE PLAN

5-6 B-102-103: BORING LOGS / REPORT

7 C-100: OVERALL SITE DEVELOPMENT PLAN

8 C-131: GRAVESITE & SITE AMENITY LAYOUT PLAN

9 C-401: COLUMBARIUM ENLARGED LAYOUT & GRADING PLAN

10 CG100: PRE-DEVELOPED DRAINAGE AREA PLAN

11 CG110: PRE-CONSTRUCTION SITE STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN

12 CG121: GRADING PLAN

13 CG131: DRAINAGE PLAN

14-16 CG501-503: CONSTRUCTION SITE DETAILS AND NOTES

17 CU201: STORM DRAINAGE PROFILES

18 CI501: SITE SIGNAGE AND AMENITY DETAILS

19 CI502: COLUMBARIUM NUMBERING PLAN

20 CI503: COLUMBARIUM PLAN, ELEVATIONS & SECTION

21 CI504: COLUMBARIUM DETAILS 1

22 CI505: COLUMBARIUM DETAILS 2

23 SB501: STRUCTURAL DETAILS

24 L-101: PLANTING PLAN

25 L-501: PLANTING LIST AND DETAILS

26 LI101: IRRIGATION PLAN

27 LI501: IRRIGATION DETAILS



DRAWING LIST

00 01 15 - 2

28 ES100: ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN

29 ES101: ENLARGED PARTIAL SITE PLAN

30 ES500: ELECTRICAL LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS & SCHEDULES


INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16-1

INVITATION TO BID Section 00 11 16

Sealed bids for OMB/DFM Contract No. DE-16-23, will be received by the State of Delaware, Office of Management and Budget, Division of Facilities Management, at the Thomas Collins Building, 540 S. DuPont Highway, Suite 1, Dover, Delaware 19901 until _____ local time on July , 2019, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud in the Conference Room. Bidder bears the risk of late delivery. Any bids received after the stated time will be returned unopened. Project involves improvements at the Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery, in Millsboro Delaware, consisting of an expansion to the existing facilities by installing 1600 niches within eight columbarium walls. Please note that the award of this contract is contingent upon receipt of a grant from the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on June 11, 2019, at _______, at the Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery, 26669 Patriots Way, Millsboro, Delaware, for the purpose of establishing the listing of subcontractors and to answer questions. Representatives of each party to any Joint Venture must attend this meeting. ATTENDANCE OF THIS MEETING IS A PREREQUISITE FOR BIDDING ON THIS

CONTRACT. Sealed bids shall be addressed to the Division of Facilities Management, Thomas Collins Building, 540 S. DuPont Highway, Suite 1, Dover, Delaware, 19901. The outer envelope should clearly indicate: “OMB/DFM CONTRACT NO. DE-16-23, DEPARTMENT OF STATE – SUSSEX COUNTY VETERANS

CEMETERY – ENHANCEMENTS - SEALED BID - DO NOT OPEN." Contract documents may be obtained at the office of VanDemark & Lynch, Inc., 4305 Miller Road, Wilmington, Delaware, 19802-1901, PHONE (302) 764-7635, upon receipt of $180.00 per set/non-refundable. Checks are to be made payable to “VanDemark & Lynch, Inc.”. Construction documents will be available for review at the following locations: VanDemark & Lynch, Inc., Delaware Contractors Association, 527 Stanton Christiana Road, Newark, DE 19713; Associated Builders and Contractors, 31 Blevins Drive, Suite B, Airport Industrial Park, New Castle, DE 19720. Bidders will not be subject to discrimination on the basis of race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin in consideration of this award, and Minority Business Enterprises, Disadvantaged Business Enterprises, Women-Owned Business Enterprises and Veteran-Owned Business Enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids on this contract. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid security equivalent to ten percent of the bid amount and all additive alternates. The successful bidder must post a performance bond and payment bond in a sum equal to 100 percent of the contract price upon execution of the contract. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities therein. The Owner may extend the time and place for the opening of the bids from that described in the advertisement, with not less than two calendar days notice by certified delivery, facsimile machine or other electronic means to those bidders receiving plans.

END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Sealed bids for Department of State – Sussex County Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery

- Enhancements will be received by the State of Delaware, Office of Management and Budget, Division of Facilities Management, in the reception area of the Facilities Management Office in the Thomas Collins Building, 540 S. DuPont Highway, Suite 1 (Third Floor), Dover, DE 19901 until 11:00 a.m. local time on Thursday, July 18, 2019, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud in the Conference Room. Bidder bears the risk of late delivery. Any bids received after the stated time will be returned unopened. Project involves installation of approximately 1,600 cremation niches as well as associated site work at the Sussex County Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery located in Millsboro, Delaware. Please note that the award of this contract in contingent upon receipt of a grant from the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs.

A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on Wednesday, June 19, 2019, at 1:30 p.m. at the Sussex County Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery, 26669 Patriots Way, Millsboro, Delaware, for the purpose of establishing the listing of subcontractors and to answer questions.

Representatives of each party to any Joint Venture must attend this meeting. ATTENDANCE OF

THIS MEETING IS A PREREQUISITE FOR BIDDING ON THIS CONTRACT. Sealed bids shall be addressed to the Division of Facilities Management, Thomas Collins Building, 540 S. DuPont Highway, Suite 1 (Third Floor), Dover, DE 19901. The outer envelope should

clearly indicate: "DEPARTMENT OF STATE – SUSSEX COUNTY DELAWARE

VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY - ENHANCEMENTS - SEALED BID - DO NOT

OPEN." Contract documents may be obtained at the office of VanDemark & Lynch, Inc., 4305 Miller Road, Wilmington, DE 19802, phone (302) 764-7635, upon receipt of $180.00 per set/non-refundable. Checks are to be made payable to “VanDemark & Lynch, Inc.” Construction documents will be available for review at the following locations: VanDemark & Lynch, Inc.; Delaware Contractors Association; Associated Builders and Contractors. Bidders will not be subject to discrimination on the basis of race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin in consideration of this award, and Minority Business Enterprises, Disadvantaged Business Enterprises, Women-Owned Business Enterprises and Veteran-Owned Business Enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids on this contract. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid security equivalent to ten percent of the bid amount and all additive alternates. The successful bidder must post a performance bond and payment bond in a sum equal to 100 percent of the contract price upon execution of the contract. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities therein. The Owner may extend the time and place for the opening of the bids from that described in the advertisement, with not less than two calendar days notice by certified delivery, facsimile machine or other electronic means to those bidders receiving plans.


INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16-1


END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 21 13-1


00 21 13

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1. DEFINITIONS 2. BIDDER’S REPRESENTATION 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST-BID INFORMATION 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR



00 21 13-2

ARTICLE 1: GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 Whenever the following terms are used, their intent and meaning shall be interpreted as

follows: 1.2 STATE: The State of Delaware. 1.3 AGENCY: Contracting State Agency as noted on cover sheet. 1.4 DESIGNATED OFFICIAL: The agent authorized to act for the Agency. 1.5 BIDDING DOCUMENTS: Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the

proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement for Bid, Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (if any), General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Provisions (if any), the Bid Form (including the Non-collusion Statement), and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, as well as the Drawings, Specifications (Project Manual) and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents consist of the, Instructions to

Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (if any), General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, General Requirements, Special Provisions (if any), the form of agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, Drawings (if any), Specifications (Project Manual), and all addenda.

1.7 AGREEMENT: The form of the Agreement shall be AIA Document A101, Standard Form of

Agreement between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM. In the case of conflict between the instructions contained therein and the General Requirements herein, these General Requirements shall prevail.

1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (or CONDITIONS): General Requirements (or conditions)

are instructions pertaining to the Bidding Documents and to contracts in general. They contain, in summary, requirements of laws of the State; policies of the Agency and instructions to bidders.

1.9 SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Special Provisions are specific conditions or requirements

peculiar to the bidding documents and to the contract under consideration and are supplemental to the General Requirements. Should the Special Provisions conflict with the General Requirements, the Special Provisions shall prevail.

1.10 ADDENDA: Written or graphic instruments issued by the Owner/Architect prior to the

execution of the contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.

1.11 BIDDER OR VENDOR: A person or entity who formally submits a Bid for the material or

Work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents.

1.12 SUB-BIDDER: A person or entity who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor, or

both for a portion of the Work.



00 21 13-3

1.13 BID: A complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents.

1.14 BASE BID: The sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work

described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids (if any are required to be stated in the bid).

1.15 ALTERNATE BID (or ALTERNATE): An amount stated in the Bid, where applicable, to be

added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents is accepted.

1.16 UNIT PRICE: An amount stated in the Bid, where applicable, as a price per unit of

measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents.

1.17 SURETY: The corporate body which is bound with and for the Contract, or which is liable,

and which engages to be responsible for the Contractor's payments of all debts pertaining to and for his acceptable performance of the Work for which he has contracted.

1.18 BIDDER'S DEPOSIT: The security designated in the Bid to be furnished by the Bidder as a

guaranty of good faith to enter into a contract with the Agency if the Work to be performed or the material or equipment to be furnished is awarded to him.

1.19 CONTRACT: The written agreement covering the furnishing and delivery of material or

work to be performed. 1.20 CONTRACTOR: Any individual, firm or corporation with whom a contract is made by the

Agency. 1.21 SUBCONTRACTOR: An individual, partnership or corporation which has a direct contract

with a contractor to furnish labor and materials at the job site, or to perform construction labor and furnish material in connection with such labor at the job site.

1.22 CONTRACT BOND: The approved form of security furnished by the contractor and his

surety as a guaranty of good faith on the part of the contractor to execute the work in accordance with the terms of the contract.

ARTICLE 2: BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

2.1 PRE-BID MEETING 2.1.1 A pre-bid meeting for this project will be held at the time and place designated. Attendance

at this meeting is a pre-requisite for submitting a Bid, unless this requirement is specifically waived elsewhere in the Bid Documents.

2.2 By submitting a Bid, the Bidder represents that: 2.2.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and that the Bid is made in

accordance therewith. 2.2.2 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with existing conditions under which the

Work is to be performed, and has correlated the Bidder’s his personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.



00 21 13-4

2.2.3 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

2.3 JOINT VENTURE REQUIREMENTS 2.3.1 For Public Works Contracts, each Joint Venturer shall be qualified and capable to complete

the Work with their own forces. 2.3.2 Included with the Bid submission, and as a requirement to bid, a copy of the executed Joint

Venture Agreement shall be submitted and signed by all Joint Venturers involved. 2.3.3 All required Bid Bonds, Performance Bonds, Material and Labor Payment Bonds must be

executed by both Joint Venturers and be placed in both of their names. 2.3.4 All required insurance certificates shall name both Joint Venturers. 2.3.5 Both Joint Venturers shall sign the Bid Form and shall submit a copy of a valid Delaware

Business License with their Bid. 2.3.6 Both Joint Venturers shall include their Federal E.I. Number with the Bid. 2.3.7 In the event of a mandatory Pre-bid Meeting, each Joint Venturer shall have a representative

in attendance. 2.3.8 Due to exceptional circumstances and for good cause shown, one or more of these

provisions may be waived at the discretion of the State. 2.4 ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST CLAIMS 2.4.1 As consideration for the award and execution by the Owner of this contract, the Contractor

hereby grants, conveys, sells, assigns and transfers to the State of Delaware all of its right, title and interests in and to all known or unknown causes of action it presently has or may now or hereafter acquire under the antitrust laws of the United States and the State of Delaware, relating to the particular goods or services purchased or acquired by the Owner pursuant to this contract.

ARTICLE 3: BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.1 COPIES OF BID DOCUMENTS 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the

Architectural/Engineering firm designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein.

3.1.2 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents for preparation of Bids. The issuing

Agency nor the Architect assumes no responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

3.1.3 Any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect

immediately. 3.1.4 The Agency and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the

above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents.



00 21 13-5

3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and

with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall report any errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered to the Architect.

3.2.2 Bidders or Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents

shall make a written request to the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by written Addendum. Interpretations, corrections, or changes to the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding.

3.2.3 The apparent silence of the specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from it

of detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best commercial practice is to prevail and only material and workmanship of the first quality are to be used. Proof of specification compliance will be the responsibility of the Bidder.

3.2.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay

for all permits, labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

3.2.5 The Owner will bear the costs for all impact and user fees associated with the project. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a

standard of quality, required function, dimension, and appearance to be met by any proposed substitution. The specification of a particular manufacturer or model number is not intended to be proprietary in any way. Substitutions of products for those named will be considered, providing that the Vendor certifies that the function, quality, and performance characteristics of the material offered is equal or superior to that specified. It shall be the Bidder's responsibility to assure that the proposed substitution will not affect the intent of the design, and to make any installation modifications required to accommodate the substitution.

3.3.2 Requests for substitutions shall be made in writing to the Architect at least ten days prior to

the date of the Bid Opening. Such requests shall include a complete description of the proposed substitution, drawings, performance and test data, explanation of required installation modifications due the substitution, and any other information necessary for an evaluation. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval shall be final. The Architect is to notify Owner prior to any approvals.

3.3.3 If the Architect approves a substitution prior to the receipt of Bids, such approval shall be set

forth in an Addendum. Approvals made in any other manner shall not be binding. 3.3.4 The Architect shall have no obligation to consider any substitutions after the Contract award. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have received a

complete set of the Bidding Documents.



00 21 13-6

3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose.

3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than 4 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an

Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which extends the time or changes the location for the opening of bids.

3.4.4 Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that they have received all Addenda

issued, and shall acknowledge their receipt in their Bid in the appropriate space. Not acknowledging an issued Addenda could be grounds for determining a bid to be non-responsive.

ARTICLE 4: BIDDING PROCEDURES

4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS 4.1.1 Submit the bids on the Bid Forms included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 Submit the original Bid Form for each bid. Bid Forms may be removed from the project

manual for this purpose. 4.1.3 Execute all blanks on the Bid Form in a non-erasable medium (typewriter or manually in ink). 4.1.4 Where so indicated by the makeup on the Bid Form, express sums in both words and

figures, in case of discrepancy between the two, the written amount shall govern. 4.1.5 Interlineations, alterations or erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.6 BID ALL REQUESTED ALTERNATES AND UNIT PRICES, IF ANY. If there is no change

in the Base Bid for an Alternate, enter “No Change”. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that they have received all addenda issued during the bidding period. Work required by Addenda shall automatically become part of the Contract.

4.1.7 Make no additional stipulations on the Bid Form and do not qualify the Bid in any other

manner. 4.1.8 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement whether the

Bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or any legal entity, and each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current Power of Attorney attached, certifying agent's authority to bind the Bidder.

4.1.9 Bidder shall complete the Non-Collusion Statement form included with the Bid Forms and

include it with their Bid. 4.1.10 In the construction of all Public Works projects for the State of Delaware or any agency

thereof, preference in employment of laborers, workers or mechanics shall be given to bona fide legal citizens of the State who have established citizenship by residence of at least 90 days in the State.

4.1.11 Each bidder shall include in their bid a copy of a valid Delaware Business License.’ 4.1.12 Each bidder shall include signed Affidavit(s) for the Bidder and each listed Subcontractor

certifying compliance with OMB Regulation 4104- “Regulations for the Drug Testing of



00 21 13-7

Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on “Large Public Works Projects.” “Large Public Works” is based upon the current threshold required for bidding Public Works as set by the Purchasing and Contracting Advisory Council.

4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 All bids shall be accompanied by a deposit of either a good and sufficient bond to the

agency for the benefit of the agency, with corporate surety authorized to do business in this State, the form of the bond and the surety to be approved by the agency, or a security of the bidder assigned to the agency, for a sum equal to at least 10% of the bid plus all add alternates, or in lieu of the bid bond a security deposit in the form of a certified check, bank treasurer’s check, cashier’s check, money order, or other prior approved secured deposit assigned to the State. The bid bond need not be for a specific sum, but may be stated to be for a sum equal to 10% of the bid plus all add alternates to which it relates and not to exceed a certain stated sum, if said sum is equal to at least 10% of the bid. The Bid Bond form used shall be the standard OMB form (attached).

4.2.2 The Agency has the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being

considered until either a formal contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished or the specified time has elapsed so the Bids may be withdrawn or all Bids have been rejected.

4.2.3 In the event of any successful Bidder refusing or neglecting to execute a formal contract and

bond within 20 days of the awarding of the contract, the bid bond or security deposited by the successful bidder shall be forfeited.

4.3 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 4.3.1 As required by Delaware Code, Title 29, section 6962(d)(10)b, each Bidder shall submit with

their Bid a completed List of Sub-Contractors included with the Bid Form. NAME ONLY ONE SUBCONTRACTOR FOR EACH TRADE. A Bid will be considered non-responsive unless the completed list is included.

4.3.2 Provide the Name and Address for each listed subcontractor. Addresses by City, Town or

Locality, plus State, will be acceptable. 4.3.3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that their Subcontractors are in compliance

with the provisions of this law. Also, if a Contractor elects to list themselves as a Subcontractor for any category, they must specifically name themselves on the Bid Form and be able to document their capability to act as Subcontractor in that category in accordance with this law.

4.4 EQUALITY OF EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY ON PUBLIC WORKS 4.4.1 During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

A. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure the applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in



00 21 13-8

conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provided by the contracting agency setting forth this nondiscrimination clause.

B. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or

on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin."

4.5 PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENT 4.5.1 Wage Provisions: For renovation and new construction projects whose costs exceed the

thresholds contained in Delaware Code, Title 29, Section 6960, the minimum wage rates for various classes of laborers and mechanics shall be as determined by the Department of Labor, Division of Industrial Affairs of the State of Delaware. In addition, for this project, the Davis-Bacon minimum wage rates shall apply. See Section 00 73 46 of the Project Manual.

4.5.2 The employer shall pay all mechanics and labors employed directly upon the site of work,

unconditionally and not less often than once a week and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account, the full amounts accrued at time of payment, computed at wage rates not less than those stated in the specifications, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the employer and such laborers and mechanics.

4.5.3 The scale of the wages to be paid shall be posted by the employer in a prominent and easily

accessible place at the site of the work. 4.5.4 Every contract based upon these specifications shall contain a stipulation that sworn payroll

information, as required by the Department of Labor, be furnished weekly. The Department of Labor shall keep and maintain the sworn payroll information for a period of 6 months from the last day of the work week covered by the payroll.

4.6 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.6.1 Enclose the Bid, the Bid Security, and any other documents required to be submitted with

the Bid in a sealed opaque envelope. Address the envelope to the party receiving the Bids. Identify with the project name, project number, and the Bidder's name and address. If the Bid is sent by mail, enclose the sealed envelope in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. The State is not responsible for the opening of bids prior to bid opening date and time that are not properly marked.

4.6.2 Deposit Bids at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids indicated

in the Advertisement for Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be marked “LATE BID” and returned.

4.6.3 Bidder assumes full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of

bids. 4.6.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.6.5 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of

Bids, provided that they are then fully in compliance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.7 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAW OF BIDS 4.7.1 Prior to the closing date for receipt of Bids, a Bidder may withdraw a Bid by personal request

and by showing proper identification to the Architect. A request for withdraw by letter or fax,



00 21 13-9

if the Architect is notified in writing prior to receipt of fax, is acceptable. A fax directing a modification in the bid price will render the Bid informal, causing it to be ineligible for consideration of award. Telephone directives for modification of the bid price shall not be permitted and will have no bearing on the submitted proposal in any manner.

4.7.2 Bidders submitting Bids that are late shall be notified as soon as practicable and the bid

shall be returned. 4.7.3 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during a thirty (30) day

period following the time and date designated for the receipt and opening of Bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting their Bid. Bids shall be binding for 30 days after the date of the Bid opening.

ARTICLE 5: CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

5.1 OPENING/REJECTION OF BIDS 5.1.1 Unless otherwise stated, Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read

aloud. An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidders. 5.1.2 The Agency shall have the right to reject any and all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a

required Bid Security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection.

5.1.3 If the Bids are rejected, it will be done within thirty (30) calendar day of the Bid opening. 5.2 COMPARISON OF BIDS 5.2.1 After the Bids have been opened and read, the bid prices will be compared and the result of

such comparisons will be made available to the public. Comparisons of the Bids may be based on the Base Bid plus desired Alternates. The Agency shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination.

5.2.2 The Agency reserves the right to waive technicalities, to reject any or all Bids, or any portion

thereof, to advertise for new Bids, to proceed to do the Work otherwise, or to abandon the Work, if in the judgment of the Agency or its agent(s), it is in the best interest of the State.

5.2.3 An increase or decrease in the quantity for any item is not sufficient grounds for an increase

or decrease in the Unit Price. 5.2.4 The prices quoted are to be those for which the material will be furnished F.O.B. Job Site

and include all charges that may be imposed during the period of the Contract. 5.2.5 No qualifying letter or statements in or attached to the Bid, or separate discounts will be

considered in determining the low Bid except as may be otherwise herein noted. Cash or separate discounts should be computed and incorporated into Unit Bid Price(s).

5.3 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 5.3.1 An agency shall determine that each Bidder on any Public Works Contract is responsible

before awarding the Contract. Factors to be considered in determining the responsibility of a Bidder include:

A. The Bidder’s financial, physical, personnel or other resources including

Subcontracts;



00 21 13-10

B. The Bidder’s record of performance on past public or private construction

projects, including, but not limited to, defaults and/or final adjudication or admission of violations of the Prevailing Wage Laws in Delaware or any other state;

C. The Bidder’s written safety plan;

D. Whether the Bidder is qualified legally to contract with the State;

E. Whether the Bidder supplied all necessary information concerning its

responsibility; and,

F. Any other specific criteria for a particular procurement, which an agency may establish; provided however, that, the criteria be set forth in the Invitation to Bid and is otherwise in conformity with State and/or Federal law.

5.3.2 If an agency determines that a Bidder is nonresponsive and/or nonresponsible, the

determination shall be in writing and set forth the basis for the determination. A copy of the determination shall be sent to the affected Bidder within five (5) working days of said determination.

5.3.3 In addition, any one or more of the following causes may be considered as sufficient for the

disqualification of a Bidder and the rejection of their Bid or Bids. 5.3.3.1 More than one Bid for the same Contract from an individual, firm or corporation under the

same or different names. 5.3.3.2 Evidence of collusion among Bidders. 5.3.3.3 Unsatisfactory performance record as evidenced by past experience. 5.3.3.4 If the Unit Prices are obviously unbalanced either in excess or below reasonable cost

analysis values. 5.3.3.5 If there are any unauthorized additions, interlineation, conditional or alternate bids or

irregularities of any kind which may tend to make the Bid incomplete, indefinite or ambiguous as to its meaning.

5.3.3.6 If the Bid is not accompanied by the required Bid Security and other data required by the

Bidding Documents. 5.3.3.7 If any exceptions or qualifications of the Bid are noted on the Bid Form. 5.4 ACCEPTANCE OF BID AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 5.4.1 A formal Contract shall be executed with the successful Bidder within twenty (20) calendar

days after the award of the Contract. 5.4.2 Per Section 6962(d)(13) a., Title 29, Delaware Code, “The contracting agency shall award

any public works contract within thirty (30) days of the bid opening to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, unless the Agency elects to award on the basis of best value, in which case the election to award on the basis of best value shall be stated in the Invitation To Bid.”



00 21 13-11

5.4.3 Each Bid on any Public Works Contract must be deemed responsive by the Agency to be considered for award. A responsive Bid shall conform in all material respects to the requirements and criteria set forth in the Contract Documents and specifications.

5.4.4 The Agency shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to

determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid, plus accepted Alternates. 5.4.5 The successful Bidder shall execute a formal contract, submit the required Insurance

Certificate, and furnish good and sufficient bonds, unless specifically waived in the General Requirements, in accordance with the General Requirement, within twenty (20) days of official notice of contract award. The successful Bidder shall provide two business days prior to contract execution, copies of the Employee Drug Testing Program for the Bidder and all listed Subcontractors. Bonds shall be for the benefit of the Agency with surety in the amount of 100% of the total contract award. Said Bonds shall be conditioned upon the faithful performance of the contract. Bonds shall remain in affect for period of one year after the date of substantial completion.

5.4.6 If the successful Bidder fails to execute the required Contract, Bond and all required

information, as aforesaid, within twenty (20) calendar days after the date of official Notice of the Award of the Contract, their Bid guaranty shall immediately be taken and become the property of the State for the benefit of the Agency as liquidated damages, and not as a forfeiture or as a penalty. Award will then be made to the next lowest qualified Bidder of the Work or readvertised, as the Agency may decide.

5.4.7 Each bidder shall supply with its bid its taxpayer identification number (i.e., federal employer

identification number or social security number) and a copy of its Delaware business license, and should the vendor be awarded a contract, such vendor shall provide to the agency the taxpayer identification license numbers of such subcontractors. Such numbers shall be provided on the later of the date on which such subcontractor is required to be identified or the time the contract is executed. The successful Bidder shall provide to the agency to which it is contracting, within 30 days of entering into such public works contract, copies of all Delaware Business licenses of subcontractors and/or independent contractors that will perform work for such public works contract. However, if a subcontractor or independent contractor is hired or contracted more than 20 days after the Bidder entered the public works contract the Delaware Business license of such subcontractor or independent contractor shall be provided to the agency within 10 days of being contracted or hired.

5.4.8 The Bid Security shall be returned to the successful Bidder upon the execution of the formal

contract. The Bid Securities of unsuccessful bidders shall be returned within thirty (30) calendar days after the opening of the Bids.

ARTICLE 6: POST-BID INFORMATION

6.1 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 6.1.1 Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall, if requested by the

Agency, submit a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a statement has been previously required and submitted.

6.2 BUSINESS DESIGNATION FORM 6.2.1 Successful bidder shall be required to accurately complete an Office of Management and

Budget Business Designation Form for Subcontractors.



00 21 13-12

ARTICLE 7: PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 The cost of furnishing the required Bonds, that are stipulated in the Bidding Documents,

shall be included in the Bid. 7.1.2 If the Bidder is required by the Agency to secure a bond from other than the Bidder’s usual

sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provide in the Contract Documents. 7.1.3 The Performance and Payment Bond forms used shall be the standard OMB forms

(attached). 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.2 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of

the surety to affix a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

ARTICLE 8: FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN AGENCY AND CONTRACTOR

8.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be

written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

DELAWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23 MILSBORO, DELAWARE 05-15-19

BID FORM 00 41 13-1

BID FORM

For Bids Due: July 4, 2019 To: State of Delaware DOS Commission of Veterans Affairs 802 Silver Lake Blvd. Suite 100 Dover, DE 19904

Name of Bidder:

Delaware Business License No.: Taxpayer ID No.: (A copy of Bidder’s Delaware Business License must be attached to this form.)

(Other License Nos.):

Phone No.: ( ) - Fax No.: ( ) - The undersigned, representing that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents and that this bid is made in accordance therewith, that he has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and that his bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the Bidding Documents without exception, hereby proposes and agrees to provide all labor, materials, plant, equipment, supplies, transport and other facilities required to execute the work described by the aforesaid documents for the lump sum itemized below: $

($ )

ALTERNATES

Alternate prices conform to applicable project specification section. Refer to specifications for a complete description of the following Alternates. An “ADD” or “DEDUCT” amount is indicated by the crossed out part that does not apply. ALTERNATE No. 1: Gates and Ornamental Cast Aluminum Fence along Patriots Way Add/Deduct:

($ ) ALTERNATE No. 2: 2’x2’ Brick-Faced Piers with Limestone Cap along Patriots Way – 50’ O.C. Add/Deduct:

($ )


BID FORM 00 41 13-2

BID FORM

UNIT PRICES

Unit prices conform to applicable project specification section. Refer to the specifications for a complete description of the following Unit Prices:

ADD DEDUCT

UNIT PRICE No. 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil material $ $

and replacement with satisfactory soil

UNIT PRICE No. 2: Provide and Install Precast Concrete $ $

Columbarium Wall

UNIT PRICE No. 3 Provide and Install Precast Limestone $ $

Columbarium Cap UNIT PRICE No. 4 Install Sod $ $

UNIT PRICE No. 5 Install Seed & Mulch $ $ UNIT PRICE No. 6 Install Valve-In-Head Sprinkler $ $

UNIT PRICE No. 7 Install 2½ inch PVC Pipe $ $

UNIT PRICE No. 8 Install Two Wire Cable $ $


BID FORM 00 41 13-3

BID FORM

I/We acknowledge Addendums numbered and the price(s) submitted include any cost/schedule impact they may have. This bid shall remain valid and cannot be withdrawn for sixty (60) days from the date of opening of bids (60 days for School Districts and Department of Education), and the undersigned shall abide by the Bid Security forfeiture provisions. Bid Security is attached to this Bid. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all bids, and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received. This bid is based upon work being accomplished by the Sub-Contractors named on the list attached to this bid. Should I/We be awarded this contract, I/We pledge to achieve substantial completion of all the work within calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. The undersigned represents and warrants that he has complied and shall comply with all requirements of local, state, and national laws; that no legal requirement has been or shall be violated in making or accepting this bid, in awarding the contract to him or in the prosecution of the work required; that the bid is legal and firm; that he has not, directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this Bid, the Bidder shall, within twenty (20) calendar days, execute the agreement in the required form and deliver the Contract Bonds, and Insurance Certificates, required by the Contract Documents.

I am / We are an Individual / a Partnership / a Corporation By Trading as (Individual’s / General Partner’s / Corporate Name) (State of Corporation) Business Address:

Witness: By: ( Authorized Signature )

(SEAL)

( Title )

Date:

ATTACHMENTS Sub-Contractor List Non-Collusion Statement Affidavit(s) of Employee Drug Testing Program Bid Security (Others as Required by Project Manuals)


BID FORM 00 41 13-4

BID FORM

SUBCONTRACTOR LIST

In accordance with Title 29, Chapter 6962 (d)(10)b Delaware Code, the following sub-contractor listing must accompany the bid submittal. The name and address of the sub-

contractor must be listed for each category where the bidder intends to use a sub-contractor to perform that category of work. In order to provide full disclosure and acceptance

of the bid by the Owner, it is required that bidders list themselves as being the sub-contractor for all categories where he/she is qualified and intends to perform such

work. This form must be filled out completely with no additions or deletions. Note that all subcontractors listed below must have a signed Affidavit of Employee Drug

Testing Program included with this bid.

Subcontractor Category Subcontractor Address (City & State) Subcontractors tax payer ID #

or Delaware Business license #

1. Excavation 2. Irrigation 3. Landscaping 4. Masonry 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


BID FORM 00 41 13-5

BID FORM

NON-COLLUSION STATEMENT

This is to certify that the undersigned bidder has neither directly nor indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with this proposal submitted this date (to

the Office of Management and Budget, Division of Facilities Management). All the terms and conditions of (Project or Contract Number) have been thoroughly examined and are understood.

NAME OF BIDDER:

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

(TYPED):

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

(SIGNATURE):

TITLE:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

E-MAIL: ______________________________________________________________

PHONE NUMBER:

Sworn to and Subscribed before me this day of 20 . My Commission expires . NOTARY PUBLIC .

THIS PAGE MUST BE SIGNED AND NOTARIZED FOR YOUR BID TO BE CONSIDERED.


BID FORM 00 41 13-6

AFFIDAVIT

OF

EMPLOYEE DRUG TESTING PROGRAM

4104 Regulations for the Drug Testing of Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on Large Public Works Projects requires that Contractors and Subcontractors implement a program of mandatory drug testing for Employees who work on Large Public Works Contracts funded all or in part with public funds. We hereby certify that we have in place or will implement during the entire term of the contract a Mandatory Drug Testing Program for our employees on the jobsite that complies with this regulation:

Contractor/Subcontractor Name:

Contractor/Subcontractor Address:

Authorized Representative (typed or printed):

Authorized Representative (signature):

Title:

Sworn to and Subscribed before me this day of 20 . My Commission expires . NOTARY PUBLIC .

THIS PAGE MUST BE SIGNED AND NOTARIZED FOR YOUR BID TO BE CONSIDERED.

STATE OF DELAWARE OFFICE OF MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET

BID BOND

TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL (Not necessary if security is used)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That: of in the County of and State of as Principal, and of in the County of and State of as Surety, legally authorized to do business in the State of Delaware (“State”), are held and firmly unto the State in the sum of Dollars ($ ), or percent not to exceed Dollars ($ ) of amount of bid on Contract No. , to be paid to the State for the use and benefit of (insert State agency name) for which payment well and truly to be made, we do bind ourselves, our and each of our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally for and in the whole firmly by these presents. NOW THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH That if the above bonded Principal who has submitted to the (insert State agency name) a certain proposal to enter into this contract for the furnishing of certain material and/or services within the State, shall be awarded this Contract, and if said Principal shall well and truly enter into and execute this Contract as may be required by the terms of this Contract and approved by the (insert State agency name) this Contract to be entered into within twenty days after the date of official notice of the award thereof in accordance with the terms of said proposal, then this obligation shall be void or else to be and remain in full force and virtue. Sealed with seal and dated this day of in the year of our Lord two thousand and (20 ). SEALED, AND DELIVERED IN THE Presence of

Name of Bidder (Organization) Corporate By:

Seal Authorized Signature Attest Title Name of Surety Witness: By: Title BID BOND 00 43 13-1




BID BOND 00 43 13-2


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR A101-2017

00 52 13-1

STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

A101-2017

00 52 13 The contract to be utilized on this project shall be the “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor” AIA Document A101-2017, including AIA Document A101 – 2017 Exhibit A, as well as Supplements to A101-2017 and Exhibit A and the State of Delaware’s General Requirements.


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR A101-2017 00 52 13-2



SUPPLEMENT TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR A101-2017 00 54 13-1

SUPPLEMENT TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR A101-2017

00 54 13 The following supplements modify the “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,” AIA Document A101-2017. Where a portion of the Standard Form of Agreement is modified or deleted by the following, the unaltered portions of the Standard Form of Agreement shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 3: DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

3.1 Delete paragraph 3.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

“The date of Commencement of the Work shall be a date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.”

ARTICLE 5: PAYMENTS

5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.3 Delete paragraph 5.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

“Provided that a valid Application for Payment is received by the Architect that meets all requirements of the Contract, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than 30 days after the Owner receives the valid Application for Payment.”

5.3 Insert the interest rate of “1% per month not to exceed 12% per annum.” ARTICLE 6: DISPUTE RESOLUTION

6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION

Check Other – and add the following sentence:

"Any remedies available in law or in equity." ARTICLE 7: TERMINATION or SUSPENSION

7.1.1 Delete paragraph 7.1.1 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 8: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

8.4 Delete paragraph 8.4 in its entirety and replace with the following:

“The Contractor’s representative shall not be changed without ten days written notice to the Owner.”

END OF SUPPLEMENT TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR


SUPPLEMENT TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR A101-2017 00 54 13-2



SUPPLEMENT TO A101-2017 – EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS

00 54 14-1

SUPPLEMENT TO A101-2017 – EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS

00 54 14 The following supplements modify the “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,” AIA Document A101-2017 Exhibit A Insurance and Bonds. Where a portion of the Standard Form of Agreement is modified or deleted by the following, the unaltered portions of the Standard Form of Agreement shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE A.2 OWNER’S INSURANCE

A.2.1 General Delete paragraph A.2.1 in its entirety. A.2.2 Liability Insurance Delete paragraph A.2.2 in its entirety, except in the case of school projects this paragraph shall

remain. A.2.3 Required Property Insurance Delete paragraph A.2.3 in its entirety. A.2.4 Optional Extended Property Insurance Delete paragraph A.2.4 in its entirety. A.2.5 Other Optional Insurance Delete paragraph A.2.5 in its entirety. ARTICLE A.3 CONTRACTORS INSURANCE AND BONDS

A.3.1.3 Additional Insured Obligations In the first sentence after “coverage to include (1)” delete “(1) the Owner,”. Strike the remainder of the first sentence beginning at the semicolon “; and (2) the Owner” through

the end of the sentence. Delete the second sentence in its entirety. A.3.3.2.1 Delete paragraph 3.3.2.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: Property Insurance of the same type and scope satisfying the requirements identified in Section

A.2.3, The Contractor shall comply with all obligations of the Owner under A.2.3 except to the extent provided below. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of the property insurance policy or policies required.


SUPPLEMENT TO A101-2017 – EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS 00 54 14-2



PERFORMANCE BOND

Bond Number: ___________________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, ______________________, as principal (“Principal”), and ______________________, a ______________________ corporation, legally authorized to do business in the State of Delaware, as surety (“Surety”), are held and firmly bound unto the ____________________________________________ (“Owner”) (insert State agency

name), in the amount of _________________ ($___________), to be paid to Owner, for which payment well and truly to be made, we do bind ourselves, our and each and every of our heirs, executors, administrations, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, for and in the whole, firmly by these presents. Sealed with our seals and dated this __________ day of ____________, 20__. NOW THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if Principal, who has been awarded by Owner that certain contract known as Contract No. ___________ dated the __________ day of ____________, 20__ (the “Contract”), which Contract is incorporated herein by reference, shall well and truly provide and furnish all materials, appliances and tools and perform all the work required under and pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Contract and the Contract Documents (as defined in the Contract) or any changes or modifications thereto made as therein provided, shall make good and reimburse Owner sufficient funds to pay the costs of completing the Contract that Owner may sustain by reason of any failure or default on the part of Principal, and shall also indemnify and save harmless Owner from all costs, damages and expenses arising out of or by reason of the performance of the Contract and for as long as provided by the Contract; then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees, if requested to do so by Owner, to fully perform and complete the work to be performed under the Contract pursuant to the terms, conditions and covenants thereof, if for any cause Principal fails or neglects to so fully perform and complete such work. Surety, for value received, for itself and its successors and assigns, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of time, modification, omission, addition or change in or to the Contract or the work to be performed thereunder, or by any payment thereunder before the time required therein, or by any waiver of any provisions thereof, or by any assignment, subletting or other transfer thereof or of any work to be performed or any monies due or to become due thereunder; and Surety hereby waives notice of any and all such extensions, modifications, omissions, additions, changes, payments, waivers, assignments, subcontracts and transfers and hereby expressly stipulates and agrees that any and all things done and omitted to be done by and in relation to assignees, subcontractors, and other

2

transferees shall have the same effect as to Surety as though done or omitted to be done by or in relation to Principal. Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or additions in or to the terms of the Contract shall in any way whatsoever affect the obligation of Surety and its bond. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be brought in any court of competent jurisdiction in the State of Delaware. Notices to Surety or Contractor may be mailed or delivered to them at their respective addresses shown below. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hand and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seal to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their duly authorized officers, the day and year first above written.

PRINCIPAL

Name: Witness or Attest: Address: By: (SEAL) Name: Name: Title: (Corporate Seal)

SURETY Name: Witness or Attest: Address: By: (SEAL) Name: Name: Title: (Corporate Seal)


PAYMENT BOND

Bond Number: ___________________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, ____________________, as principal (“Principal”), and __________________, a ____________________ corporation, legally authorized to do business in the State of Delaware, as surety (“Surety”), are held and firmly bound unto the ______________________________________________ (“Owner”) (insert State agency

name), in the amount of _________________ ($___________), to be paid to Owner, for which payment well and truly to be made, we do bind ourselves, our and each and every of our heirs, executors, administrations, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, for and in the whole firmly by these presents. Sealed with our seals and dated this _____________ day of____________, 20__. NOW THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if Principal, who has been awarded by Owner that certain contract known as Contract No. ____________dated the _______ day of _____________, 20__ (the “Contract”), which Contract is incorporated herein by reference, shall well and truly pay all and every person furnishing materials or performing labor or service in and about the performance of the work under the Contract, all and every sums of money due him, her, them or any of them, for all such materials, labor and service for which Principal is liable, shall make good and reimburse Owner sufficient funds to pay such costs in the completion of the Contract as Owner may sustain by reason of any failure or default on the part of Principal, and shall also indemnify and save harmless Owner from all costs, damages and expenses arising out of or by reason of the performance of the Contract and for as long as provided by the Contract; then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. Surety, for value received, for itself and its successors and assigns, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligation of Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of time, modification, omission, addition or change in or to the Contract or the work to be performed thereunder, or by any payment thereunder before the time required therein, or by any waiver of any provisions thereof, or by any assignment, subletting or other transfer thereof or of any work to be performed or any monies due or to become due thereunder; and Surety hereby waives notice of any and all such extensions, modifications, omissions, additions, changes, payments, waivers, assignments, subcontracts and transfers and hereby expressly stipulates and agrees that any and all things done and omitted to be done by and in relation to assignees, subcontractors, and other transferees shall have the same effect as to Surety as though done or omitted to be done by or in relation to Principal. Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omission or additions in or to the terms of the Contract shall in any way whatsoever affect the obligation of Surety and its bond.

- - 2

Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be brought in any court of competent jurisdiction in the State of Delaware. Notices to Surety or Contractor may be mailed or delivered to them at their respective addresses shown below. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hand and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seal to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their duly authorized officers, the day and year first above written.

PRINCIPAL Name: Witness or Attest: Address: By: (SEAL) Name: Name: Title: (Corporate Seal)

SURETY

Name: Witness or Attest: Address: By: (SEAL) Name: Name: Title: (Corporate Seal)


GENERAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT

00 72 13 The General Conditions of this Contract are as stated in the American Institute of Architects Document AIA A201 (2017 Edition) entitled General Conditions of the Contract for Construction as revised by the Supplementary General Conditions and is part of this project manual as if herein written in full.

GENERAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00 72 13-1



GENERAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT 00 72 13-2


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 73 13-1

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A201-2017 00 73 13

The following supplements modify the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIA Document A201-2017. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 3. CONTRACTOR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT



ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Strike the last sentence of Section 1.1.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: “The Contract Documents also include Advertisement for Bid, Instructions to Bidder, sample

forms, the Bid Form, the Contractor’s completed Bid and the Award Letter.” Add the following Section: “1.1.1.1 In the event of conflict or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, the

Documents prepared by the State of Delaware, Division of Facilities Management shall take precedence over all other documents.”

1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER Strike the last sentence of Section 1.1.8 in its entirety and add the following to the end of the

remaining sentence: “and certify termination of the Agreement under Section14.2.2.” 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1.1 Insert “if possible” at the end of the second sentence. Add the following Sections: “1.2.4 In the case of an inconsistency between the Drawings and the Specifications, or

within either document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect’s interpretation.”

“1.2.5 The word “PROVIDE” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean “FURNISH

AND INSTALL” and shall include, without limitation, all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services and other items required to complete the Work.”

“1.2.6 The word “PRODUCT” as used in the Contract Documents means all materials,

systems and equipment.” 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS

OF SERVICE Strike Section 1.5.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: “All pre-design studies, drawings, specifications and other documents, including those in

electronic form, prepared by the Architect under this Agreement are, and shall remain, the property of the Owner whether the Project for which they are made is executed or not. Such documents may be used by the Owner to construct one or more like Projects without the approval of, or additional compensation to, the Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and Material or Equipment Suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work



under the Contract Documents. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or Material and Equipment Supplier on other Projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and Architect’s consultants.

The Architect shall not be liable for injury or damage resulting from the re-use of drawings and

specifications if the Architect is not involved in the re-use Project. Prior to re-use of construction documents for a Project in which the Architect is not also involved, the Owner will remove from such documents all identification of the original Architect, including name, address and professional seal or stamp.”

Strike Section 1.5.2 in its entirety. 1.7 DIGITAL DATA USE AND TRANSMISSION

Strike Section 1.7 in its entirety and replace with the following: “The parties shall agree upon protocols governing transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form.”

1.8 BUILDING INFORMATION MODELS USE AND RELIANCE Strike Section 1.8 in its entirety. ARTICLE 2: OWNER

2.2 EVIDENCE OF THE OWNERS FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENTS Strike Section 2.2 in its entirety. 2.3 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.3.3 Strike 2.3.3 in its entirety. 2.3.4 Add the following sentence at the end of the paragraph: “The Contractor, at their expense shall bear the costs to accurately identify the location of all

underground utilities in the area of their excavation and shall bear all cost for any repairs required, out of failure to accurately identify said utilities.”

Strike Section 2.3.6 in its entirety and replace with the following: “2.3.6 The Contractor shall be furnished free of charge (1) electronic set of the Drawings and

Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling.”

2.5 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK Add “, except as outlined in Section 3.15” after the reference to “Article 15” at the end of the

last sentence of the Section.



ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.2 Add “and Owner” after “report to the Architect” in the second sentence. 3.2.4 Strike “subject to Section 15.1.7” in the second sentence. 3.2.4 Strike the third sentence. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Add the following Sections: “3.3.2.1 The Contractor shall immediately remove from the Work, whenever requested to do so

by the Owner, any person who is considered by the Owner or Architect to be incompetent or disposed to be so disorderly, or who for any reason is not satisfactory to the Owner, and that person shall not again be employed on the Work without the consent of the Owner or the Architect.”

“3.3.4 The Contractor must provide suitable storage facilities at the Site for the proper

protection and safe storage of their materials, or as otherwise identified by the specifications. Consult the Owner and the Architect before storing any materials.”

“3.3.5 When any room is used as a shop, storeroom, office, etc., by the Contractor or

Subcontractor(s) during the construction of the Work, the Contractor making use of these areas will be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such use.”

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the Following Sections: “3.4.4 Before starting the Work, each Contractor shall carefully examine all preparatory Work

that has been executed to receive their Work. Check carefully, by whatever means are required, to insure that its Work and adjacent, related Work, will finish to proper contours, planes and levels. Promptly notify the Architect & Owner of any defects or imperfections in preparatory Work which will in any way affect satisfactory completion of its Work. Absence of such notification will be construed as an acceptance of preparatory Work and later claims of defects will not be recognized.”

“3.4.5 Under no circumstances shall the Contractor’s Work proceed prior to preparatory Work

having been completely cured, dried and/or otherwise made satisfactory to receive this Work. Responsibility for timely installation of all materials rests solely with the Contractor responsible for that Work, who shall maintain coordination at all times.”

3.5 WARRANTY Add the following Sections: “3.5.3 The Contractor will guarantee all materials and workmanship against original defects,

except injury from proper and usual wear when used for the purpose intended, for two years after Acceptance by the Owner, and will maintain all items in perfect condition during the period of warranty.”



“3.5.4 Defects appearing during the period of warranty will be made good by the Contractor at his expense upon demand of the Owner, it being required that all work will be in perfect condition when the period of warranty will have elapsed.”

“3.5.5 Upon notification by the Owner of a defect covered by the Contractor’s warranty, the

Contractor shall respond within 4 hours of the notification.” “3.5.6 In addition to the General Warranty there are other warranties required for certain items

for different periods of time than the two years as above, and are particularly so stated in that part of the specifications referring to same. The said warranties will commence at the same time as the General Warranty.”

“3.5.7 If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect or damage within a reasonable time

after receipt of notice, the Owner will have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the failure, defect or damage at the Contractor’s expense.”

3.8 ALLOWANCES Add the following Section: “3.8.1.1 For costs to be covered under a project allowance, (included in the schedule of values)

the Contractor shall submit a summary of those costs anticipated and an Allowance Access Authorization Form to the Architect and Owner, reflecting the projected costs. The Allowance Access Authorization Form must be signed by the Owner prior to initiating any work associated with the allowance.”

3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add “estimated” after “and the” and before “date of” in the second sentence. 3.10.2 Strike “and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule” in the first

sentence. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add the following Sections: “3.11.1 During the course of the Work, the Contractor shall maintain a record set of drawings on

which the Contractor shall mark the actual physical location of all piping, valves, equipment, conduit, outlets, access panels, controls, actuators, including all appurtenances that will be concealed once construction is complete, etc., including all invert elevations.”

“3.11.2 At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall obtain a set of the conformed

contract drawings from the Architect, and neatly transfer all information outlined in 3.11.1 to provide a complete record of the as-built conditions.”

“3.11.3 Upon completion of the work noted in 3.11.2 the contractor shall schedule a meeting

with the Architect/Engineer and Owner to review the final record drawings and closeout documents prior to submission. After this meeting the Contractor shall make adjustments per the review, and submit one (1) original markup and (2) copies of the red line drawings (as-built conditions, to the Owner and one (1) print to the Architect. In addition, attach one complete set of the as-built documents to each of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions/Manuals. The Contractor will include (2) USB drives, each containing all “red line drawings (as-built) and



Closeout Documents properly tabbed in accordance with closeout requirements as defined elsewhere in the contract documents.”

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.10.2 Strike “If the Contract Documents require” from the beginning of the sentence. 3.12.10.2 Strike “to” between “professional” and certify” and replace with “shall”. 3.17 Insert “indemnify and” between “shall” and “hold” in the second sentence. ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.7 Strike the first sentence and replace with the following: “The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s

submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for the purpose of checking for conformance with the Contract Documents.”

4.2.7 Strike the second sentence and replace with the following: “The Architect’s action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in

the Work in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate Contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Owner’s professional judgment to permit adequate review.”

Add the following Section: “4.2.10.1 There will be no full-time Project Representative provided by the Owner or

Architect on this project.” “4.2.13 Add “and in compliance with all local requirements.” to the end of the sentence.” ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.3 Strike Section 5.2.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: “If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the

Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection, subject to the statutory requirements of 29 Delaware Code § 6962(d)(10)b.3 and 4.”

5.2.4 Strike Section 5.2.4 in its entirety and replace with the following: ”The Contractor may not substitute any Subcontractor listed in its Bid unless the Contractor

complies with the requirements of 29 Delaware Code § 6962(d)(10)b.3 and 4. Failure to comply with this requirement shall subject the Contractor to a penalty as outlined in Section 5.2 of the Owner’s General Requirements.”



Add the following Section: “5.2.5 The Contractor shall comply and shall ensure all Subcontractors comply with all

requirements for drug testing as set forth in TITLE 19 LABOR DELAWARE ADMINISTRATIVE CODE 4000 Office of Management and Budget 4100 Division of Facilities Management 4104 Regulations for the Drug Testing of Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on Large Public Works Projects.”

ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE

CONTRACTS 6.1.1 Strike “and waiver of subrogation” from the end of the second sentence. 6.1.4 Strike Section 6.1.4 in its entirety. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.3 Strike “shall” and replace with “may” in the second sentence. ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK (SEE ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN WORK IN THE STATE OF DELAWARE DIVISION OF

FACILITIES MANAGEMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS) 7.3.4.1 Strike “and other employee costs approved by the Architect” after “worker’s compensation

insurance,” 7.3.4.4 Add “work attributable to the” before “change” at the end of the sentence. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN WORK Add “unless such changes are approved” at the end of the third sentence. ARTICLE 8: TIME 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Add the following Section: “8.2.1.1 Refer to Project Specifications Section SUMMARY OF WORK for Contract time

requirements.” 8.2.2 After “by the Contractor” strike “and” and insert “to”. 8.2.4 Add the following Section: “8.2.4 If the Work falls behind the Progress Schedule as submitted by the Contractor, the

Contractor shall employ additional labor and/or equipment necessary to bring the Work into compliance with the Progress Schedule at no additional cost to the Owner.”



8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME 8.3.1 Strike “binding dispute resolution” and insert “any and all remedies at law or in equity”. Add the following Section: “8.3.2.1 The Contractor shall update the status of the suspension, delay, or interruption of the

Work with each Application for Payment. (The Contractor shall report the termination of such cause immediately upon the termination thereof.) Failure to comply with this procedure shall constitute a waiver for any claim for adjustment of time or price based upon said cause.”

Strike Section 8.3.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: 8.3.3 “Except in the case of a suspension of the Work directed by the Owner, an extension of time

under the provisions of Section 8.3.1 shall be the Contractor’s sole remedy in the progress of the Work and there shall be no payment or compensation to the Contractor for any expense or damage resulting from the delay.”

Add the following Section: “8.3.4 By permitting the Contractor to work after the expired time for completion of the project,

the Owner does not waive their rights under the Contract.” ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Add the following Sections: “9.2.1 The Schedule of Values shall be submitted using AIA Document G703, Continuation

Sheet to G702.” “9.2.2 The Schedule of Values is to include a line item for Project Closeout Document

Submittal. The value of this item is to be no less than 1.5% of the initial contract amount.” 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Strike Section 9.3.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: “At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall

submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage.”

Add the following Sections: “9.3.1.3 Application for Payment shall be submitted on AIA Document G702 “Application and

Certificate for Payment”, supported by AIA Document G703 “Continuation Sheet”. Said Applications shall be fully executed and notarized.”



“9.3.4 Until Closeout Documents have been received and outstanding items completed the Owner will pay 95% (ninety-five percent) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.”

“9.3.5 The Contractor shall provide a current and updated Progress Schedule to the Architect

with each Application for Payment. Failure to provide Schedule will be just cause for rejection of Application for Payment.”

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Add the following Subsections to 9.5.1: .8 failure to provide a current Progress Schedule; .9 a lien or attachment is filed; .10 failure to comply with mandatory requirements for maintaining Record Documents. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 Strike Section 9.6.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: “9.6.1 After the Architect has approved and issued a Certificate for Payment, payment shall be

made by the Owner within 30 days after Owner’s receipt of the Certificate for Payment.” 9.6.8 Strike “Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents,”

in the first sentence. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Strike Section 9.7 in its entirety and replace with the following: “If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor,

within fourteen days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within thirty days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect, then the Contractor may, upon thirty additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.”

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.3 At the end of Section 9.8.3, add the following sentence: “If the Architect is required to make more than 2 inspections of the same portion of work, the

Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with subsequent inspections including but not limited to any Architect’s fees.”

9.8.5 Strike “shall” and insert “may” in the second sentence. 9.8.5 Insert “1/2 of the” after “make payment of” in the second sentence.



9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 Strike the the first sentence and replace with the following (the remainder of the Section remains

as written): “The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any

stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.”

9.10.2 Strike “to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect” after “required by the Contract Documents” and replace with “shall remain in force until final payment is completed” in the first sentence.

9.10.4.4 Strike “if permitted by the Contract Documents,” ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Add the following Sections: 10.1.1 Each Contractor shall develop a safety program in accordance with the Occupational Safety and

Health Act of 1970. A copy of said plan shall be furnished to the Owner and Architect prior to the commencement of that Contractor’s Work.

10.1.2 Each Contractor shall appoint a Safety Representative. Safety Representatives shall be

someone who is on site on a full time basis. If deemed necessary by the Owner or Architect, Contractor Safety meetings will be scheduled. The attendance of all Safety Representatives will be required. Minutes will be recorded of said meetings by the Contractor and will be distributed to all parties as well as posted in all job offices/trailers etc.

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add the following Section: 10.2.4.1 As required in the Hazardous Chemical Act of June 1984, all vendors supplying any material that

may be defined as hazardous must provide Material Safety Data Sheets for those products. Any chemical product should be considered hazardous if it has a caution warning on the label relating to a potential physical or health hazard, if it is known to be present in the work place, and if employees may be exposed under normal conditions or in foreseeable emergency situations. Material Safety Data Sheets shall be provided directly to the Owner, along with the shipping slips that include those products.

10.2.5 Strike the second sentence in its entirety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND SUBSTANCES 10.3.3 Strike Section 10.3.3 in its entirety. 10.3.4 Insert “hazardous” in the last sentence after “handling of such” . 10.3.6 Strike Section 10.3.6 in its entirety.



ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1.1 Strike “Owner” from the the third sentence . 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE Strike 11.2in its entirety, except that in the case of school projects in which case Section 11.2

shall remain. 11.3 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION Delete Section 11.3 in its entirety 11.4 LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, AND DELAY IN COMPLETION INSURANCE Delete Section 11.4 in its entirety ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add the following Section: “12.2.2.1.1 At any time during the progress of the Work, or in any case where the nature of

the defects will be such that it is not expedient to have corrected, the Owner, at its option, will have the right to deduct such sum, or sums, of money from the amount of the Contract as it considers justified to adjust the difference in value between the non-conforming work and that required under contract including any damage to the structure.”

12.2.2.1 Strike all references to “one year” or “one-year” and replace with “two years”. 12.2.2.2 Strike “one-year” and replace with “two years”. 12.2.2.3 Strike “one-year” and replace with “two years”. 12.2.5 Strike “one-year” and replaced with “two years”. ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW Strike the last sentence. 13.4 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.4.1 Strike the last sentence and replace with the following: “The Owner shall pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable

laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.”



13.5 INTEREST Strike “the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the

absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located” and replace with “30 days of presentment of the authorized Certificate of Payment at the annual rate of 12% or 1% per month.”

Insert the following Section: “13.6 CONFLICTS WITH FEDERAL STATUTES OR REGULATIONS 13.6.1 If any provision, specifications or requirement of the Contract Documents conflict or is

inconsistent with any statute, law or regulation of the government of the United State of America, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner immediately upon discovery.”

ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1.4 Insert “, upon the Contractors’ request,” after “”furnish to the Contractor” . 14.1.3 Strike “and profit on Work not executed, and” after “as well as reasonable overhead” and

replace with “, profit, and reasonable” 14.3 SUSPENSION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.2 Strike “Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit”. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.3 Strike Section 14.4.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: “In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to

receive payment for Work executed, and reasonable costs incurred by reason of such termination along with reasonable overhead.”

ARTICLE 15: CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1 CLAIMS 15.1.2 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS Strike the last sentence. 15.1.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Strike all references to “21” and replace with “45”. 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS Strike the first sentence and replace with the following:



“Contractor shall not proceed to execute any portion of the Work that is subject to the Claim without prior approval of the costs or method of payment for the costs associated with the Claim as determined by the Architect and approved by the Owner.”

15.1.7 WAIVER OF CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Strike Section 15.1.7 in its entirety. 15.2 INITIAL DECISION 15.2.1 Strike “and binding dispute resolution” in the fourth sentence and replace with “or any and all

remedies at law or in equity”. 15.2.5 Strike Section 15.2.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: “The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons

therefore and shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be subject to mediation and any or all remedies at law or in equity.”

15.2.6 Strike Section 15.2.6 and its subSections in their entirety. 15.3 MEDIATION 15.3.1 Strike “binding dispute resolution” and replace with “any or all remedies at law or in equity”. 15.3.2 Strike “, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its

Construction Industry Mediation Procedure in effect on the date of the Agreement,” in the first sentence.

15.3.2 Strike all references to “binding dispute resolution” and replace with “any or all remedies at law

and in equity”. 15.3.3 Strike Section 15.3.3 in its entirety. 15.4 ARBITRATION Strike Section 15.4 and its Subsections in their entirety.

END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS


WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS

00 73 46 Wages for this project shall be paid in accordance with Delaware’s Prevailing Wage Regulations, Heavy Construction Schedule (schedule following), or the Davis-Bacon Heavy Construction prevailing wage rate (schedule following), whichever is greater.

WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 00 73 46-1



WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 00 73 46-2

General Decision Number: DE190012 01/04/2019 DE12 Superseded General Decision Number: DE20180018 State: Delaware Construction Type: Heavy County: Sussex County in Delaware. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly m inimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all con tracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contra ct is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after Janua ry 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contract or must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wa ge determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the appl icable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in c alendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO a nd a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determina tion, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance pr ocess set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wa ge rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note t hat this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of con tracts entered into by the federal government that are sub ject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not appl y to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Relate d Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker p rotections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcon tracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 CARP0173-010 05/01/2017 Rates Fr inges CARPENTER (Includes Form Work)...$ 31.62 22.94 --------------------------------------------------- ------------- ELEC0126-003 05/28/2018 Rates Fr inges

LINE CONSTRUCTION (Lineman)......$ 44.71 26.25% +11.25 --------------------------------------------------- ------------- * ENGI0542-009 05/01/2018 Rates Fr inges POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (Crane, Forklift, and Scraper)...$ 39.85 2 7.11+A FOOTNOTE: A. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Me morial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Ch ristmas Day, and Election Day (provided the employee work s the scheduled work day following the holiday.) --------------------------------------------------- ------------- LABO0199-009 05/01/2016 Rates Fr inges LABORER Backfiller and Tamper (Hand Held).................$ 24.80 19.30 Trencher Hand Guided........$ 24.55 19.30 --------------------------------------------------- ------------- SUDE2014-009 01/20/2016 Rates Fr inges CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 25.78 0.58 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 34.96 23.87 LABORER: Common or General......$ 16.42 4.06 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 18.63 2.68 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 20.62 7.56 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 26.46 7.56 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 25.55 7.56 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 22.32 7.56 --------------------------------------------------- ------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft perform ing operation to which welding is incidental. =================================================== =============

Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts su bject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded ( and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 201 7. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each y ear. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or pers on who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, o r has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or pe rson who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, do mestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections u nder the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not includ ed within the scope of the classifications listed may be adde d after award only as provided in the labor standards contr act clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). --------------------------------------------------- ------------- The body of each wage determination lists the class ification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailin g for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered b y the wage determination. The classifications are listed in al phabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the pa rticular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union av erage rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifie r enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other tha n "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and ra te were prevailing for that classification in the survey. E xample: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation id entifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plum bers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district counci l number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The ne xt number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in p rocessing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014.

Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA ) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier in dicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in th e survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weight ed average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate incl udes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both u nion and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. S U indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted aver age calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in produ cing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that i dentifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in eff ect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-00 10 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weigh ted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next numb er, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producin g the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey comp letion date for the classifications and rates under that identi fier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the cur rent negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. --------------------------------------------------- ------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCE SS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matte r? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination

* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rat e) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, includi ng requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage a nd Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey wa s conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from th is initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process descr ibed in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for th e formal process described here, initial contact should be w ith the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinati ons Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, th en an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour A dministrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full stateme nt of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice ma terial, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not fav orable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Adminis trative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Wr ite to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Boar d are final. =================================================== ============= END OF GENERAL DECISION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 00 81 13-1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

00 81 13 TABLE OF ARTICLES

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 3. CONTRACTOR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT



ARTICLE 1: GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper

execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Performance by the Contractor shall be required to an extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results.

1.1.2 Work including material purchases shall not begin until the Contractor is in receipt of a

bonafide State of Delaware Purchase Order. Any work performed or material purchased prior to the issuance of the Purchase Order is done at the Contractor’s own risk and cost.

1.2 EQUALITY OF EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY ON PUBLIC WORKS 1.2.1 For Public Works Projects financed in whole or in part by state appropriation the Contractor

agrees that during the performance of this contract:

1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin. The Contractor will take positive steps to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provided by the contracting agency setting forth this nondiscrimination clause.

2. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by

or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, sex, color, sexual orientation, gender identity or national origin.”

ARTICLE 2: OWNER

(NO ADDITIONAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – SEE SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS)

ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR 3.1 Schedule of Values: The successful Bidder shall within twenty (20) days after receiving

notice to proceed with the work, furnish to the Owner a complete schedule of values on the various items comprising the work.

3.2 Subcontracts: Upon approval of Subcontractors, the Contractor shall award their

Subcontracts as soon as possible after the signing of their own contract and see that all material, their own and those of their Subcontractors, are promptly ordered so that the work will not be delayed by failure of materials to arrive on time.

3.3 Before commencing any work or construction, the General Contractor is to consult with the

Owner as to matters in connection with access to the site and the allocation of Ground Areas for the various features of hauling, storage, etc.



3.4 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and

attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions.

3.5 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's

employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.

3.6 The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished will be new

and of good quality, unless otherwise permitted, and that the work will be free from defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved, may be considered defective. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment provided.

3.7 Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other

similar taxes, and shall secure and pay for required permits, fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution of the Work.

3.8 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,

regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner if the Drawings and Specifications are observed to be at variance therewith.

3.9 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of the

Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor.

3.10 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of

waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project all waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for returning all damaged areas to their original conditions.

3.11 STATE LICENSE AND TAX REQUIREMENTS 3.11.1 Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall be licensed to do business in the State of

Delaware and shall pay all fees and taxes due under State laws. In conformance with Section 2503, Chapter 25, Title 30, Delaware Code, "the Contractor shall furnish the Delaware Department of Finance within ten (10) days after entering into any contract with a contractor or subcontractor not a resident of this State, a statement of total value of such contract or contracts together with the names and addresses of the contracting parties.”

3.12 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements set forth in Section 6962, Chapter 69,

Title 29 of the Delaware Code.



3.13 During the contract Work, the Contractor and each listed Subcontractor, shall implement

an Employee Drug Testing Program in accordance with OMB Regulation 4104- “Regulations for the Drug Testing of Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on “Large Public Works Projects”. “Large Public Works” is based upon the current threshold required for bidding Public Works as set by the Purchasing and Contracting Advisory Council.

ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

4.1 CONTRACT SURETY 4.1.1 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 4.1.2 All bonds will be required as follows unless specifically waived elsewhere in the Bidding

Documents. 4.1.3 Contents of Performance Bonds – The bond shall be in the form approved by the Office

of Management and Budget. The bond shall be conditioned upon the faithful compliance and performance by the successful bidder of each and every term and condition of the contract and the proposal, plans, specifications, and bid documents thereof. Each term and condition shall be met at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Contract, Bid documents and the specifications, including the payment in full to every person furnishing materiel or performing labor in the performance of the Contract, of all sums of money due the person for such labor and materiel. (The bond shall also contain the successful bidder’s guarantee to indemnify and save harmless the State and the agency from all costs, damages and expenses growing out of or by reason of the Contract in accordance with the Contract.)

4.1.4 Invoking a Performance Bond – The agency may, when it considers that the interest of

the State so require, cause judgement to be confessed upon the bond. 4.1.5 Within twenty (20) days after the date of notice of award of contract, the Bidder to whom the

award is made shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, each equal to the full amount of the Contract price to guarantee the faithful performance of all terms, covenants and conditions of the same. The bonds are to be issued by an acceptable Bonding Company licensed to do business in the State of Delaware and shall be issued in duplicate.

4.1.6 Performance and Payment Bonds shall be maintained in full force (warranty bond) for a

period of two (2) years after the date of the Certificate for Final Payment. The Performance Bond shall guarantee the satisfactory completion of the Project and that the Contractor will make good any faults or defects in his work which may develop during the period of said guarantees as a result of improper or defective workmanship, material or apparatus, whether furnished by themselves or their Sub-Contractors. The Payment Bond shall guarantee that the Contractor shall pay in full all persons, firms or corporations who furnish labor or material or both labor and material for, or on account of, the work included herein. The bonds shall be paid for by this Contractor. The Owner shall have the right to demand that the proof parties signing the bonds are duly authorized to do so.



4.2 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH CONTRACT 4.2.1 If any firm entering into a contract with the State, or Agency that neglects or refuses to

perform or fails to comply with the terms thereof, the Agency which signed the Contract may terminate the Contract and proceed to award a new contract in accordance with this Chapter 69, Title 29 of the Delaware Code or may require the Surety on the Performance Bond to complete the Contract in accordance with the terms of the Performance Bond. Nothing herein shall preclude the Agency from pursing additional remedies as otherwise provided by law.

4.3 CONTRACT INSURANCE AND CONTRACT LIABILITY 4.3.1 In addition to the bond requirements stated in the Bid Documents, each successful Bidder

shall purchase adequate insurance for the performance of the Contract and, by submission of a Bid, agrees to indemnify and save harmless and to defend all legal or equitable actions brought against the State, any Agency, officer and/or employee of the State, for and from all claims of liability which is or may be the result of the successful Bidder’s actions during the performance of the Contract.

4.3.2 The purchase or nonpurchase of such insurance or the involvement of the successful

Bidder in any legal or equitable defense of any action brought against the successful Bidder based upon work performed pursuant to the Contract will not waive any defense which the State, its agencies and their respective officers, employees and agents might otherwise have against such claims, specifically including the defense of sovereign immunity, where applicable, and by the terms of this section, the State and all agencies, officers and employees thereof shall not be financially responsible for the consequences of work performed, pursuant to said contract.

4.4 RIGHT TO AUDIT RECORDS 4.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to audit the books and records of a Contractor or any

Subcontractor under any Contract or Subcontract to the extent that the books and records relate to the performance of the Contract or Subcontract.

4.4.2 Said books and records shall be maintained by the Contractor for a period of seven (7)

years from the date of final payment under the Prime Contract and by the Subcontractor for a period of seven (7) years from the date of final payment under the Subcontract.

ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS

5.1 SUBCONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 5.1.1 All contracts for the construction, reconstruction, alteration or repair of any public building

(not a road, street or highway) shall be subject to the following provisions:

1. A contract shall be awarded only to a Bidder whose Bid is accompanied by a statement containing, for each Subcontractor category, the name and address (city or town and State only – street number and P.O. Box addresses not required) of the subcontractor whose services the Bidder intends to use in performing the Work and providing the material for such Subcontractor category.



2. A Bid will not be accepted nor will an award of any Contract be made to any

Bidder which, as the Prime Contractor, has listed itself as the Subcontractor for any Subcontractor unless:

A. It has been established to the satisfaction of the awarding Agency that

the Bidder has customarily performed the specialty work of such Subcontractor category by artisans regularly employed by the Bidder’s firm;

B. That the Bidder is duly licensed by the State to engage in such specialty

work, if the State requires licenses; and

C. That the Bidder is recognized in the industry as a bona fide Subcontractor or Contractor in such specialty work and Subcontractor category.

5.1.2 The decision of the awarding Agency as to whether a Bidder who lists itself as the

Subcontractor for a Subcontractor category shall be final and binding upon all Bidders, and no action of any nature shall lie against any awarding agency or its employees or officers because of its decision in this regard.

5.1.3 After such a Contract has been awarded, the successful Bidder shall not substitute

another Subcontractor for any Subcontractor whose name was set forth in the statement which accompanied the Bid without the written consent of the awarding Agency.

5.1.4 No Agency shall consent to any substitution of Subcontractors unless the Agency is

satisfied that the Subcontractor whose name is on the Bidders accompanying statement:

A. Is unqualified to perform the work required; B. Has failed to execute a timely reasonable Subcontract;

C. Has defaulted in the performance on the portion of the work covered by the

Subcontract; or

D. Is no longer engaged in such business. 5.1.5 Should a Bidder be awarded a contract, such successful Bidder shall provide to the agency

the taxpayer identification license numbers of such subcontractors. Such numbers shall be provided on the later of the date on which such subcontractor is required to be identified or the time the contract is executed. The successful Bidder shall provide to the agency to which it is contracting, within 30 days of entering into such public works contract, copies of all Delaware Business licenses of subcontractors and/or independent contractors that will perform work for such public works contract. However, if a subcontractor or independent contractor is hired or contracted more than 20 days after the Bidder entered the public works contract the Delaware Business license of such subcontractor or independent contractor shall be provided to the agency within 10 days of being contracted or hired.

5.1.6 The Contractor may employ additional Subcontractors on the jobsite only after submitting

a copy of the Subcontractor’s Employee Drug Testing Program to the Owner for approval. A Contractor or Subcontractor shall not commence work until the Owner has concluded its review and determined that the submitted Employee Drug Testing Program complies with OMB Regulation 4104.



5.2 PENALTY FOR SUBSTITUTION OF SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2.1 Should the Contractor fail to utilize any or all of the Subcontractors in the Contractor’s Bid

statement in the performance of the Work on the public bidding, the Contractor shall be penalized in the amount of (project specific amount*). The Agency may determine to deduct payments of the penalty from the Contractor or have the amount paid directly to the Agency. Any penalty amount assessed against the Contractor may be remitted or refunded, in whole or in part, by the Agency awarding the Contract, only if it is established to the satisfaction of the Agency that the Subcontractor in question has defaulted or is no longer engaged in such business. No claim for the remission or refund of any penalty shall be granted unless an application is filed within one year after the liability of the successful Bidder accrues. All penalty amounts assessed and not refunded or remitted to the contractor shall be reverted to the State.

*one (1) percent of contract amount not to exceed $10,000

5.3 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 5.3.1 The selection of any Contractor to perform asbestos abatement for State-funded projects

shall be approved by the Office of Management and Budget, Division of Facilities Management pursuant to Chapter 78 of Title 16.

5.4 STANDARDS OF CONSTRUCTION FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE PHYSICALLY

HANDICAPPED 5.4.1 All Contracts shall conform with the standards established by the Delaware Architectural

Accessibility Board unless otherwise exempted by the Board. 5.5 CONTRACT PERFORMANCE 5.5.1 Any firm entering into a Public Works Contract that neglects or refuses to perform or fails

to comply with its terms, the Agency may terminate the Contract and proceed to award a new Contract or may require the Surety on the Performance Bond to complete the Contract in accordance with the terms of the Performance Bond.

ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

6.1 The Owner reserves the right to simultaneously perform other construction or operations

related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other Projects at the same site.

6.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and other Contractors reasonable opportunity for

access and storage of materials and equipment, and for the performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate their activities with other forces as required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work consisting of

Additions, Deletions, Modifications or Substitutions, with the Contract Sum and Contract completion date being adjusted accordingly. Such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Professional, as the duly authorized agent, the Contractor and the Owner. All Change Orders must be approved by the Veterans Commission Grants Program (VCGP) prior to commencing the work.



7.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Completion Date shall be adjusted only by a fully executed Change Order.

7.3 The additional cost, or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be by

mutual agreement of the Owner, Contractor and the Architect. In all cases, this cost or credit shall be based on the ‘DPE’ wages required and the “invoice price” of the materials/equipment needed.

7.3.1 “DPE” shall be defined to mean “direct personnel expense”. Direct payroll expense includes

prevailing wage rates plus a maximum multiplier of 1.35 times DPE. For example, if the prevailing wage rate is $50/hour, the DPE would be $67.50/hour (50 x 1.35).

7.3.2 “Invoice price” of materials/equipment shall be defined to mean the actual cost of materials

and/or equipment that is paid by the Contractor, (or subcontractor), to a material distributor, direct factory vendor, store, material provider, or equipment leasing entity. Rates for equipment that is leased and/or owned by the Contractor or subcontractor(s) shall not exceed those listed in the latest version of the “Means Building Construction Cost Data” publication.

7.3.3 In addition to the above, the General Contractor is allowed a fifteen percent (15%)

markup for overhead and profit for additional work performed by the General Contractor’s own forces. For additional subcontractor work, the Subcontractor is allowed a fifteen (15) percent overhead and profit on change order work above and beyond the direct costs stated previously. To this amount, the General Contractor will be allowed a mark-up not exceeding seven and one half percent (7.5%) on the subcontractors work. These mark-ups shall include all costs including, but not limited to: overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, supervision, etc. No markup is permitted on the work of the subcontractors subcontractor. No additional costs shall be allowed for changes related to the Contractor’s onsite superintendent/staff, or project manager, unless a change in the work changes the project duration and is identified by the CPM schedule. There will be no other costs associated with the change order.

ARTICLE 8: TIME

8.1 Time limits, if any, are as stated in the Project Manual. By executing the Agreement, the

Contractor confirms that the stipulated limits are reasonable, and that the Work will be completed within the anticipated time frame.

8.2 If progress of the Work is delayed at any time by changes ordered by the Owner, by labor

disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Owner may determine.

8.3 Any extension of time beyond the date fixed for completion of the construction and

acceptance of any part of the Work called for by the Contract, or the occupancy of the building by the Owner, in whole or in part, previous to the completion shall not be deemed a waiver by the Owner of his right to annul or terminate the Contract for abandonment or delay in the matter provided for, nor relieve the Contractor of full responsibility.



8.4 SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT

8.4.1 Per Section 6962(d)(14), Title 29, Delaware Code, “Any Contractor who fails to perform a public works contract or complete a public works project within the time schedule established by the Agency in the Invitation To Bid, may be subject to Suspension or Debarment for one or more of the following reasons: a) failure to supply the adequate labor supply ratio for the project; b) inadequate financial resources; or, c) poor performance on the Project.”

8.4.2 “Upon such failure for any of the above stated reasons, the Agency that contracted for the

public works project may petition the Director of the Office of Management and Budget for Suspension or Debarment of the Contractor. The Agency shall send a copy of the petition to the Contractor within three (3) working days of filing with the Director. If the Director concludes that the petition has merit, the Director shall schedule and hold a hearing to determine whether to suspend the Contractor, debar the Contractor or deny the petition. The Agency shall have the burden of proving, by a preponderance of the evidence, that the Contractor failed to perform or complete the public works project within the time schedule established by the Agency and failed to do so for one or more of the following reasons: a) failure to supply the adequate labor supply ratio for the project; b) inadequate financial resources; or, c) poor performance on the project. Upon a finding in favor of the Agency, the Director may suspend a Contractor from Bidding on any project funded, in whole or in part, with public funds for up to 1 year for a first offense, up to 3 years for a second offense and permanently debar the Contractor for a third offense. The Director shall issue a written decision and shall send a copy to the Contractor and the Agency. Such decision may be appealed to the Superior Court within thirty (30) days for a review on the record.”

8.5 RETAINAGE

8.5.1 Per Section 6962(d)(5) a.3, Title 29, Delaware Code: The Agency may at the beginning of each public works project establish a time schedule for the completion of the project. If the project is delayed beyond the completion date due to the Contractor’s failure to meet their responsibilities, the Agency may forfeit, at its discretion, all or part of the Contractor’s retainage.

8.5.2 This forfeiture of retainage also applies to the timely completion of the punchlist. A

punchlist will only be prepared upon the mutual agreement of the Owner, Architect and Contractor. Once the punchlist is prepared, all three parties will by mutual agreement, establish a schedule for its completion. Should completion of the punchlist be delayed beyond the established date due to the Contractor’s failure to meet their responsibilities, the Agency may hold permanently, at its discretion, all or part of the Contractor’s retainage.

ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.1 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 9.1.1 Applications for payment shall be made upon AIA Document G702. There will be a five

percent (5%) retainage on all Contractor's monthly invoices until completion of the project. This retainage may become payable upon receipt of all required closeout documentation, provided all other requirements of the Contract Documents have been met.

9.1.2 A date will be fixed for the taking of the monthly account of work done. Upon receipt of

Contractor's itemized application for payment, such application will be audited, modified, if found necessary, and approved for the amount. Statement shall be submitted to the Owner.



9.1.3 Section 6516, Title 29 of the Delaware Code annualized interest is not to exceed 12% per

annum beginning thirty (30) days after the “presentment” (as opposed to the date) of the invoice.

9.2 PARTIAL PAYMENTS 9.2.1 Any public works Contract executed by any Agency may provide for partial payments at

the option of the Owner with respect to materials placed along or upon the sites or stored at secured locations, which are suitable for use in the performance of the contract.

9.2.2 When approved by the agency, partial payment may include the values of tested and

acceptable materials of a nonperishable or noncontaminative nature which have been produced or furnished for incorporation as a permanent part of the work yet to be completed, provided acceptable provisions have been made for storage.

9.2.2.1 Any allowance made for materials on hand will not exceed the delivered cost of the

materials as verified by invoices furnished by the Contractor, nor will it exceed the contract bid price for the material complete in place.

9.2.3 If requested by the Agency, receipted bills from all Contractors, Subcontractors, and

material, men, etc., for the previous payment must accompany each application for payment. Following such a request, no payment will be made until these receipted bills have been received by the Owner.

9.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.3.1 When the building has been made suitable for occupancy, but still requires small items of

miscellaneous work, the Owner will determine the date when the project has been substantially completed.

9.3.2 If, after the Work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially

delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and without terminating the Contract, the Owner may make payment of the balance due for the portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

9.3.3 On projects where commissioning is included, the commissioning work as defined in the

specifications must be complete prior to the issuance of substantial completion. 9.4 FINAL PAYMENT 9.4.1 Final payment, including the five percent (5%) retainage if determined appropriate, shall be

made within thirty (30) days after the Work is fully completed and the Contract fully performed and provided that the Contractor has submitted the following closeout documentation (in addition to any other documentation required elsewhere in the Contract Documents):

9.4.1.1 Evidence satisfactory to the Owner that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness

connected with the work have been paid, 9.4.1.2 An acceptable RELEASE OF LIENS, 9.4.1.3 Copies of all applicable warranties, 9.4.1.4 As-built drawings,



9.4.1.5 Operations and Maintenance Manuals, 9.4.1.6 Instruction Manuals, 9.4.1.7 Consent of Surety to final payment. 9.4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to retain payments, or parts thereof, for its protection until the

foregoing conditions have been complied with, defective work corrected and all unsatisfactory conditions remedied.

ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage, injury or loss to: workers, persons nearby who may be affected, the Work, materials and equipment to be incorporated, and existing property at the site or adjacent thereto. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws ordinances, rules regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on the safety of persons and property and their protection from injury, damage, or loss. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property at the site caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable.

10.2 The Contractor shall notify the Owner in the event any existing hazardous material such as

lead, PCBs, asbestos, etc. is encountered on the project. The Owner will arrange with a qualified specialist for the identification, testing, removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution, to comply with applicable regulation laws and ordinances. The Contractor and Architect will not be required to participate in or to perform this operation. Upon completion of this work, the Owner will notify the Contractor and Architect in writing the area has been cleared and approved by the authorities in order for the work to proceed. The Contractor shall attach documentation from the authorities of said approval.

10.3 As required in the Hazardous Chemical Information Act of June 1984, all vendors supplying

any materials that may be defined as hazardous, must provide Material Safety Data Sheets for those products. Any chemical product should be considered hazardous if it has a warning caution on the label relating to a potential physical or health hazard, if it is known to be present in the work place, and if employees may be exposed under normal conditions or in any foreseeable emergency situation. Material Safety Data Sheets must be provided directly to the Owner along with the shipping slips that include those products.

10.4 The Contractor shall certify to the Owner that materials incorporated into the Work are free

of all asbestos. This certification may be in the form of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provided by the product manufacturer for the materials used in construction, as specified or as provided by the Contractor.

ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1 The Contractor shall carry all insurance required by law, such as Unemployment Insurance,

etc. The Contractor shall carry such insurance coverage as they desire on their own property such as a field office, storage sheds or other structures erected upon the project site that belong to them and for their own use. The Subcontractors involved with this project shall carry whatever insurance protection they consider necessary to cover the loss of any of their personal property, etc.



11.2 Upon being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall obtain a minimum of two (2) copies

of all required insurance certificates called for herein, and submit one (1) copy of each certificate, to the Owner, within 20 days of contract award.

11.3 Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance shall, in addition to the

coverage included herein, include coverage for injury to or destruction of any property arising out of the collapse of or structural injury to any building or structure due to demolition work and evidence of these coverages shall be filed with and approved by the Owner.

11.4 The Contractor's Property Damage Liability Insurance shall, in addition to the coverage

noted herein, include coverage on all real and personal property in their care, custody and control damaged in any way by the Contractor or their Subcontractors during the entire construction period on this project.

11.5 Builders Risk (including Standard Extended Coverage Insurance) on the existing building

during the entire construction period, may be provided by the Contractor under this contract. The Owner shall insure the existing building and all of its contents and all this new alteration work under this contract during entire construction period for the full insurable value of the entire work at the site. Note, however, that the Contractor and their Subcontractors shall be responsible for insuring building materials (installed and stored) and their tools and equipment whenever in use on the project, against fire damage, theft, vandalism, etc.

11.6 Certificates of the insurance company or companies stating the amount and type of

coverage, terms of policies, etc., shall be furnished to the Owner, within 20 days of contract award.

11.7 The Contractor shall, at their own expense, (in addition to the above) carry the following

forms of insurance: 11.7.1 Contractor's Contractual Liability Insurance Minimum coverage to be:

Bodily Injury $500,000 for each person $1,000,000 for each occurrence $1,000,000 aggregate

Property Damage $500,000 for each occurrence

$1,000,000 aggregate 11.7.2 Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance Minimum coverage to be:

Bodily Injury $500,000 for each person $1,000,000 for each occurrence $1,000,000 aggregate

Property Damage $500,000 for each occurrence

$500,000 Aggregate



11.7.3 Automobile Liability Insurance Minimum coverage to be:

Bodily Injury $1,000,000 for each person $1,000,000 for each occurrence

Property Damage $500,000 per accident 11.7.4 Prime Contractor's and Subcontractors' policies shall include contingent and contractual

liability coverage in the same minimum amounts as 11.7.1 above. 11.7.5 Workmen's Compensation (including Employer's Liability): 11.7.5.1 Minimum Limit on employer's liability to be as required by law. 11.7.5.2 Minimum Limit for all employees working at one site. 11.7.6 Certificates of Insurance must be filed with the Owner guaranteeing fifteen (15) days prior

notice of cancellation, non-renewal, or any change in coverages and limits of liability shown as included on certificates.

11.7.7 Social Security Liability 11.7.7.1 With respect to all persons at any time employed by or on the payroll of the Contractor or

performing any work for or on their behalf, or in connection with or arising out of the Contractor’s business, the Contractor shall accept full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all contributions or taxes or unemployment insurance, or old age retirement benefits, pensions or annuities now or hereafter imposed by the Government of the United States and the State or political subdivision thereof, whether the same be measured by wages, salaries or other remuneration paid to such persons or otherwise.

11.7.7.2 Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish Owner such information on payrolls or

employment records as may be necessary to enable it to fully comply with the law imposing the aforesaid contributions or taxes.

11.7.7.3 If the Owner is required by law to and does pay any and/or all of the aforesaid contributions

or taxes, the Contractor shall forthwith reimburse the Owner for the entire amount so paid by the Owner.

ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Owner or failing to conform to

the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and shall correct any Work found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents within a period of two years from the date of Substantial Completion, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Article apply to work done by Subcontractors as well as to Work done by direct employees of the Contractor.

12.2 At any time during the progress of the work, or in any case where the nature of the defects

shall be such that it is not expedient to have them corrected, the Owner, at their option, shall have the right to deduct such sum, or sums, of money from the amount of the contract as they consider justified to adjust the difference in value between the defective work and that required under contract including any damage to the structure.



ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING 13.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching. The Contractor shall

coordinate the work of the various trades involved. 13.2 DIMENSIONS 13.2.1 All dimensions shown shall be verified by the Contractor by actual measurements at the

project site. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications and the existing conditions shall be referred to the Owner for adjustment before any work affected thereby has been performed.

13.3 LABORATORY TESTS 13.3.1 Any specified laboratory tests of material and finished articles to be incorporated in the work

shall be made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the Owner and reports of such tests shall be submitted to the Owner. The cost of the testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.

13.3.2 The Contractor shall furnish all sample materials required for these tests and shall deliver

same without charge to the testing laboratory or other designated agency when and where directed by the Owner.

13.4 ARCHAEOLOGICAL EVIDENCE 13.4.1 Whenever, in the course of construction, any archaeological evidence is encountered on the

surface or below the surface of the ground, the Contractor shall notify the authorities of the State Historic Preservation Office and suspend work in the immediate area for a reasonable time to permit those authorities, or persons designated by them, to examine the area and ensure the proper removal of the archaeological evidence for suitable preservation by the Division of Historical and Cultural Affairs.

13.5 GLASS REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING 13.5.1 The General Contractor shall replace without expense to the Owner all glass broken during

the construction of the project. If job conditions warrant, at completion of the job the General Contractor shall have all glass cleaned and polished.

13.6 WARRANTY 13.6.1 For a period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion, as evidenced by the

date of final acceptance of the work, the contractor warrants that work performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any defect of equipment, material or workmanship performed by the contractor or any of his subcontractors or suppliers. However, manufacturer's warranties and guarantees, if for a period longer than two (2) years, shall take precedence over the above warranties. The contractor shall remedy, at his own expense, any such failure to conform or any such defect. The protection of this warranty shall be included in the Contractor's Performance Bond.



ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

14.1 If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance

with the Contract Documents or fails to perform a provision of the Contract, the Owner, after seven days written notice to the Contractor, may make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. Alternatively, at the Owner's option, and the Owner may terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. If the costs of finishing the Work exceed any unpaid compensation due the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

14.2 “If the continuation of this Agreement is contingent upon the appropriation of adequate

state, or federal funds, this Agreement may be terminated on the date beginning on the first fiscal year for which funds are not appropriated or at the exhaustion of the appropriation. The Owner may terminate this Agreement by providing written notice to the parties of such non-appropriation. All payment obligations of the Owner will cease upon the date of termination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Owner agrees that it will use its best efforts to obtain approval of necessary funds to continue the Agreement by taking appropriate action to request adequate funds to continue the Agreement.”

END OF GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

EMPLOYEE DRUG TESTING REPORT FORM

Period Ending:

4104 Regulations for the Drug Testing of Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on

Large Public Works Projects requires that Contractors and Subcontractors who work on Large

Public Works Contracts funded all or in part with public funds maintain testing data that includes

but is not limited to the data elements below.

Project Number:

Project Name:



Number of employees who worked on the jobsite during the report period:

Number of employees subject to random testing during the report period:

Number of Negative Results Number of Positive Results

Action taken on employee(s) in response to a failed or positive random test:

Date: _______________

This form is not required to be submitted to the Owner. Included as a reference to show

information required to be maintained by the Contractor. The Owner shall have the right to

periodically audit all Contractor and Subcontractor test results at the Contractor’s or

Subcontractor’s offices (or by other means to make the data available for inspection by the

Owner).

DRUG TESTING FORMS 00 81 14-1

EMPLOYEE DRUG TESTING

REPORT OF POSITIVE RESULTS

4104 Regulations for the Drug Testing of Contractor and Subcontractor Employees Working on

Large Public Works Projects requires that Contractors and Subcontractors who work on Large

Public Works Contracts funded all or in part with public funds to notify the Owner in writing of

a positive random drug test.

Project Number:

Project Name:



Name of employee with positive test result:

Last 4 digits of employee SSN:

Date test results received:

Action taken on employee in response to a positive test result:

Authorized Representative of Contractor/Subcontractor:

(typed or printed)

Authorized Representative of Contractor/Subcontractor:

(signature)

Date: _______________

This form shall be sent by mail to the Owner within 24 hours of receipt of test results.

Enclose this test results form in a sealed envelope with the notation "Drug Testing Form – DO

NOT OPEN" on the face thereof and place in a separate mailing envelope. DRUG TESTING FORMS 00 81 14-2


SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 1

SUMMARY OF WORK

01 11 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Delaware Veterans Memorial Cemetery, Project No. DE-16-23 Project Location: 26669 Patriots Way, Millsboro, Delaware 19966

B. Owner: State of Delaware Owner's Representative: Larry Schrock,

Construction Project Manager OMB/DFM Thomas Collins Building 540 DuPont Highway

Dover, DE 19901

C. Engineer: Stephen L. Johns, P.E., P.L.S. VanDemark & Lynch, Inc. 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802

D. Engineer's Consultants: Engineer has retained the following design professionals who have

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

Quality Control: Darrell L. Meehl, RLA, ASLA The La Group 40 Long Alley Saratoga Springs, New York 12866 Structural: Darryl C. Jones, P.E. Steinle Construction Engineers 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802



Electrical: Michael Finamore DEDC, LLC 315 South Chapel Street Newark, Delaware 19711 Geotechnical: Meghan Lester Geo-Technology Associates, Inc. 18 Boulden Circle, Suite 36 New Castle, Delaware 19729 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Installation of 8 columbarium walls containing a total of 1,600 cremain niches and other

Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings and as indicated by requirements of this Section. Contractor operations shall not impact the Owners continued operation of the cemetery during the construction process.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas indicated on the Drawings. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, walkways, and entrances serving

premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, visitors, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

C. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing drives, parking, walkways, and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities. Do not close or obstruct drives, parking, walkways, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 48 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.



1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on the site and in the existing building to normal business

working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: Pending approval of the owner. 2. Early Morning Hours: Pending approval of the owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Pending approval of the owner. 4. All work is to stop during funeral services.

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise, vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by scheduled on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 - 1

UNIT PRICES SECTION 01 22 00

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and

handling Change Orders.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased at the request of the Owner.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.

1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with Delaware #57 Stone, as required, according to Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on in-place surveys of volume before and after removal.


UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 - 2

B. Unit Price No. 2: Provide and install Precast Concrete Columbarium Wall. 1. Description: Provide and install Precast Concrete Columbarium at location directed by

Owner, according to Section 03 48 24 “Precast Concrete Columbarium Units."

C. Unit Price No. 3: Provide and Install Precast Limestone Columbarium Cap. 1. Description: Provide and install Precast Limestone Columbarium Cap at location directed

by Owner, according to Section 04 40 10 “Cut Stone Assemblies." 2. Unit of Measurement: Each for Cap Types 1 through 3.

D. Unit Price No. 4: Install Sod.

1. Description: Install Sod according to Section 32 90 00 “Planting" 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard of Sod installed.

E. Unit Price No. 5: Install Seed & Mulch.

1. Description: Install Seed & Mulch according to Section 32 90 00 “Planting" 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard of Seed & Mulch installed.

F. Unit Price No. 6: Install Valve-In-Head Sprinkler. 1. Description: Install Valve-in-Head Sprinkler according to Section 32 84 00 “Planting

Irrigation" 2. Unit of Measurement: Each for every additional Valve-In-Head Sprinkler installed.

G. Unit Price No. 7: Install 2½ inch PVC Pipe. 1. Description: Install 2½ inch PVC Pipe according to Section 32 84 00 “Planting Irrigation" 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Feet of 2½ inch PVC Pipe installed.

H. Unit Price No. 8: Install Two Wire Cable. 1. Description: Install Two Wire Cable according to Section 32 84 00 “Planting Irrigation" 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Feet of Two Wire Cable installed.

END OF SECTION


ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1

ALTERNATES 01 23 00

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Ornamental Cast Aluminum Fence; Electronic Gate & Manual Swing Gate

1. Base Bid: 2. Alternate: Install 6 foot high Ornamental Cast Aluminum Fence, Electronic Slide Gate

and 6’ high x 30 foot wide manual double swing gate along the Cemetery frontage on Patriots Way, including installing all electrical and access control measures, topsoiling, seeding, sod, and all other incidental materials and activities required to provide a completed project as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with this project manual.


ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2

B. Alternate No. 2: Brick-Faced Piers with Limestone Cap

1. Base Bid: 2. Alternate: Install 2 foot by 2 foot brick faced piers with limestone cap, approximately 6 ½

feet high. Brick and limestone cap to match to match columbarium. This includes excavation and backfill, providing and installing columns, supplying and installing all brick, stone and other required materials, topsoiling, seeding, and sod, and all other incidental materials and activities required to provide a completed project as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with this project manual.

END OF SECTION


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method

cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and

addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.



i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fourteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Engineer's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fourteen days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



B. Substitutions for Convenience: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Engineer. 1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.


END OF SECTION


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Engineer will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer] will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 21 after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost

adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Engineer. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Construction Change. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary

to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.


END OF SECTION


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit

prices. 2. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract. 3. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as

separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Engineer. c. Engineer’s Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.



g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

6. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

7. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the 15th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by

Engineer.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. 1. Other Application for Payment forms proposed by the Contractor shall be acceptable to

Engineer and Owner. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether

or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.



F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.

Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous

Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application

for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and

remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for

Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.



3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706. 5. AIA Document G706A. 6. AIA Document G707. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.


END OF SECTION


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within seven days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and/or in prominent

location. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.



1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Engineer will return without response those RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities

controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Engineer. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.



C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or other form with substantially the same content as indicated

above, acceptable to Engineer.

D. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt by Engineer of additional information.

3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within fourteen days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly. RFI Log shall provide: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Engineer. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Engineer's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

F. On receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. Use of Engineer's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Engineer's (CAD Files) will be provided by Engineer for Contractor's use during construction. 1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop

Drawings, and Project record Drawings. 2. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data

files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD Civil 3D

format.

B. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:



1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,

provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Contractor will schedule meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, within three days of the meeting, including Owner, Engineer, and Veterans Commission Grants Program (VCGP). Minutes must include the FAI # - DE-16-23.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 14 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. i. Procedures for testing and inspecting. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Submittal procedures. m. Preparation of Record Documents. n. Use of the premises. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.



3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each

construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Engineer of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Contractor will schedule and conduct a project closeout

conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 14 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.



3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data

files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Contractor will conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly or other appropriate intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site use. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of Proposal Requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes.



18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.


END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Unusual event reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an

activity as scheduled.




A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF file. 3. Two paper copies, of sufficient size to display entire period or schedule, as required.

B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or

actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for each activity, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then by early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed

until most recent Application for Payment.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

H. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 2. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim

milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 3. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 4. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 5. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 6. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including

commissioning activities. 7. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 8. Review procedures for updating schedule.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

B. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor

employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

C. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final

completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows

an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

D. Activities: Treat each area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically

allowed by Engineer. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead

items and major items, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a. Columbarium, b. Irrigation system.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for commissioning. 6. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

E. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.



3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Limitations of continued occupancies. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use-of-premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control.

4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Fabrication. e. Deliveries. f. Installation. g. Tests and inspections. h. Adjusting. i. Startup and placement into final use and operation. j. Commissioning.

F. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. "Cost Correlation" Paragraph below establishes progress measured in dollar volume of the Work.

G. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

H. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.

I. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one day before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

J. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.



K. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

1.8 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

1.9 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received

since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an

estimated completion percentage in ten percent increments within time bar.

1.10 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 6. Testing and inspection. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction] Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.



B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within two days of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.3

E. Site Inspection Report: Prepare weekly reports on the condition of Erosion & Sediment Control practices. A sample report form can be found at Delaware’s Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control website. http://www.dnrec.delaware.gov/swc/Drainage/Documents/Sediment%20and%20Stormwater%20Program/NOI%20Forms/Example_SelfReviewForm.pdf


END OF SECTION


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 33 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the

schedule of values. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination

drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software. 3. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and

maintenance material submittals. 5. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing

for submittals.



4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation.

1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Engineer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section

number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Indication of full or partial submittal. 13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 14. Other necessary identification. 15. Remarks. 16. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Engineer on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

D. Paper Submittals: 1. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include

name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Engineer will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Engineer will not return copies. 5. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless

Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.



E. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Engineer by sending via

email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Engineer. a. Engineer, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital

Project Record Document file. 2. Paper: Prepare submittals in paper form, and deliver to Engineer.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different

Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Engineer and to Engineer's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Engineer before being returned to Contractor. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified

number of copies to Engineer.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action

stamp.



E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.

1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches a. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Engineer will return [one] copy.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the

following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer.



d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information indicated.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Engineer will retain one Sample

set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

G. Certificates: 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.



2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Test and Research Reports:

1. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

2. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Engineer.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for

coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Engineer will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have

Contractor's review and approval.



1.10 ENGINEER'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required

and return it. 1. PDF Submittals: Engineer will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate

action. 2. Paper Submittals: Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark

stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Engineer.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Engineer will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Engineer without action.


END OF SECTION


SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01 33 23 - 1

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01 33 23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. Refer to Articles titled SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (FAR 52.236-21) and, SPECIAL NOTES (VAAR 852.236-91), in GENERAL CONDITIONS.

1-2. For the purposes of this contract, samples (including laboratory samples to be tested), test

reports, certificates, and manufacturers' literature and data shall also be subject to the previously referenced requirements. The following text refers to all items collectively as SUBMITTALS.

1-3. Submit for approval, all of the items specifically mentioned under the separate sections of the

specification, with information sufficient to evidence full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, fabricated articles and the like to be installed in permanent work shall equal those of approved submittals. After an item has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless:

A. Satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and approved by Contracting Officer, that

manufacturer cannot make scheduled delivery of approved item or; B. Item delivered has been rejected and substitution of a suitable item is an urgent necessity or; C. Other conditions become apparent which indicates approval of such substitute item to be in best

interest of the Government. 1-4. Forward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action by

Government. Time submission to assure adequate lead time for procurement of contract - required items. Delays attributable to untimely and rejected submittals (including any laboratory samples to be tested) will not serve as a basis for extending contract time for completion.

1-5. Submittals will be reviewed for compliance with contract requirements by Engineer, and action

thereon will be taken by Resident Engineer on behalf of the Contracting Officer. 1-6. Upon receipt of submittals, Engineer will assign a file number thereto. Contractor, in any

subsequent correspondence, shall refer to this file and identification number to expedite replies relative to previously approved or disapproved submittals.

1-7. The Government reserves the right to require additional submittals, whether or not particularly

mentioned in this contract. If additional submittals beyond those required by the contract are furnished pursuant to request therefor by Contracting Officer, adjustment in contract price and time will be made in accordance with Articles titled CHANGES (FAR 52.243-4) and CHANGES - SUPPLEMENT (VAAR 852.236-88) of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.

1-8. Schedules called for in specifications and shown on shop drawings shall be submitted for use and

information of Department of Veterans Affairs and Engineer. However, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for coordinating and verifying schedules. The Contracting Officer and Engineer assumes no responsibility for checking schedules or layout drawings for exact sizes, exact numbers and detailed positioning of items.

1-9. Submittals must be submitted by Contractor only and shipped prepaid. Contracting Officer

assumes no responsibility for checking quantities or exact numbers included in such submittals. A. Submit samples in single units unless otherwise specified. Submit shop drawings, schedules,

manufacturers' literature and data, and certificates in quadruplicate, except where a greater number is specified.


SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01 33 23 - 2

B. Submittals will receive consideration only when covered by a transmittal letter signed by Contractor. Letter shall be sent via first class mail and shall contain the list of items, name of Cemetery, name of Contractor, contract number, applicable specification paragraph numbers, applicable drawing numbers (and other information required for exact identification of location for each item), manufacturer and brand, ASTM or Federal Specification Number (if any) and such additional information as may be required by specifications for particular item being furnished. In addition, catalogs shall be marked to indicate specific items submitted for approval. 1. A copy of letter must be enclosed with items, and any items received without identification

letter will be considered "unclaimed goods" and held for a limited time only. 2. Each sample, certificate, manufacturers' literature and data shall be labeled to indicate the

name and location of the Cemetery, name of Contractor, manufacturer, brand, contract number and ASTM or Federal Specification Number as applicable and location(s) on project.

3. Required certificates shall be signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer or supplier of material, and by Contractor.

C. If submittal samples have been disapproved, resubmit new samples as soon as possible after notification of disapproval. Such new samples shall be marked "Resubmitted Sample" in addition to containing other previously specified information required on label and in transmittal letter.

D. Approved samples will be kept on file by the Resident Engineer at the site until completion of contract, at which time such samples will be delivered to Contractor as Contractor's property. Where noted in technical sections of specifications, approved samples in good condition may be used in their proper locations in contract work. At completion of contract, samples that are not approved will be returned to Contractor only upon request and at Contractor's expense. Such request should be made prior to completion of the contract. Disapproved samples that are not requested for return by Contractor will be discarded after completion of contract.

E. Submittal drawings (shop, erection or setting drawings) and schedules, required for work of various trades, shall be checked before submission by technically qualified employees of Contractor for accuracy, completeness and compliance with contract requirements. These drawings and schedules shall be stamped and signed by Contractor certifying to such check. 1. For each drawing required, submit one legible photographic paper or vellum reproducible. 2. Reproducible shall be full size. 3. Each drawing shall have marked thereon, proper descriptive title, Cemetery location, project

number, manufacturer's number, reference to contract drawing number, detail Section Number, and Specification Section Number.

4. A space 4-3/4 by 5 inches shall be reserved on each drawing to accommodate approval or disapproval stamp.

5. Submit drawings, ROLLED WITHIN A MAILING TUBE, fully protected for shipment. 6. One reproducible print of approved or disapproved shop drawings will be forwarded to

Contractor. 7. When work is directly related and involves more than one trade, shop drawings shall be

submitted to Architect-Engineer under one cover.

1-10. Samples, shop drawings, test reports, certificates and manufacturers' literature and data, shall be submitted for approval to:

VanDemark & Lynch, Inc. 4305 Miller Road Wilmington, Delaware 19802

1-11. At the time of transmittal to the Engineer, the Contractor shall also send a copy of the complete submittal directly to the Resident Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

REFERENCES

01 42 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.



1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 6. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 7. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 8. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 9. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 10. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 11. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 12. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 13. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 14. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA

Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;

www.quicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.



6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DelDOT; Delaware Department of Transportation 2. DNREC; Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control 3. OMB DFM; Delaware Office of Management and Budget, Division of Facilities


END OF SECTION


REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19 - 1

REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 42 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the availability and source of references and standards specified in the

project manual under paragraphs APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS and/or shown on the drawings. 1.2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS FPMR PART 101-29 (FAR 52.211-1) (AUG 1998)

A. The GSA Index of Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions, FPMR

Part 101-29 and copies of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in the solicitation may be obtained for a fee by submitting a request to – GSA Federal Supply Service, Specifications Section, Suite 8100, 470 East L’Enfant Plaza, SW, Washington, DC 20407, Telephone (202) 619-8925, Facsimile (202) 619-8978.

B. If the General Services Administration, Department of Agriculture, or Department of Veterans

Affairs issued this solicitation, a single copy of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in this solicitation may be obtained free of charge by submitting a request to the addressee in paragraph (a) of this provision. Additional copies will be issued for a fee.

1.3 AVAILABILITY FOR EXAMINATION OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (FAR 52.211-4) (JUN 1988)

The specifications and standards cited in this solicitation can be examined at the following location:

DEPARMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS Office of Construction & Facilities Management Facilities Quality Service (00CFM1A) 425 Eye Street N.W, (sixth floor) Washington, DC 20001 Telephone Numbers: (202) 632-5249 or (202) 632-5178 Between 9:00 AM - 3:00 PM

1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (FAR 52.211-3) (JUN 1988)

The specifications cited in this solicitation may be obtained from the associations or organizations listed below.

AA Aluminum Association Inc. http://www.aluminum.org

AABC Associated Air Balance Council http://www.aabchq.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association http://www.aamanet.org

AAN American Nursery and Landscape Association http://www.anla.org

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials http://www.aashto.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists http://www.aatcc.org

ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists http://www.acgih.org



ACI American Concrete Institute http://www.aci-int.net

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association http://www.concrete-pipe.org

ACPPA American Concrete Pressure Pipe Association http://www.acppa.org

ADC Air Diffusion Council http://flexibleduct.org

AGA American Gas Association http://www.aga.org

AGC Associated General Contractors of America http://www.agc.org

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association, Inc. http://www.agma.org

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers http://www.aham.org

AIA American Institute of Architects http://www.aia.org AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

http://www.aisc.org AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

http://www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction

http://www.aitc-glulam.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.

http://www.amca.org ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association

http://www.anla.org ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.

http://www.ansi.org APA The Engineered Wood Association

http://www.apawood.org ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

http://www.ari.org ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers

http://www.asae.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

http://www.asce.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and

Air-Conditioning Engineers http://www.ashrae.org

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers http://www.asme.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering http://www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials http://www.astm.org

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute http://www.awinet.org

AWS American Welding Society http://www.aws.org

AWWA American Water Works Association http://www.awwa.org

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association http://www.buildershardware.com



BIA Brick Institute of America http://www.bia.org

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute http://www.cagi.org

CGA Compressed Gas Association, Inc. http://www.cganet.com

CI The Chlorine Institute, Inc. http://www.chlorineinstitute.org

CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association http://www.cisca.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute http://www.cispi.org

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute http://www.chainlinkinfo.org

CPMB Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau http://www.cpmb.org

CRA California Redwood Association http://www.calredwood.org

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute http://www.crsi.org

CTI Cooling Technology Institute http://www.cti.org

DHI Door and Hardware Institute http://www.dhi.org

EGSA Electrical Generating Systems Association http://www.egsa.org

EEI Edison Electric Institute http://www.eei.org

EPA Environmental Protection Agency http://www.epa.gov

ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. http://www.et1.com

FAA Federal Aviation Administration http://www.faa.gov

FCC Federal Communications Commission http://www.fcc.gov

FPS The Forest Products Society http://www.forestprod.org

GANA Glass Association of North America http://www.cssinfo.com/info/gana.html/

FM Factory Mutual Insurance http://www.fmglobal.com

GA Gypsum Association http://www.gypsum.org

GSA General Services Administration http://www.gsa.gov

HI Hydraulic Institute http://www.pumps.org

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association http://www.hpva.org

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials http://www.icbo.org

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association Inc. http://www.icea.net



\ICAC Institute of Clean Air Companies http://www.icac.com

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers http://www.ieee.org\

IMSA International Municipal Signal Association http://www.imsasafety.org

IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association NBMA Metal Buildings Manufacturers Association

http://www.mbma.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

http://www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

http://www.naamm.org NAPHCC Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors Association

http://www.phccweb.org.org NBS National Bureau of Standards

See - NIST NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors

http://www.nationboard.org NEC National Electric Code

See - NFPA National Fire Protection Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

http://www.nema.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association

http://www.nfpa.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

http://www.natlhardwood.org NIH National Institute of Health

http://www.nih.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

http://www.nist.gov NLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc.

http://www.nelma.org NPA National Particleboard Association

18928 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879 (301) 670-0604

NSF National Sanitation Foundation http://www.nsf.org

NWWDA Window and Door Manufacturers Association http://www.nwwda.org

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration Department of Labor http://www.osha.gov

PCA Portland Cement Association http://www.portcement.org

PCI Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute http://www.pci.org

PPI The Plastic Pipe Institute http://www.plasticpipe.org

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc. http://www.porcelainenamel.com

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute http://www.post-tensioning.org



RFCI The Resilient Floor Covering Institute http://www.rfci.com

RIS Redwood Inspection Service See - CRA

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association, Inc. http://www.rma.org

SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association http://www.cypressinfo.org

SDI Steel Door Institute http://www.steeldoor.org

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance http://www.igmaonline.org

SJI Steel Joist Institute http://www.steeljoist.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. http://www.smacna.org

SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings http://www.sspc.org

STI Steel Tank Institute http://www.steeltank.com

SWI Steel Window Institute http://www.steelwindows.com

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. http://www.tileusa.com

TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturers Association http://www.tema.org

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 583 D'Onofrio Drive; Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 (608) 833-5900

UBC The Uniform Building Code See ICBO

UL Underwriters' Laboratories Incorporated http://www.ul.com

ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada http://www.ulc.ca

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 SW Varns Road, P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651

WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumber Association P.O. Box 120786 New Brighton, MN 55112 (612) 633-4334

WWPA Western Wood Products Association http://www.wwpa.org


END OF SECTION


TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29 - 1

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies materials testing activities and inspection services required during project construction to be provided by a Testing Laboratory retained by the Contractor.

1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): T27-11 ........................................ Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates T96-02 (R2006) .......................... Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-

Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

T99-10 ........................................ Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 in. Drop

T104-99 (R2007) ........................ Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

T180-10 ...................................... Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer and a 18 in. Drop

T191-02(R2006) ......................... Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 506.4R-94 (R2004) .................... Guide for the Evaluation of Shotcrete

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A325-10 ...................................... Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength A370-12 ...................................... Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of

Steel Products A416/A416M-10 ......................... Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire

for Prestressed Concrete A490-12 ...................................... Standard Specification for Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts,

150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength C31/C31M-10 ............................. Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field C33/C33M-11a ........................... Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates C39/C39M-12 ............................. Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens C109/C109M-11b ....................... Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars C136-06 ..................................... Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates C138/C138M-10b ....................... Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air

Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete C140-12 ..................................... Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units and Related Units C143/C143M-10a ....................... Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete C172/C172M-10 ......................... Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete



C173/C173M-10b ....................... Standard Test Method for Air Content of freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

C330/C330M-09 ......................... Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete

C567/C567M-11 ......................... Standard Test Method for Density Structural Lightweight Concrete

C780-11 ..................................... Standard Test Method for Pre-construction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry

C1019-11 ................................... Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout C1064/C1064M-11 ..................... Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed

Portland Cement Concrete C1077-11c .................................. Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

C1314-11a ................................. Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms

D422-63(2007) ........................... Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils D698-07e1 ................................. Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort D1140-00(2006) ......................... Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than

No. 200 Sieve D1143/D1143M-07e1 ................. Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static Axial

Compressive Load D1188-07e1 ............................... Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of

Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples D1556-07 ................................... Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in

Place by the Sand-Cone Method D1557-09 ................................... Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000ft lbf/ft3 (2,700 KNm/m3))

D2166-06 ................................... Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil

D2167-08) .................................. Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

D2216-10 ................................... Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

D2974-07a ................................. Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils

D3666-11 ................................... Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

D3740-11 ................................... Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design and Construction

D6938-10 ................................... Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

E94-04(2010) ............................. Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination E164-08 ...................................... Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments E329-11c .................................... Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction

Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection E543-09 ...................................... Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Non-Destructive

Testing E605-93(R2011) ......................... Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed

Fire Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members E709-08 ...................................... Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination E1155-96(R2008) ....................... Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers



1.3 REQUIREMENTS: A. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a

laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The laboratory’s scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM standards (i.e.; E329, C1077, D3666, D3740, A880, E543) listed in the technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the “Corporate Office.”

B. Inspection and Testing: Testing laboratory shall inspect materials and workmanship and perform

tests described herein and additional tests requested by Resident Engineer. When it appears materials furnished, or work performed by Contractor fail to meet construction contract requirements, Testing Laboratory shall direct attention of Resident Engineer to such failure.

C. Written Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit test reports to Resident Engineer, Contractor,

unless other arrangements are agreed to in writing by the Resident Engineer. Submit reports of tests that fail to meet construction contract requirements on colored paper.

D. Verbal Reports: Give verbal notification to Resident Engineer immediately of any irregularity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK:

A. General: The Testing Laboratory shall provide qualified personnel, materials, equipment, and

transportation as required to perform the services identified/required herein, within the agreed to schedule and/or time frame. The work to be performed shall be as identified herein and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Observe fill and subgrades during proof-rolling to evaluate suitability of surface material to

receive fill or base course. Provide recommendations to the Resident Engineer regarding suitability or unsuitability of areas where proof-rolling was observed. Where unsuitable results are observed, witness excavation of unsuitable material and recommend to Resident Engineer extent of removal and replacement of unsuitable materials and observe proof-rolling of replaced areas until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Provide part time observation of fill placement and compaction and field density testing in pavement areas to verify that earthwork compaction obtained is in accordance with contract documents.

3. Provide supervised geotechnical technician to inspect excavation, subsurface preparation, and backfill for structural fill.

B. Testing Compaction:

1. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture content for each type of fill, backfill and subgrade material used, in compliance with AASHTO T99/T180, Method A, ASTM D698, D1557, Method A, ASTM D698 and/or ASTM D1557.

2. Make field density tests in accordance with the primary testing method following ASTM D6938, or AASHTO T238 wherever possible. Field density tests utilizing ASTM D1556, AASHTO T191, or ASTM D2167 shall be utilized on a case by case basis only if there are problems with the validity of the results from the primary method due to specific site field conditions. Should the testing laboratory propose these alternative methods, they should provide satisfactory explanation to the Resident Engineer before the tests are conducted. b. Pavement Subgrade: One test for each 400 square yards, but in no case fewer than two

tests.



c. Curb, Gutter, and Sidewalk: One test for each 300 feet, but in no case fewer than two tests.

d. Trenches: One test at maximum 100 foot intervals per 4 foot of vertical lift and at changes in required density, but in no case fewer than two tests.

e. Footing Subgrade: At least one test for each layer of soil on which footings will be placed. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested subgrade when acceptable to Resident Engineer. In each compacted fill layer below wall footings, perform one field density test for every 100 feet of wall. Verify subgrade is level, all loose or disturbed soils have been removed, and correlate actual soil conditions observed with those indicated by test borings.

C. Fill and Backfill Material Gradation: One test per 500 cubic yards, stockpiled or in-place source

material. Gradation of fill and backfill material shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C136, ASTM D422, or ASTM D1140.

D. Testing for Footing Bearing Capacity: Evaluate if suitable bearing capacity material is

encountered in footing subgrade. E. Testing Materials: Test suitability of on-site and off-site borrow as directed by Resident Engineer.

3.2 LANDSCAPING:

A. Test topsoil for organic materials, pH, phosphate, potash content, and gradation of particles.

1. Test for organic material by using ASTM D2974. 2. Determine percent of silt, sand, clay, and foreign materials such as rock, roots, and

vegetation. B. Submit laboratory test report of topsoil to Resident Engineer.

3.3 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING:

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture content for aggregate base material in accordance with the Standard Specifications.

2. Sample and test aggregate as necessary to insure compliance with specification requirements for gradation, wear, and soundness as specified in the Standard Specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete:

1. Aggregate: Sample and test aggregates in stock pile and hot-bins as necessary to insure compliance with the Standard Specifications.

2. Temperature: Check temperature of each load of asphalt concrete at mixing plant and at site of paving operation.

3.6 SITE WORK CONCRETE:

Test site work concrete including materials for concrete as required in Article CONCRETE of this

section. 3.4 CONCRETE:

A. Batch Plant Inspection and Materials Testing:

1. Perform continuous batch plant inspection until concrete quality is established to satisfaction of Resident Engineer with concurrence of Contracting Officer and perform periodic inspections thereafter as determined by Resident Engineer.



2. Periodically inspect and test batch proportioning equipment for accuracy and report deficiencies to Resident Engineer.

3. Sample and test mix ingredients as necessary to insure compliance with specifications. 4. Sample and test aggregates daily and as necessary for moisture content. Test the dry rodded

weight of the coarse aggregate whenever a sieve analysis is made, and when it appears there has been a change in the aggregate.

5. Certify, in duplicate, ingredients and proportions and amounts of ingredients in concrete conform to approved trial mixes. When concrete is batched or mixed off immediate building site, certify (by signing, initialing or stamping thereon) on delivery slips (duplicate) that ingredients in truck-load mixes conform to proportions of aggregate weight, cement factor, and water-cement ratio of approved trial mixes.

B. Field Inspection and Materials Testing:

1. Provide a technician at site of placement at all times to perform concrete sampling and testing.

2. Review the delivery tickets of the ready-mix concrete trucks arriving on-site. Notify the Contractor if the concrete cannot be placed within the specified time limits or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect. Reject any loads that do not comply with the Specification requirements. Rejected loads are to be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense. Any rejected concrete that is placed will be subject to removal.

3. Take concrete samples at point of placement in accordance with ASTM C172. Mold and cure compression test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31. Make at least three cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or less of each concrete type, and at least three cylinders for any one day's pour for each concrete type. Label each cylinder with an identification number. Resident Engineer may require additional cylinders to be molded and cured under job conditions.

4. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143. Test the first truck each day, and every time test cylinders are made. Test pumped concrete at the hopper and at the discharge end of the hose at the beginning of each day’s pumping operations to determine change in slump.

5. Determine the air content of concrete per ASTM C173. For concrete required to be air-entrained, test the first truck and every 25 cubic yards thereafter each day. For concrete not required to be air-entrained, test every 100 cubic yards at random. For pumped concrete, initially test concrete at both the hopper and the discharge end of the hose to determine change in air content.

6. If slump or air content fall outside specified limits, make another test immediately from another portion of same batch.

7. Perform unit weight tests in compliance with ASTM C138 for normal weight concrete and ASTM C567 for lightweight concrete. Test the first truck and each time cylinders are made.

8. Notify laboratory technician at batch plant of mix irregularities and request materials and proportioning check.

9. Verify that specified mixing has been accomplished. 10. Environmental Conditions: Determine the temperature per ASTM C1064 for each truckload of

concrete during hot weather and cold weather concreting operations: a. When ambient air temperature falls below 40 degrees F), record maximum and minimum

air temperatures in each 24 hour period; record air temperature inside protective enclosure; record minimum temperature of surface of hardened concrete.

b. When ambient air temperature rises above 85 degrees F, record maximum and minimum air temperature in each 24 hour period; record minimum relative humidity; record maximum wind velocity; record maximum temperature of surface of hardened concrete.

12. Observe conveying, placement, and consolidation of concrete for conformance to specifications.

13. Observe condition of formed surfaces upon removal of formwork prior to repair of surface defects and observe repair of surface defects.

14. Observe curing procedures for conformance with specifications, record dates of concrete placement, start of preliminary curing, start of final curing, end of curing period.

15. Observe preparations for placement of concrete:



a. Inspect handling, conveying, and placing equipment, inspect vibrating and compaction equipment.

b. Inspect preparation of construction, expansion, and isolation joints. 16. Observe preparations for protection from hot weather, cold weather, sun, and rain, and

preparations for curing. 17. Observe concrete mixing:

a. Monitor and record amount of water added at project site. b. Observe minimum and maximum mixing times.

18. Measure concrete flatwork for levelness and flatness as follows: a. Perform Floor Tolerance Measurements FF and FL in accordance with ASTM E1155.

Calculate the actual overall F- numbers using the inferior/superior area method. b. Perform all floor tolerance measurements within 48 hours after slab installation and prior

to removal of shoring and formwork. c. Provide the Contractor and the Resident Engineer with the results of all profile tests,

including a running tabulation of the overall FF and FL values for all slabs installed to date, within 72 hours after each slab installation.

C. Laboratory Tests of Field Samples:

1. Test compression test cylinders for strength in accordance with ASTM C39. For each test series, test one cylinder at 7 days and one cylinder at 28 days. Use remaining cylinder as a spare tested as directed by Resident Engineer. Compile laboratory test reports as follows: Compressive strength test shall be result of one cylinder, except when one cylinder shows evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, in which case it shall be discarded and strength of spare cylinder shall be used.

2. Make weight tests of hardened lightweight structural concrete in accordance with ASTM C567.

3. Furnish certified compression test reports (duplicate) to Resident Engineer. In test report, indicate the following information: a. Cylinder identification number and date cast. b. Specific location at which test samples were taken. c. Type of concrete, slump, and percent air. d. Compressive strength of concrete in MPa (psi). e. Weight of lightweight structural concrete in kg/m

3 (pounds per cubic feet).

f. Weather conditions during placing. g. Temperature of concrete in each test cylinder when test cylinder was molded. h. Maximum and minimum ambient temperature during placing. i. Ambient temperature when concrete sample in test cylinder was taken. j. Date delivered to laboratory and date tested.

3.5 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE:

A. Inspection at Plant: Forms, placement of reinforcing steel, concrete cover, and placement and

finishing of concrete. B. Concrete Testing: Test concrete including materials for concrete as required in Article

CONCRETE of this section, except make two test cylinders for each day's production of each strength of concrete produced.

C. Inspect members to insure specification requirements for curing and finishes have been met.

3.6 TYPE OF TEST: (approximate number of tests required)



A. Earthwork: Laboratory Compaction Test, Soils: ASTM D1557 __ Field Density, Soils (AASHTO T191, T205, or T238) __ Penetration Test, Soils __ B. Landscaping: Topsoil Test (Test for Organics ASTM D2974) __

(Includes determination of percent silt, clay and foreign materials, such as rock, roots, vegetation to provide determination the topsoil meets the specifications Section 329000 “Planting”, and recommended soil amendments if required.)

E. Concrete: Compressive Strength, Test Cylinders (ASTM C39, ACI 301) 8

END OF SECTION


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 50 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work" for work restrictions and limitations on utility

interruptions. 2. Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Engineer, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility.



C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.

D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given

to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Coordinate location of facilities with Owner. Relocate and modify facilities as required by

progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary of

Work."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.



3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

2. Provide Owner 48 hour notice prior to interrupting any utility service.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment

in a condition acceptable to Owner.

F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Engineer's office. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and non-tracking. Reapply treatment

as required to minimize dust.



C. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing.

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing

facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 31 10 00 "Site Preparation."



D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work.

B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove



soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION


TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 57 19 - 1

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 57 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage that the Contractor must

consider for air, water, and land resources. It includes management of visual aesthetics, noise, solid waste, radiant energy, and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants and resources encountered or generated by the Contractor. The Contractor is obligated to consider specified control measures with the costs included within the various contract items of work.

B. Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or

biological elements or agents which: 1. Adversely affect human health or welfare, 2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life, 3. Effect other species of importance to humankind, or; 4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural, and historical purposes.

C. Definitions of Pollutants:

1. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes.

2. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree trimmings, ashes, and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work.

3. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water. 4. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from

industrial, commercial, and agricultural operations and from community activities. 5. Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with

possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm sewers, creeks, and/or "water of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the governing agency.

6. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass and crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.

7. Sanitary Wastes: a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and animal waste. b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and

consumption of food. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Establish and maintain quality control for the environmental protection of all items set forth herein. B. Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations, and ordinances. Note

any corrective action taken. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA):

33 CFR 328 ................................ Definitions



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section, 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES,

furnish the following: 1. Environmental Protection Plan: After the contract is awarded and prior to the commencement

of the work, the Contractor shall meet with the Resident Engineer to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection. Not more than 20 days after the meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval, a written and/or graphic Environmental Protection Plan including, but not limited to, the following: a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is (are) responsible for

ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan. b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to

be removed from the site. c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's

environmental protection personnel. d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program. e. A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits concerning

environmental protection, pollution control, noise control and abatement that are applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws, regulations, and permits.

f. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, ground cover, landscape features, air and water quality, fish and wildlife, soil, historical, and archeological and cultural resources.

g. Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply with the applicable laws and regulations. Describe the procedures to correct pollution of the environment due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures as described in the Environmental Protection Plan.

h. Permits, licenses, and the location of the solid waste disposal area. i. Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or embankments for

haul roads, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials. Include as part of an Erosion Control Plan approved by the District Office of the U.S. Soil Conservation Service and the Department of Veterans Affairs.

j. Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site including land, water, air, and noise. k. Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identifying

the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for marking the limits of use areas. This plan may be incorporated within the Erosion Control Plan.

B. Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protection Plan will not relieve the Contractor of

responsibility for adequate and continued control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.

1.5 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES

A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the

limits of permanent work during the entire period of this contract. Confine activities to areas defined by the specifications and drawings.

B. Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be preserved

within the work area. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms without permission from the Resident Engineer. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized, or where special emergency use is permitted.



1. Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark the areas that require work to be performed under this contract. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area that are to be saved and protected. Protect monuments, works of art, and markers before construction operations begin. Convey to all personnel the purpose of marking and protecting all necessary objects.

2. Protection of Landscape: Protect trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms, and other landscape features shown on the drawings to be preserved by marking, fencing, or using any other approved techniques. a. Box and protect from damage existing trees and shrubs to remain on the construction

site. b. Immediately repair all damage to existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning, and

painting with antiseptic tree paint. c. Do not store building materials or perform construction activities closer to existing trees or

shrubs than the farthest extension of their limbs. 3. Reduction of Exposure of Unprotected Erodible Soils: Plan and conduct earthwork to

minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils. Clear areas in reasonably sized increments only as needed to use. Form earthwork to final grade as shown. Immediately protect side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading.

4. Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches, benches, and berms to retard and divert runoff from the construction site to protected drainage areas approved under paragraph 208 of the Clean Water Act. a. Sediment Basins: Trap sediment from construction areas in sediment basins as shown

on the plans. After each storm, pump the basins dry and remove the accumulated sediment.

b. Reuse or conserve the collected topsoil sediment as directed by the Resident Engineer. Topsoil use and requirements are specified in Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK.

c. Institute effluent quality monitoring programs as required by Federal, State, and local environmental agencies.

5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices: The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of the Contractor's activities. Construct or install all temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control features shown. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures such as berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins, grassing, and mulching, until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative.

8. Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporary excavations and embankments. 9. Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent contamination of the

environment. Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers that are emptied on a regular schedule. Transport all solid waste off Government property and dispose of waste in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements.

10. Store chemical waste away from the work areas in corrosion resistant containers and dispose of waste in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations.

11. Handle discarded materials other than those included in the solid waste category as directed by the Resident Engineer.

C. Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management,

and control to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters and sewer systems. Implement management techniques to control water pollution by the listed construction activities that are included in this contract. 1. Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived from construction

activities to enter water areas. Collect and place wastewater in retention ponds allowing the suspended material to settle, the pollutants to separate, or the water to evaporate.

2. Control movement of materials and equipment at stream crossings during construction to prevent violation of water pollution control standards of the Federal, State, or local government.

3. Monitor water areas affected by construction.



D. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance,

management, and control to minimize interference with, disturbance of, or damage to fish and wildlife. Prior to beginning construction operations, list species that require specific attention along with measures for their protection.

E. Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and

control to minimize pollution of air resources. Burning is not permitted on the job site. Keep activities, equipment, processes, and work operated or performed, in strict accordance with the State of Delaware’s Air Pollution Statues, Rules, and Regulations, and Federal emission and performance laws and standards. Maintain ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for those construction operations and activities specified. 1. Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all construction

activities, processing, and preparation of materials (such as from asphaltic batch plants) at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in progress.

2. Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical treatment of an approved type, light bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, or other methods are permitted to control particulates in the work area.

3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment to Federal and State allowable limits.

4. Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious odors from occurring. F. Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every action possible. Perform noise-producing work in

less sensitive hours of the day or week as directed by the Engineer. Maintain noise-produced work at or below the decibel levels and within the time periods specified. 1. Perform construction activities involving repetitive, high-level impact noise only between 8:00

a.m. and 6:00 p.m unless otherwise permitted by local ordinance or the Engineer. Repetitive impact noise on the property shall not exceed the following dB limitations:

Time Duration of Impact Noise Sound Level in dB More than 12 minutes in any hour 70 Less than 30 seconds of any hour 85 Less than three minutes of any hour 80 Less than 12 minutes of any hour 75

2. Provide sound-deadening devices on equipment and take noise abatement measures that are necessary to comply with the requirements of this contract, consisting of, but not limited to, the following: a. Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 50 feet (dBA):

EARTHMOVING MATERIALS HANDLING FRONT LOADERS

75 CONCRETE MIXERS 75

BACKHOES 75 CONCRETE PUMPS 75 DOZERS 75 CRANES 75 TRACTORS 75 DERRICKS IMPACT 75 SCAPERS 80 GRADERS 75 JACK HAMMERS 75 TRUCKS 75 ROCK DRILLS 80 PAVERS, STATIONARY

80 PNEUMATIC TOOLS 80

PUMPS 75 GENERATORS 75 SAWS 75 COMPRESSORS 75 VIBRATORS 75



b. Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise transmission. c. Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noise-producing machinery. d. Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes. e. Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that are

maintained so equipment performs below noise levels specified. f. Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material. g. Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so that noise is kept to a

minimum. 3. Measure sound level for noise exposure due to the construction at least once every five

successive working days while work is being performed above 55 dB(A) noise level. Measure noise exposure at the property line or 50 feet from the noise source, whichever is greater. Measure the sound levels on the A weighing network of a General Purpose sound level meter at slow response. To minimize the effect of reflective sound waves at buildings, take measurements at three to six feet in front of any building face. Submit the recorded information to the Engineer noting any problems and the alternatives for mitigating actions.

G. Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private

property resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor shall restore the damaged property to a condition equal to that existing before the damage at no additional cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or restore property as directed or make good such damage in an acceptable manner.

H. Final Clean-up: On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish, and temporary

construction, Contractor shall leave the construction area in a clean condition satisfactory to the Resident Engineer. Cleaning shall include off the station disposal of all items and materials not required to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition and new work operations.


END OF SECTION


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 3. Section 01 42 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Engineer through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product

is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.




A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article. 2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within fourteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Engineer's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00

"Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where

required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

3. See individual identification sections in Division 26 for additional identification requirements.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.



2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.



3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Submit additional documentation required by Engineer in order to establish

equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Engineer, whose determination is final.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide the following: C" 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by the following: C" 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide one of the following: C" 4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C"

5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C" 6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available

manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance

with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C"

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in



"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in

Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by

Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is

consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested.

B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Engineer of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

EXECUTION

01 73 00

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final Project Record Documents,

recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Do not cut and patch construction elements or components in a manner that could

change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.



C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Engineer for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before



fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Engineer promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels where needed to locate

each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Engineer.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Engineer before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.



1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Engineer. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work. 1. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and

replacing defective Work.



3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.



1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." And Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for construction waste manage-ment activities.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction, Demolition, and Land Clearing (CDL) Waste: Includes all non-hazardous solid wastes resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair, demolition and land clear-ing, including material that is recycled, reused, salvaged or disposed as garbage.

B. Salvage: Recovery of materials for on-site reuse, sale or donation to a third party.

C. Reuse: Making use of a material without altering its form. Materials can be reused on-site or

reused on other projects off-site. Examples include, but are not limited to the following: Crushing or grinding of concrete for use as sub-base material. Chipping of land clearing de-bris for use as mulch.

D. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleaning, treating, and reconstituting materials for the pur-

pose of using the material in the manufacture of a new product.

E. Source-Separated CDL Recycling: The process of separating recyclable materials in separate containers as they are generated on the job-site. The separated materials are hauled directly to a recycling facility or transfer station.

F. Co-mingled CDL Recycling: The process of collecting mixed recyclable materials in one con-

tainer on-site. The container is taken to a material recovery facility where materials are sepa-rated for recycling.

G. Approved Recycling Facility: Any of the following:

1. A facility that can legally accept CDL waste materials for the purpose of processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of a new product.

2. Material Recovery Facility: A general term used to describe a waste-sorting facility. Me-chanical, hand-separation, or a combination of both procedures, are used to recover re-cyclable materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall develop a Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Contractor shall provide Waste Management Report: Concurrent with each Application for

Payment, submit 3 copies of report.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Divert a minimum of 75% CDL waste, by weight, from the landfill by one, or a combi-

nation of the following activities: 1. Salvage 2. Reuse



3. Source-Separated CDL Recycling 4. Co-mingled CDL Recycling

B. CDL waste materials that can be salvaged, reused or recycled include, but are not limited to,

the following: 1. Acoustical ceiling tiles 2. Asphalt 3. Asphalt shingles 4. Cardboard packaging 5. Carpet and carpet pad 6. Concrete 7. Drywall 8. Fluorescent lights and ballasts 9. Land clearing debris (vegetation, stumpage, dirt) 10. Metals 11. Paint (through hazardous waste outlets) 12. Wood 13. Plastic film (sheeting, shrink wrap, packaging) 14. Window glass 15. Wood 16. Field office waste, including office paper, aluminum cans, glass, plastic, and office card-

board. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements, that employs a LEED Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC as waste management coordinator.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification pro-

gram.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Conduct construction waste management activities in accordance with hauling and disposal regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction and all other appli-cable laws and ordinances.

D. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct meeting at Project site prior to construc-

tion activities. 1. Attendees: Inform the following individuals, whose presence is required, of date and time

of meeting. a. Owner b. Engineer c. Contractor's superintendent d. Major subcontractors e. Waste Management Coordinator f. Other concerned parties

2. Agenda Items: Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Man-

agement Coordinator. b. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposi-

tion. c. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of con-

tainers and bins needed to avoid delays.



d. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

e. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 3. Minutes: Record discussion. Distribute meeting minutes to all participants.

Note: If there is a Project Engineer, they will perform this role.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN – Contractor shall develop and document the following:

A. Develop a plan to meet the requirements listed in this section at a minimum. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction plan and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight throughout the plan.

B. Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-cleaning and construction waste

generated by the project. List all assumptions made for the quantities estimates.

C. List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in a landfill. The plan should include the following information: 1. Types and estimated quantities, by weight, of CDL waste expected to be generated during

demolition and construction. 2. Proposed methods for CDL waste salvage, reuse, recycling and disposal during demolition

including, but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Contracting with a deconstruction specialist to salvage materials generated, b. Selective salvage as part of demolition contractor’s work, c. Reuse of materials on-site or sale or donation to a third party.

3. Proposed methods for salvage, reuse, recycling and disposal during construction including, but not limited to, one or more of the following: a. Requiring subcontractors to take their CDL waste to a recycling facility; b. Contracting with a recycling hauler to haul recyclable CDL waste to an approved recy-

cling or material recovery facility; c. Processing and reusing materials on-site; d. Self-hauling to a recycling or material recovery facility.

4. Name of recycling or material recovery facility receiving the CDL wastes. 5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated loca-tion on project site where materials separation will be located.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste man-

agement plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste man-agement plan. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of col-

lection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs, including cost of collection containers for each type of

waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)



PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT, GENERAL

A. Provide containers for CDL waste that is to be recycled clearly labeled as such with a list of

acceptable and unacceptable materials. The list of acceptable materials must be the same as the materials recycled at the receiving material recovery facility or recycling processor.

B. The collection containers for recyclable CDL waste must contain no more than 10% non-

recyclable material, by volume.

C. Provide containers for CDL waste that is disposed in a landfill clearly labeled as such.

D. Use detailed material estimates to reduce risk of unplanned and potentially wasteful cuts.

E. To the greatest extent possible, include in material purchasing agreements a waste reduction provision requesting that materials and equipment be delivered in packaging made of recy-clable material, that they reduce the amount of packaging, that packaging be taken back for reuse or recycling, and to take back all unused product. Insure that subcontractors require the same provisions in their purchase agreements.

F. Conduct regular visual inspections of dumpsters and recycling bins to remove contaminants.

3.2 SOURCE SEPARATION

A. General: Contractor shall separate recyclable materials from CDL waste to the maximum ex-

tent possible. Separate recyclable materials by type. 1. Provide containers, clearly labeled, by type of separated materials or provide other storage

method for managing recyclable materials until they are removed from Project site. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water and to minimize pest attraction. Cover to prevent windblown dust.\

3. Stockpile materials away from demolition area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from weather. 3.3 CO-MINGLED RECYCLING

A. General: Do not put CDL waste that will be disposed in a landfill into a co-mingled CDL waste

recycling container. REMOVAL OF CONSTRUCTION WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove CDL waste materials from project site on a regular basis. Do not allow CDL waste to

accumulate on-site.

B. Transport CDL waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

C. Burning of CDL waste is not permitted.

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19-5

STATE OF DELAWARE DIVISION OF FACILITIES MANAGEMENT

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19.6



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 77 00

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.



2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements. 7. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is

completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment

Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of

10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On



receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is

completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Engineer]. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of

the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

D. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with

local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.



B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

i. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" and/or Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including

mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

2. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

END OF SECTION


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

C. Reports: Submit written report bi-weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.



c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Actual equipment locations. g. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. h. Changes made following Engineer's written orders. i. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. j. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. k. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable

paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Engineer. e. Name of Contractor.

1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.



1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.


END OF SECTION


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 1

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 30 53

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide new concrete foundations, foundation walls and slabs for Columbariums and in areas designated on Plans, marked in the field, or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Place concrete on prepared subsurface grades.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. The quality and performance of work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, dated August 2016 (hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”).

Section 207: Excavation and Backfilling for Structures Section 602: Concrete Structures Section 812: Portland Cement Concrete Section 824: Bar Reinforcement

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: All deliveries of concrete shall be accompanied by delivery slips.

B. Manufacturers' Certificates and Data certifying that the following materials conform to the requirements specified. 1. Reinforcement 2. Concrete Mix Design, including source, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index,

percentage of wear, and other tests as specified and in referenced publications. 3. Concrete Test Reports

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Allowable Concrete Temperatures. 1. Temperature of the concrete shall not be greater than 90

0 F, nor less than 50

0 F at

the time of placing as specified in Subsection 602.10. 2. During hot weather, the Contractor may be required to chill the mixing water,

incorporate ice into the concrete mixture as part of the mixing water, or take other measures as prescribing in Section to maintain concrete temperatures below the specified maximum temperatures. The ACI Recommended Practices for Hot and Cold Weather Concreting will be used as a guide in assessing the hazards of hot and cold weather.

B. Do not place concrete during rain, when atmospheric temperature is at or below 36 degrees

Fahrenheit. (2° C), or when conditions are otherwise unfavorable.

C. No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in the forms within the time stipulated in Subsection 812.06


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 2

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete during curing period according to provisions of Section 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete 1. Use Class A concrete developing a compressive strength of 4,500 psi. at twenty-eight

(28) days. 2. Use air-entrained concrete only where concrete is exposed to weather. Use non air-

entrained concrete for foundations, foundation walls and slabs for Columbariums which are not exposed to weather.

B. Cement aggregates, water and air-entrainment methods and materials shall conform to Section

812 of the Standard Specifications.

C. Reinforcement shall meet requirements of Section 824 of the Standard Specifications

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. Excavate subgrade required to lines and grades shown on Plans. B. Prepare foundation subgrade as specified in Section 207 of the Standard Specifications. C. Check that subgrade is smooth, compacted and free of excessive moisture. D. Do not commence work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Concrete foundations shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 602 of the Standard Specifications.

B. Foundations shall be placed at the required grades to accommodate the elevations,

dimensions, and details shown on the Plans for the Columbarium Supports. All soft and yielding or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be removed and replaced with Delaware #57 aggregate according to provisions of Section 207 of the Standard Specifications.

C. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of five days. Backfilling shall not occur until the end of

the curing period.

END OF SECTION


PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMBARIUM UNITS 03 48 24 - 1

SECTION 03 48 24 PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMBARIUM UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section covers the manufacture and installation of precast concrete columbarium units, as

shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to: the steel reinforcement,

steel embedment plates, required sleeves, finished exposed surfaces, preparation of setting

surface, adhesive, columbarium fasteners, and niche cover anchor clip assemblies.

B. Acceptable designs of the columbarium units' components are provided as shown on the

Drawings. The Contractor may use this design for this Work or may propose alternate designs of

the corresponding components as follows:

1. Design for alternate columbarium units shall comply with the design criteria as per Articles

1.3.F and shall comply with the functional tests as per Article 1.3.G of this Specification.

2. Unless indicated otherwise, all provisions of this Specification shall apply to the Contractor

proposed design.

C. The Government may accept or reject part or all of any design proposed by the Contractor.

D. This section includes preparation, cleaning and finishing of exposed faces of the columbarium

units as indicated on drawings or described herein.


A. Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK

B. Section 32 05 23, CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS for Cast-in-

place concrete work.

C. Section 04 20 00, UNIT MASONRY for stone or brick work.

D. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS, Materials and Workmanship for sealant application.

E. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES


A. Manufacturer’s and Installer’s Qualifications: Prior to commencement of work, submit

documentation regarding the experience of his precast concrete supplier and his precast concrete

installer in the design, manufacture and installation of Precast Concrete structures and custom

units.

B. Precast concrete manufacturer’s qualified Registered Professional Structural Engineer to certify

that precast reinforced concrete conforms to specified requirements.

C. Codes and regulations of the Federal, State and County authorities shall apply.

D. Fabricate to dimensions shown or approved. Replace or correct Columbarium Units that do not

comply with the individual dimensions and tolerances.

E. Before starting production of Precast Concrete Columbarium Units, furnish at the site, two

complete Precast Concrete Columbarium Units, to demonstrate quality of construction.



Commence production of columbarium units only after written approval has been obtained from

the Owner's Representative.

F. Design Criteria:

1. The Columbarium Units shall be of the following type, style, and size:

a. Type: Precast concrete, reinforced.

b. Size: Interior and exterior dimensions as indicated on plans.

2. Columbarium top shall be capable of structurally supporting imposed service live load of no

less than 50 lb./ ft², and dead loads based on cap (coping) thickness and heights, including

material composition and element section properties, mortar and grout, and dead loads

based on concrete top element sectional properties.

3. Submit to the Owner's Representative for review and approval 5 sets of design

documentation showing structural design of the complete Columbarium. This documentation

shall include dimensions, methods of construction, and calculations. All design calculations

and drawings shall be signed and sealed by qualified Professional Structural Engineer.

G. Functional Load Tests: If required by the Owner's Representative, a functional load test will be

made at the Contractor’s expense to insure that the columbarium proposed by the Contractor, as

furnished, will be capable of supporting loads stated in Article 1.3.F.2. The functional test will

consist of the following loading conditions:

1. Unconfined Loading: The columbarium will be placed on a flat surface with no support

against the sides. The entire top of the columbarium will be subjected to a simulated uniform

load of live load of 50 lb./ft²and required dead load simulating cap, mortar, and grout as they

will be installed. The load will be maintained for no less than 72 hours. At end of the loading

period, the maximum deflection of the Columbarium top elements shall be no more than 1/8”.

Upon removal of the load from the unit the residual deflection shall be no more than 1/16”

and concrete elements shall be free of all structural distress.

1.4 MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Precast concrete columbarium units shall be product of manufacturer who has a minimum of 3

years of experience in fabrication of the precast concrete columbarium units similar in material,

design, and quantity to that indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Precast concrete columbarium units installer shall have been regularly engaged for at least three

years in installation of precast concrete similar to this project.

C. Supply and Installation of fastener system shall be by product manufacturers and installers, both

whom have had a minimum of 3 years of experience in installation of similar design to that

indicated on the drawing.



1.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES

A. In addition to tolerances of individual elements required by American Concrete Institute

Publication 533.3R, erection tolerances shall be as follows:

1. Variation of anchors and fasteners from dimensions specified: 1/8”

2. Variation in overall dimensions of precast element (height and width): 1/8”

3. Maximum differential between adjacent units in erected position: 1/8”

4. Variation in thickness of precast panels and elements: 1/8”

5. Maximum vertical differential between adjacent columbarium units in installed position: 1/8"

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Division 1 Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and

SAMPLES, furnish the following:

1. Samples of all fastening system elements, mounting hardware and exposed surface finishes

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Stainless Steel Angle with threaded Stainless Steel spring clip to receive the Tamper

Proof Stainless Steel Bolt

b. Stainless Steel Bolt, Nut and Washers

c. Tamper Proof Stainless Steel Screw with indicated security head.

d. Stainless Steel Rosette and 7/8" diameter white or clear washer as indicated.

e. Stainless Steel Expansion Anchors, Bolts and pins

f. Stainless Steel Ferrule loop insert.

g. Shims

h. Washers

2. Samples of two complete Precast Concrete Columbarium Units, to demonstrate quality of

construction, delivered to the site to be approved prior to production.

3 Samples of adhesives and grouts.

4. Samples of concrete repair and/or patching materials.

5. Shop Drawings: Complete shop and erection drawings of all precast concrete columbarium

units, showing:

a. All dimensions and details of construction.

b. Installation and relation to adjoining work.

1) Show the individual units open ended against closed ended, where applicable and

that web centerline distance is maintained across the joint between units.

2) Show that the overall length of the wall, with multiple precast units is to be set with

the indicated overall in place length, within the allowable tolerances (show the

installation tolerances).

3) For back to back precast niche units show that the web centerlines for the back to

back units will align, for the locations below the cap joints, within the allowable



tolerances. (This requires the manufacturer and installation of open-left and open-

right units).

4) Detail where the precast niche units are to be set in the field so the centerline of

niche webs will align with the centerline of cap joints above, within the allowable

tolerances, when the drawings or details indicate this alignment.

c. Reinforcements, anchorage, attachments, inserts, location of all pre-drilled sleeves and

other items to be installed in the work of other trades.

1) Provide a drawing showing the dimensions to position the adjoining parts of the weld

plate attachments on the adjoining materials not part of the precast columbarium

units and identify the adjoining attachment pieces.

d. Joint treatment, joint alignment coordinated with cap stone joints.

e. Any other work required for a complete installation.

f. Provide evidence that the Contractor to be installing the cast in place concrete

foundations for the columbarium and pier units has been contacted prior to any work

relating to the footings for the columbarium construction, and that the construction of the

concrete support (foundations) work has been coordinated with the precast columbarium

unit manufacturer and installer.

6. Production Drawings:

a. Elevation view of each structural element.

b. Planametric view of unit.

c. Sections and details to show quantities and position of reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts,

and essential embedded and non-embedded hardware for fabrication, handling,

transportation and installation.

d. Lifting and erection inserts.

e. Dimensions and finishes.

f. Method of transportation.

g. Method of erection and handling.

7. Erection Drawings:

a. Elevation view of each typical wall segment of interconnected precast niche units, with

the overall in place length and position of the precast niche assembly.

b. Section view of the precast niche units, as they are to be installed, with the critical

alignment elements and field placed dimensions indicated. For double sided units, as an

example, the face of niche unit to face of backed up niche unit shall be indicated with the

construction tolerances for the in place units indicated. Clearly indicate how the units are

going to be set in the field to achieve the intended installed conditions.

c. Provide setting drawing(s) that indicate how the precast niche units are to be positioned

on the foundations, to meet the design drawings. The setting drawings shall be



submitted based upon the field conditions for the foundations for the segments upon

which the precast niche units are to be set. Any discrepancies that exist greater than 1/4”

from the design drawings shall be clearly indicated as the foundations are to be

constructed within this tolerance. The setting of the precast concrete niche units shall not

begin until this information has been provided and approved by the RE/COR, or

adjustments made to the foundations that are acceptable to the RE/COR.

d. Provide coordination drawings indicating the locations for the weld plates in the precast

niche units as well as in the foundations, and coordinate this information so the weld

plates are installed in the correct locations to align within allowable tolerances.

8. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:

a. Each type of Concrete Fastener, including adhesive and anchor devices.

b. Instructions for final cleaning

c. Concrete stain/coating, including color charts of manufacturers standard color palette (If

applicable for this project.)

d. Written instructions of how the exposed concrete of the precast niche units is to be

cleaned and prepared prior to application of the approved stain/coating indicated above.

9. Certificates: Manufacturer’s qualifications specifying precast concrete columbarium units

meet the requirements of ACI 533.3R and as specified.

10. Certificates: Installer’s qualifications documenting the quality and quantity of experience of

the precast concrete installer in the installation of Precast Concrete structures and custom

units.

11. Certificates: Manufacturer of the precast niche units shall provide a written certification, prior

to shipping the materials, that the products being shipped have been checked and that they

meet the dimensional criteria as indicated, within the allowable tolerances for individual units,

and that they can be assembled as part of the identified wall segments, within the allowable

in place dimensions indicated, within the allowable tolerances indicated. The above

manufacturing certifications shall be provided no later than immediately before the units are

offloaded at the site. Units that do not meet these criteria shall either be returned or marked

in such a manner that indicates they are not to be used for the project work. It is the

Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all units that are installed in the project work have

been certified by the manufacturer of the units. The Contractor shall be responsible for

disposal of any units that are not acceptable for installation in the project work at no cost to

the Government.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE

A. Ship precast concrete columbarium units to site with adequate protection to prevent chipping,

breaking and other damage. Materials shall be marked giving proper identifications and location.



Store materials in protected areas to prevent damage including vandalism, injurious effects of

weather and inclusion of foreign matter.

B. Provide access to the units for field verification of the manufacturing dimensions and whether the

units are within allowable tolerances.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the manufacture and erection of precast concrete columbarium units with related work

of other sections of the Specifications. Provide templates for inserts and other devices for

anchoring precast concrete columbarium units to the work of other trades, in sufficient time to be

built into adjoining construction. Perform cutting, fitting and other related work in connection with

erection of precast concrete columbarium unit work. See Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS,

PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES for details regarding the coordination of work.

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee precast concrete columbarium unit work, including anchorage, joint treatment and

related components to be free from all defects in materials and workmanship, including cracking

and spalling, and after erection, completed work will be subject to terms of “Guarantee” article in

Division 1 Specification Sections except that guarantee period is one year.

1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are

referenced in text by the basic designation only. Comply with applicable provisions and

recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.

B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

QQ-S-766C (5) Steel Plates, Sheets, and Strip-Corrosion Resisting

QQ-W-423B Wire, Steel, Corrosive-Resisting

TT-S-00227E (3) Sealing Compound Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For

Caulking, Sealing, And Glazing In Building And Other Structures)

TT-S-00230C (2) Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For

Caulking, Sealing and Glazing In Building and Other Structures)

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications:

ACI 533.3R-70 Fabrication, Handling And Erection of Precast Concrete.

D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards:

A36/A36M-14 Structural Steel

ASTM A276/A276M-15 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

A615/A615M-15 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.

A1064/A1064M-15 Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

C33/C33M-13 Concrete Aggregates



C150/C150M-15 Portland Cement

C920-14a Elastomeric Joint Sealants

E. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:

AWS D1.1/D1.1M-15 Structural Welding Code

AWS D1.4/D1.4M-11 Welding Reinforcing Steel

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers that have previously completed at least one successful NCA columbarium project

are deemed to be acceptable for processing their units through the procedures according to these

specifications and the drawings.

B. Manufacturers that do not have previous successful experience for a NCA columbarium project

may be selected by the Contractor for the project. Contractor is hereby notified that the submittal

process for a manufacturer with no previous NCA experience with a successful columbarium

project, typically takes longer to process.

2.2 COARSE AGGREGATE

A. Hard durable aggregate carefully graded from coarse to fine in proportions required to match

approved samples of precast concrete columbarium units.

2.3 AGGREGATE FOR BACK-UP MIX (FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT):

A. ASTM C33. Limit gradation as required to produce the specified appearance and quality of

concrete.

2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT

A. ASTM C150, Type I and Type II; Color as required.

2.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. ASTM A36.

2.6 STEEL FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

A. ASTM A1064, galvanized.

2.7 STEEL WIRE REINFORCEMENT

A. ASTM A1064, cold drawn.

2.8 REINFORCING STEEL

A. ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GALVANIZED STEEL ITEMS

A. Bolts, nuts, washers, anchors, inserts, and the like for handling, erection, or use by trades.

2.11 NICHE COVER ATTACHMENT HARDWARE (ROSETTES)

A. VA National Cemetery Administration, standard stainless steel rosette, mounting brackets, and

bolts for complete attachment of the niche covers to the precast columbarium units are to be as

shown on drawings:

1. Rosettes



a. ASTM Type 316 stainless steel sheet goods, 0.100 inch thick.

b. Die stamp, producing an eight-petal flower pattern as shown on drawings, one-inch

diameter with slight convex; center hole of, concentric to outer edge, with shoulder recess

of in diameter and 0.035" in depth.

c. Luster finish.

2. Interior mounting and attachment elements:

a. ASTM Type 304 or 316 stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts, nuts, washers, anchors,

mounting brackets, inserts and the like.

2.12 BACK-UP MATERIAL

A. Closed cell neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, vinyl or polyethylene foam rod, diameter approximately

1-1/3 times the joint width.

2.13 BOND BREAKERS IF USED

A. Type and material recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.14 SEALING COMPOUND IF USED

A. Fed. Spec. TT-S-00230 C, Type II, Class A, or ASTM C 920-11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

2.15 FABRICATION

A. Precast concrete columbarium units shall NOT be: fabricated, delivered or incorporated in the

work until samples have been approved. Precast concrete shall comply with ACI 533.3R, except

as modified herein.

1. Concrete for precast columbarium units shall have minimum compressive strength of 5,000

psi at 28 days.

2. Provide additional steel reinforcing as required for casting, handling and erection loads.

3. Back-up Mix: Porosity, strength, weight and gradation of coarse aggregate shall be as

required to produce specified characteristics.

4. Columbarium units shall be cast in steel forms designed to suit shape and finish required and

to withstand high frequency vibration. Concrete shall be deposited in oiled forms. Form oil

shall be non-staining type. Vibrations, where required, shall be continuous during process of

casting to attain through compaction, complete embedment of reinforcement and to assure

concrete of uniform and maximum density without segregation of mix and full thickness of

precast element is attained.

a. Anchors, lifting devices, provisions for cutouts and openings, dovetail slots, notches,

reglets, inserts and similar items required for the work of other trades shall be accurately

positioned in forms before casting elements.

b. Fastener location holes, including those for anchoring of units and attachment of niche

covers, shall be cast into units. Drilling into precast concrete columbarium units, after

fabrication, shall not be acceptable, except where pins are to be inserted through the tops



of the units into the caps above, or where pins are to be inserted through the bottom of

the precast niche units into the foundation below.

5. Cement, aggregate and water shall be obtained from single sources for facing mix of precast

concrete work in order to assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of color.

6. Finish: Exposed faces shall have smooth natural concrete finish, unless otherwise noted.

The face of the units shall be processed by the manufacturer, following removal from the

forms to insure that the discoloration and blemishes on the niche faces are removed before

shipping to the site.

a. Back side of single columbarium units, with back exposed to view shall have surface

finish as indicated on the drawings.

b. Specified surface finish for the exposed back of the columbarium units shall be applied

during the appropriate time of fabrication and curing. Seal coating of exposed back of

units shall be applied as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Curing: Precast concrete shall be cured as required to develop specified structural

characteristics and shall be stored in a manner that will permit all surfaces to cure equally

and minimize warping, without staining the exposed faces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION

A. Before beginning installation, inspect work of other trades in-so-far as it affects the work of this

Section. Install units by competent installation crews meeting the requirements of paragraph 1.4

B. Commencing installation of precast concrete columbarium units will be construed as acceptance,

as suitable, of such work of other trades. Concrete base for the columbarium units shall be

inspected and modified as required, grinding off high spots, to become an acceptable base upon

which to install the units. Columbarium units shall be handled in a nearly vertical plane at all

times and stacked vertically on wood supports of adequate strength, until erected. Cover and

protect precast concrete columbarium units against staining and other damage. Reinstall, realign

and otherwise correct improperly installed units.

1. Accurately place and securely anchor precast concrete columbarium units to adjoining

construction in accordance with approved shop and erection drawings.

3.2 SETTING

A. Each precast element shall be set level and true to line with uniform joints as specified within the

allowable tolerances, and as needed to result in the overall length of the wall assembly being the

specified dimension, within the allowable construction tolerances. Joints that are required to have

sealants shall be kept free of dirt and other contaminants for at least the depth to the contact

points of the backer rod. Precautions shall be taken to protect precast concrete work from being

damaged and soiled during and after installation. Wedges, spacers or other appliances which are

likely to cause staining shall be removed from joints.



B. Setting of the precast niche units is intended to meet the design drawings within the allowable

construction tolerances indicated. There are certain visual relationships that are most critical in

the final installation to achieve the design intent. Generally, the consistency of the cap overhang

in front of the precast niches, as well as the symmetry of the overhang distance are critical. For

double sided columbarium units, as an example, the distance from the face of niche unit to the

face of niche units, when installed back to back, is a critical dimension when setting the units.

Maintaining this dimension in setting the units, especially at the top of the precast niche units, will

allow that the caps be manufactured the same width, and the placement should produce the

correct overhang and be symmetrical. The distance from the center of vertical webs on adjoining

units, especially across the joints between precast niche units where open and closed end units

are joined, are critical as maintaining these allows the proper setting of the niche covers.

Refer to the drawings for additional information regarding the critical element relationships to be used

during the creation of the foundations and setting of the precast units.

C. Where shown, joints shall be filled with sealant. Surfaces and other joints for precast concrete

columbarium units shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt and other foreign matter.

D. Exposed surfaces of units for which the final finish is an anti-graffiti coating shall either be

protected by anti-graffiti coating at the manufacturer or shall be otherwise protected from

vandalism until units are installed and field-applied coating is applied following installation. Units

that have been damaged on exposed surfaces by graffiti, when not coated in advance shall be

rejected and removed from the site.

3.3 SEALING OF JOINTS

A. Where shown and/or wherever required to make the work watertight, joints between precast

concrete columbarium units and between other precast elements and adjoining masonry,

concrete and other materials shall be filled with back-up material for depth extending as required

to form joint of depth as shown or recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide bond

breakers, at base of sealant where space for back-up does not exist and to prevent sealant from

bonding to material at base of joint.

1. Workmanship shall be in accordance with Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 07

92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After erection is complete, clean precast columbarium units using materials, equipment and

methods recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR

A. Precast concrete columbarium units which are damaged, cracked, stained, improperly fabricated

or otherwise defective shall be removed and be replaced. Precast units having minor defects not

affecting serviceability or appearance may be repaired when approved by the Owner's

Representative. Repaired work shall be sound, permanent, flush with adjacent surfaces and of



color and texture matching similar adjoining surfaces and shall show no line of demarcation

between original and patched surfaces. Replacement and repairs shall be done at no additional

cost to the Government.

3.6 FINISHING OF EXPOSED FACES

A. Apply coating to complete, cleaned exposed concrete back and sides as per manufacturer’s

standard specifications and recommendations.

END OF SECTION



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DELWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23 MILLSBORO, DELAWARE 05-15-19

MASONRY MORTARING 04 05 13- 1

SECTION 04 05 13

MASONRY MORTARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

Section specifies mortar materials and mixes.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Mortar used in Section:

1. Section 04 20 00, UNIT MASONRY.

1.3 TESTING LABORATORY-CONTRACTOR RETAINED

A. Engage a commercial testing laboratory approved by Owner’s Representative to perform tests

specified below.

B. Submit information regarding testing laboratory's facilities and qualifications of technical

personnel to Owner’s Representative.

1.4 TESTS

A. Test materials proposed for use for compliance with specifications in accordance with test

methods contained in referenced specifications and as follows:

B. Mortar:

1. Test for compressive strength and water retention; ASTM C270.

2. Mortar compressive strengths 28 days as follows:

Type M: Minimum 2500 psi at 28 days.

Type S: Minimum 1800 psi at 28 days.

Type N: Minimum 750 psi at 28 days.

C. Cement:

1. Test for water soluble alkali (non-staining) when non-staining cement is specified.

2. Non-staining cement shall contain not more than 0.03 percent water soluble alkali.

D. Sand: Test for deleterious substances, organic impurities, soundness and grading.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES.

B. Certificates:

1. Testing laboratory's facilities and qualifications of its technical personnel.

2. Indicating that following items meet specifications:

a. Portland cement.

b. Masonry cement.

c. Mortar cement.

d. Hydrated lime.

e. Fine aggregate (sand).



f. Color admixture.

C. Laboratory Test Reports:

1. Mortar, each type.

2. Admixtures.

D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Cement, each kind.

2. Hydrated lime.

3. Admixtures.

4. Liquid acrylic resin.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials in original sealed containers marked with name of manufacturer and

identification of contents.

B. Store masonry materials under waterproof covers on planking clear of ground, and protect

damage from handling, dirt, stain, water and wind.


A. Publications listed below form a part of specification to extent referenced. Publications are

referenced in text by basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C40-11........................................ Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

C91-12........................................ Masonry Cement

C109-11 ..................................... Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in.

or 50-MM Cube Specimens)

C144-04 ..................................... Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

C150-12 ..................................... Portland Cement

C207-06(2011) ........................... Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

C270-12 ..................................... Mortar for Unit Masonry

C595-13 ..................................... Blended Hydraulic Cement

C780-10 ..................................... Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain

and Reinforced Unit Masonry

C979-10 ..................................... Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

C1329-12 ................................... Mortar Cement

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRATED LIME

A. ASTM C207, Type S.

2.2 AGGREGATE FOR MASONRY MORTAR

A. ASTM C144 and as follows:

1. Light colored sand for mortar for laying stone.



2. White plastering sand meeting sieve analysis for mortar joints for pointing.

B. Test sand for color value in accordance with ASTM C40. Sand producing color darker than

specified standard is unacceptable.

2.3 BLENDED HYDRAULIC CEMENT

ASTM C595, Type IS, IP.

2.4 MASONRY CEMENT

A. ASTM C91. Type N, S, or M.

B. Use white masonry cement whenever white mortar is specified.

2.5 MORTAR CEMEMT

ASTM C1329, Type N, S or M.

2.6 PORTLAND CEMENT

A. ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Use white Portland cement wherever white mortar is specified.

2.7 LIQUID ACRYLIC RESIN

A. A formulation of acrylic polymers and modifiers in liquid form designed for use as an additive for

mortar to improve physical properties.

2.8 WATER

A. Potable, free of substances that are detrimental to mortar, masonry, and metal.

2.9 POINTING MORTAR

A. For Precast Concrete: Proportion by volume; One part white Portland cement, two parts white

sand, and 1/5 part hydrated lime.

2.10 MASONRY MORTAR

A. Conform to ASTM C270.

B. Admixtures:

1. Do not use mortar admixtures, except color admixtures if approved by Owner’s

Representative.

2. Submit laboratory test report showing effect of proposed admixture on strength, water

retention, and water repellency of mortar.

3. Do not use antifreeze compounds.

C. Colored Mortar:

1. Maintain uniform mortar color for exposed work throughout.

2. Match mortar color in approved mock-up.

3. Color of mortar for exposed work in alteration work to match color of existing mortar.

D. Color Admixtures:

1. Proportion as specified by manufacturer.

2.11 COLOR ADMIXTURE

A. Pigments: ASTM C979.



B. Use mineral pigments only. Organic pigments are not acceptable.

C. Pigments inert, stable to atmospheric conditions, nonfading, alkali resistant and water insoluble.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING

A. Mix in a mechanically operated mortar mixer.

1. Mix mortar for at least three minutes but not more than five minutes.

B. Measure ingredients by volume. Measure by the use of a container of known capacity.

C. Mix water with dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will

adhere to vertical surfaces of masonry units.

D. Mortar that has stiffened because of loss of water through evaporations:

1. Re-tempered by adding water to restore to proper consistency and workability.

2. Discard mortar that has reached its initial set or has not been used within two hours.

E. Pointing Mortar:

1. Mix dry ingredients with enough water to produce a damp mixture of workable consistency

which will retain its shape when formed into a ball.

2. Allow mortar to stand in dampened condition for one to 1-1/2 hours.

3. Add water to bring mortar to a workable consistency prior to application.

3.2 MORTAR USE LOCATION

A. Use Type M mortar for waterproof parging below grade, .

B. Use Type S mortar for masonry containing vertical reinforcing bars (non-engineered), masonry

below grade and setting cut stone and engineered reinforced unit masonry work.

C. Use Type N mortar for other masonry work, except as otherwise specified.

END OF SECTION

DELWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23


UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies requirements for construction of masonry unit walls.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Mortars and Grouts: Section 04 05 13, MASONRY MORTARING.

B. Sealants and Sealant Installation: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND

SAMPLES.

B. Samples:

1. Concrete masonry units (all types), when exposed in finish work.

3. Anchors, and ties, one each and joint reinforcing12 inches long.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate special masonry shapes.

2. Indicate reinforcement, applicable dimensions and methods of hanging soffit or lintel masonry

and reinforcing masonry for embedment of anchors for hung fixtures.

3. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars prepared in

accordance with ACI 315.

D. Certificates:

1. Submit certificates signed by manufacturer, including name and address of contractor, project

location, and the quantity, and date or dates of shipment of delivery to which certificate

applies.

2. Indicate that the following items meet specification requirements:

a. Solid and load-bearing concrete masonry units.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 2

3. Identify testing laboratories facilities and qualifications of its principals and key personnel to

perform tests specified.

E. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Anchors, ties, and reinforcement.

2. Shear keys.

3. Reinforcing bars.

1.5 SAMPLE PANEL

A. Before starting masonry, lay up a sample panel in accordance with Masonry Standards Joint

Committee (MSJC) and Brick Industry Association (BIA).

1. Use masonry units from random cubes of units delivered on site.

2. Include reinforcing, ties, and anchors.

B. Use sample panels approved by Owner's Representative for standard of workmanship of new

masonry work.

C. Use sample panel to test cleaning methods.

D. Sample Panel Size: Minimum 4’ x 4’.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty exterior masonry walls against moisture leaks and subject to terms of "Warranty of

Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period to be five years.






A615/A615M-12 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 3

A675/A675M-03 (2009) Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical

Properties

A951/A951M-11 Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement

C67-12 Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile

C90-12 Load bearing Concrete Masonry Units

C216-12a Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale)

C476-10 Grout for Masonry

C612-10 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

D1056-07 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

D1.4/D1.4M-11 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

D. Brick Industry Association - Technical Notes on Brick Construction (BIA):

11-2001 Brick Masonry, Part I

11A–1988 Brick Masonry, Part II

11B–1988 Brick Masonry, Part III Execution

11C-1998 for Brick Masonry Engineered Brick Masonry, Part IV

11D-1988 Brick Masonry Engineered Brick Masonry, Part IV continued

11E-1991 Brick Masonry, Part V

E. Masonry Industry Council:

Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction Manual, 1999

F. Masonry Standards Joint Committee; Specifications for Masonry Structures (TMS 602-11/ACI

530.1-11/ASCE 6-11) (MSJC)

G. American Concrete Institute (ACI):



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 4

SP-66(2004) ACI Detailing Manual

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a meeting on site, after submittals are received and approved but before any work, to

review drawings and specifications, submittals, schedule, manufacturer instructions, site logistics

and pertinent matters of coordination, temporary protection, governing regulations, tests and

inspections; participants to include Owner's Representative and all parties whose work is effected

or related to the work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Hollow and Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90.

1. Unit Weight: Normal weight.

2. Sizes: Modular.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed bars, Grade 60 for bars No. No. 3 to No. 18,

except as otherwise indicated.

B. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A675, Grade 80.

C. Joint Reinforcement:

1. Form from wire complying with ASTM A951.

2. Galvanized after fabrication.

3. Width of joint reinforcement 1 5/8-inches less than nominal width of masonry wall or partition.

4. Cross wires welded to longitudinal wires.

5. Joint reinforcing at least10 feet in length.

6. Joint reinforcing in rolls is not acceptable.

7. Joint reinforcing that is crimped to form drip is not acceptable.

8. Maximum spacing of cross wires 16 inches to longitudinal wires.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 5

9. Ladder Design:

a. Longitudinal wires deformed 0.20 inch diameter wire.

b. Cross wires 0.16 inch diameter.

10. Trussed Design:

a. Longitudinal and cross wires not less than 0.16 inch nominal diameter.

b. Longitudinal wires deformed.

2.3 ANCHORS AND TIES

A. Anchors, ties and fasteners shall all be made from stainless steel.

B. Style and dimensions for the anchors and ties shall be industry standard for the type of

installation being provided

2.4 PREFORMED COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER

A. Thickness and depth to fill the joint as specified.

B. Closed Cell Neoprene: ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1.

C. Non-Combustible Type: ASTM C612, Type V, 1800 degrees F.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-

inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars

indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection:

1. Cover tops of walls with non-staining waterproof covering, when work is not in progress;

secure to prevent wind blow off.

2. On new work protect base of wall from mud, dirt, mortar droppings, and other materials that

will stain face, until final landscaping or other site work is completed.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 6

B. Cold Weather Protection:

1. Masonry may be laid in freezing weather when methods of protection are utilized.

2. Comply with MSJC and “Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction Manual”.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Lay masonry units plumb, level and true to line within the tolerances as per MSJC requirements

and as follows:

B. Maximum variation from plumb:

1. In 10 feet -1/4 inch.

2. In 20 feet - 3/8 inch.

C. Maximum variation from level:

1. In any bay or up to 20 feet - 1/4 inch.

2. In 40 feetor more - 1/2 inch.

D. Maximum variation from linear building lines:

1. In any bay or up to 20 feet- 1/2 inch

2. In 40 feet or more - 3/4 inch.

E. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls from

dimensions shown:

1. Minus 1/4 inch.

2. Plus 1/2 inch.

F. Maximum variation in prepared opening dimensions:

1. Accurate to minus 0 inch.

2. Plus 1/4 inch.

3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL

A. Keep finish work free from mortar smears or spatters, and leave neat and clean.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 7

B. Anchor masonry as specified in Paragraph, ANCHORAGE.

C. Wall Openings:

1. Fill hollow metal frames built into masonry walls and partitions solid with mortar as laying of

masonry progresses.

2. If items are not available when walls are built, prepare openings for subsequent installation.

D. Tooling Joints:

1. Do not tool until mortar has stiffened enough to retain thumb print when thumb is pressed

against mortar.

2. Tool while mortar is soft enough to be compressed into joints and not raked out.

3. Finish joints in exterior face masonry work with a jointing tool, and provide smooth, water-

tight concave joint unless specified otherwise.

4. Tool Exposed interior joints in finish work concave unless specified otherwise.

E. Lintels:

1. Lintels are not required for openings less than 1,000 mm (3 feet 4 inches) wide that have

hollow metal frames.

2. Openings 610 mm (2 feet 0 inches) wide to 1600 m (5 feet 4 inches) wide with no structural

steel lintel or frames, require a lintel formed of concrete masonry lintel or bond beam units

filled with grout per ASTM C476 and reinforced with 1- #15m (1-#5) rod top and bottom for

each 100 mm (4 inches) of nominal thickness unless shown otherwise.

3. Use steel lintels, for openings over 1600 m (5 feet 4 inches) wide, and brick masonry unless

shown otherwise.

4. Provide length for minimum bearing of 100 mm (4 inches) at ends.

F. Before connecting new masonry with previously laid, remove loosened masonry or mortar, and

clean and wet work in place as specified under wetting.

G. When new masonry partitions start on existing floors, machine cut existing floor finish material

down to concrete surface.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 8

H. Wetting and Wetting Test:

1. Test and wet brick in accordance with BIA 11B.

2. Do not wet concrete masonry units before laying.

3.4 ANCHORAGE

A. Veneer to Frame or Masonry Walls:

1. Use adjustable veneer anchors.

2. Fasten anchor to stud through sheathing with self-drilling and tapping screw, one at each end

of loop type anchor. In masonry backup stagger ties in alternate courses.

3. Space anchors not more than 16 inches on center vertically at each stud or 24 inches

maximum horizontally.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Joint Reinforcement:

1. Use as joint reinforcement in CMU cavity walls, and single wythe concrete masonry unit

walls.

B. Steel Reinforcing Bars:

1. Install in cells of hollow masonry units where required for vertical reinforcement and in bond

beam units for lintels and bond beam horizontal reinforcement. Install in wall cavities of

reinforced masonry walls where shown.

3.6 CMU CONTROL JOINTS

A. Provide CMU control (CJ) joints where shown on drawings.

B. Keep joint free of mortar and other debris.

C. Where joints occur in masonry walls:

1. Install preformed compressible joint filler in brick wythe.

2. Install cross shaped shear keys in concrete masonry unit wythe with preformed compressible

joint filler on each side of shear key unless otherwise specified.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 9

3. Install filler, backer rod, and sealant on exposed faces.

D. Use standard notched concrete masonry units (sash blocks) made in full and half-length units

where shear keys are used to create a continuous vertical joint.

E. Interrupt steel joint reinforcement at expansion and control joints unless otherwise shown.

F. Fill opening in exposed face of expansion and control joints with sealant as specified in Section

07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

3.7 BUILDING EXPANSION AND SEISMIC JOINTS

A. Keep joint free of mortar. Remove mortar and other debris.

B. Install non-combustible, compressible type joint filler to fill space completely except where sealant

is shown on joints in exposed finish work.

C. Where joints are on exposed faces, provide depth for backer rod and sealant as specified in

Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS, unless shown otherwise.

3.8 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Kind and Users:

1. Provide special concrete masonry shapes as required. Use solid concrete masonry units,

where full units cannot be used, or where needed for anchorage of accessories.

2. Provide solid load-bearing concrete masonry units or grout the cell of hollow units at jambs of

openings in walls, where structural members impose loads directly on concrete masonry, and

where shown.

B. Laying:

1. Lay concrete masonry units with 3/8 inch joints, with a bond overlap of not less than 1/4 of

the unit length.

2. Do not wet concrete masonry units before laying.

3. Bond external corners of partitions by overlapping alternate courses.

4. Lay first course in a full mortar bed.

5. Set anchorage items as work progress.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 10

6. Where ends of anchors, bolts, and other embedded items, project into voids of units,

completely fill such voids with mortar or grout.

7. Lay concrete masonry units with full face shell mortar beds and fill head joint beds for depth

equivalent to face shell thickness.

8. Lay concrete masonry units so that cores of units, that are to be filled with grout, are vertically

continuous with joints of cross webs of such cores completely filled with mortar.

9. Do not wedge the masonry against the steel reinforcing. Minimum 1/2 inch clear distance

between reinforcing and masonry units.

10. Hold vertical steel reinforcement in place by centering clips, caging devices, tie wire, or other

approved methods, vertically at spacing noted.

11. Grout cells of concrete masonry units, containing the reinforcing bars, solid as specified

under grouting.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Preparation:

1. Clean grout space of mortar droppings before placing grout.

2. Close cleanouts.

B. Placing:

1. Consolidate each lift of grout after free water has disappeared but before plasticity is lost.

2. Interruptions: When grouting must be stopped for more than an hour, top off grout 1-1/2 inch

below top of last masonry course.

3.10 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will

reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on

the Contract Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to

excessive rusting or other causes.

B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars

against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses.



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 11

Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not

less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 inch, whichever is greater.

C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other places unless accepted by the

Owner's Representative. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical

bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.

D. Provide not less than minimum lap as indicated on shop drawings, or if not indicated, as required

by governing code.

E. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 15 mm

(5/8 inch) on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations.

F. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum

cover of 5/8 inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap joint reinforcement

not less than 6 inches at ends. Use prefabricated “L” and “T” sections to provide continuity at

corners and intersections. Cut and bend joint reinforcement as recommended by manufacturer for

continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.

G. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated.

3.11 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. General:

1. Clean exposed masonry surfaces on completion.

2. Protect adjoining construction materials and landscaping during cleaning operations.

3. Cut out defective exposed new joints to depth of approximately 19 mm (3/4 inch) and repoint.

4. Remove mortar droppings and other foreign substances from wall surfaces.

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Immediately following setting, brush exposed surfaces free of mortar or other foreign matter.

2. Allow mud to dry before brushing.

END OF SECTION



UNIT MASONRY

04 20 00 - 12




MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 1

SECTION 04 26 13

MASONRY VENEER


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Clay face brick. 2. Mortar. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar

ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Weep holes and vents. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 2

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances and existing brick sizes. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 3. Mortar admixtures. 4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.

1. Build sample panels in mockup columbarium for exposed unit masonry construction in sizes matching existing units.

2. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Owner in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Owner in writing.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup as shown on Drawings.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 3

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of veneer, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg Fand higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

2.3 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C216.

1. Grade: SW. 2. Type: FBS 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to

ASTM C7. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C67 and is rated

"not effloresced." 5. Sizes in remaining subparagraphs are examples only. Size shall be to match existing

columbarium brick units. Verify availability of sizes with local suppliers and revise to suit Project.

6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 incheswide by 2-1/4 incheshigh by 7-5/8 incheslong.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 5

7. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 8. Where shown to "match existing," provide clay face brick matching color range, texture,

and size of existing Columbarium brick veneer.

2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M.

E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

F. Colored Cement Products to match existing: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime, masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

2. Colored Masonry Cement:

3. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

4. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 5. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.

G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 6

J. Water: Potable.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M, Type 304.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.062-inch-thick, stainless steel sheet.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless steel wire.

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.

2. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless steel wire unless otherwise indicated.

3. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless steel wire.

2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12

feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs

at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.

5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 7

7. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam sheds water.

8. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

9. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

10. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 11. Solder metal items at corners.

B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60 or Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain watertight.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.

B. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4 inches

long. 2. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. 3. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.9 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 8

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use mortar cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use mortar cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Use Type N unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 9

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 10

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

B. Lay hollow brick with face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. At starting course, fully bed entire units, including area under cells.

1. At anchors and ties, fully bed units and fill cells with mortar as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar.

C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 11

3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches

o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings.

B. Provide airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of CMU and Concrete.

1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch

for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 12

3. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. 5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop

flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install weep holes in veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C67 for compressive strength.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 13

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 8. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION



MASONRY VENEER

04 26 13 - 14



CUT STONE ASSEMBLIES

04 40 10 - 1

SECTION 04 40 10


PART - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes work for furnishing and installing all cut limestone for the project, which includes

but is not limited to the following applications of stone masonry:

1. Columbarium caps.

2. Inset stone panels for mounting numbers / metal I.D. letters for Columbarium Walls.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 53, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for the concrete foundation for the precast

columbarium units.

2. Section 04 20 00, UNIT MASONRY for concrete masonry units and veneer anchors.

3. Section 04 05 13, MASONRY MORTARING for securing to substrate with mortar.

4. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS for joining cut stone assemblies to various adjoining

materials as indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include test data indicating compliance with

physical properties specified or as required by applicable referenced ASTM standards.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three samples in each set for each type of

stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected

in completed work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone provided will be

judged.

2. Submit drawing and sample showing the manufacturer recommended drip slot configuration

that demonstrates the physical dimensions of the drip slot, the distance back from the face of

the caps (1” is recommended), and the construction of the drip slots in a corner of the cap. In

no case shall the drip slots be allowed to extend to any exposed face of the caps. Once

submitted and approved, this shall become the drip slot configuration for all of the cut stone

caps.

3. For each color of mortar required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments

used.



04 40 10 - 2

D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with

manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, sources of supply, and other information as

required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.

E. Qualification Data: For Qualified Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stone masons and stone

fitters.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from one quarry

with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including

color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from

single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials

and execution.

1. Build mockups for each type of stone masonry typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48

inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and

accessories.

a. Include stone capping at top of mockup.

b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup and include the joint

flashing.

d. Include veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall

mockup.

2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar and

sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities Owner's

Representative specifically approves in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Owner's Representative specifically approves

such deviations in writing.

4. Mock-up shall demonstrate the materials and methods of installation for all of the elements in

the completed assembly (Columbarium walls)

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.



04 40 10 - 3

B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

C. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and

emptying into dispensing silo. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on

elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with

weatherproof cover.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.


A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of

stone masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the

ground and over the wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by

frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg. F

and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after

completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement,

veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry.


A. The publications listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.



04 40 10 - 4

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications:

530.1-92/ASCE 6/TMS 602 ....... Specifications for Masonry Structures

C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards:

C150/C150M-09 ......................... Portland Cement

E. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:

AWS D1.1-90.............Structural Welding Code

AWS D1.4-98.............Welding Reinforcing Steel

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STONE GENERAL

A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and

from single sources, for the various stone types, complying with this Section.

2.2 LIMESTONE

A. Limestone: Products to be used for the cut stone work for this project shall come from the same

single source manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with detailed requirements, stone varieties that may be

incorporated into the Work include, the following:

a. Indiana Limestone Company, Empire Quarry, Standard Grade, Buff, Smooth finish. The

product specified herein above establishes the minimum acceptable standard for the

quality, manufacturing, finish, and color for the Limestone Cut Stone Assemblies for this

project. Submit samples for review that come closest to matching the existing conditions

at the location(s) indicated.

2. Products: Products for the cut limestone assemblies shall be as indicated above.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM

C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,

Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in

mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry

mortar.

G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from cement and mortar pigments, all

complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.



04 40 10 - 5

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from

manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.

H. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:

1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.

2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone;

of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

a. Color as specified in specification section Division 04, Masonry Mortaring section to match

caulk color.

I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of

composition indicated.

K. Water: Potable

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene

urethane or PVC.

B. Weep Hole/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from [cotton] [or] [UV-resistant synthetic fiber], 1/4

to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18

inches in cavity behind stone masonry. Rope shall be inside plastic tube from front edge of

veneer to point of embedment in the cavity drainage mat or similar material. Use only for

weep holes.

2. Mesh Weep Holes/Vents: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full width of

head joint and 2 inches (maximum) high by thickness of stone (from veneer at front of stone

to embedment in the cavity drainage mat in the air gap behind the stone veneer assembly).

3. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulation nonstaining to stone; compatible with

joint sealants and noncorrosive to anchors and attachments.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride.

2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime.



04 40 10 - 6

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

4. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together

before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,

unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this

dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar

reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not re-temper

or use partially hardened material.

B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Specification and use highest quality for

the intended purpose according to industry standards for the longest life installation.

1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S, Type N.

2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N, Type O.

D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and

natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Color as specified in specification section Division 04, Masonry Mortaring section to match

caulk color.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stone to comply with sizes, shapes, and tolerances recommended by applicable stone

association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.

1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

B. Cut, at manufacturing facility, stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated,

including details on Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for

appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.

1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.

D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to

match approved samples and mockups based upon the designated match existing conditions.

PART – 3 EXECUTION


A. Convene a meeting on site, after submittals are received and approved but before any work, to:

review drawings and specifications; submittals; schedule; manufacturer instructions; site logistics

and pertinent matters of coordination; details, methodology, timing and responsibilities for

construction of the mock-up(s); temporary protection, governing regulations, tests and



04 40 10 - 7

inspections; participants to include Owner's Representative and all parties whose work is effected


3.2 MOCK-UPS

A. The Contractor shall create multiple mock-ups prior to the overall project construction

demonstrating the characteristics, methods of construction, anchorage, color, texture, jointing,

materials to sufficiently convey what the final products will be for the various site elements as

described. Information on the requirements for the mock-ups will be indicated in the

specifications and on the drawings. The general elements for which mock-ups will be required,

specifically demonstrating the cut stone assemblies are as follows:

1. Columbarium Wall – Refer to the specifications for the precast columbarium wall units for

additional details on the mock-ups.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine substrate to verify that weld plates, flashing, and other items installed in substrates re

correctly installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Determine the jointing method for securing the individual cut stone assemblies. Refer to the

drawings for details on where and how the various cut stone assemblies are to be installed in the

various project elements being constructed.

1. Full mortar bed, and mortar on sides of units.

2. Setting on shims, secured to substrate

a. Stainless Steel Pins

b. Adhesive applied to grooves in the cut stone assemblies, and substrate to which it is

attached.

3. Backer rod and caulking at joint between the cut stone assembly and a concrete substrate, or

adjoining material.

4. Backer rod and caulking at joints between adjoining cut stone assemblies.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt damp proofing as indicated.

B. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before

setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear

water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or

abrasives.

C. Coat limestone with dampproofing to extent indicated below:

1. Inset limestone panels: Beds, joints, and back surfaces.



04 40 10 - 8

2. Allow dampproofing to cure before setting dampproofed stone. Do not damage or remove

dampproofing while handling and setting stone.

3.5 SETTING OF CUT STONE ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL

A. Generally field cutting and trimming should not be required as stones are to be cut after field

measurements and submittal approval. Field cutting shall only be allowed if approved in advance

for specific stones or unusual conditions, and following an acceptable demonstration of the

methods to be performed and acceptance of the resulting products.

1. The use power saws to cut stone shall only be allowed as indicated above. Cut lines straight

and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. Cut edges, if allowed shall be in

accordance with the accepted established standards and samples.

B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and

other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately

in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and

indicated tolerances. Before setting, the existing surfaces of concrete or stone, or adjoining

stones shall be protected from damage during the setting process

C. Maintain uniform joint widths as indicated on the contract drawings within established

construction tolerances. If construction tolerances are not indicated on the drawings, then the

allowable tolerances shall be as established in the mock-up or as agreed to by the Resident

Engineer after consultation with the A/E

D. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS."

3.6 PLACING AND PINNING

A. Placement shall match the existing as indicated, and shall be as approved in the mock-up(s).

B. Pins shall be placed after the caps have been set as indicated on the drawings.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Level: For horizontal exposed lines for the stone surfaces, do not exceed plus or

minus 1/8 inch from the true level plane established by the design drawings, unless specific

tolerances differing these exist elsewhere in the drawings or specifications, and have been

accepted by the Owner's Representative following consultation with the design A/E.

B. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone repair may be considered for

very limited situations, if suitable and accepted repair methods are presented and accepted

by the design A/E. and subsequently the State, following recommendations by the A/E. The



04 40 10 - 9

Contractor should include in his bid, the project work and materials that do not allow for the

repair of damaged stones.

2. Defective joints.

3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.

4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups,

complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses.

D. Final Cleaning: Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana

Limestone Handbook."

3.9 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE

A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-

contaminated sand or other materials by removing from the site and legally disposing off the

Owner's property.

END OF SECTION



04 40 10 - 10



COLUMBARIUM NICHE COVERS 04 73 16 - 1

SECTION 04 73 16 COLUMBARIUM NICHE COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made part of this Section of the

Specifications.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: Provide labor and materials necessary to complete the work of this Section,

including but not limited to the following:

1. The Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) shall furnish niche covers for all of the new

Columbarium Niches being installed by the Contractor. This specification section is for all

work necessary for the Contractor to accept, handle, store, move and install one, government

approved and provided, blank columbarium niche cover for each of the new precast niches

created in the new columbarium walls. The government shall also provide, as part of the

niche cover products manufactured for this project, a predetermined minimum number of

approved blank niche covers to act as spares. The spare niche covers are to be used to

replace niche covers should any damage occur, or for re-inscription necessitated by

additional interment at a specific niche location.

2. The number of approved government provided spare columbarium niche covers for this

project to be accepted, offloaded and stored at the designated location is to be determined by

Memorial Program Services (MPS) when they order them. The Contractor shall figure his bid

based upon handling as many as 10-20% of the installed number as spares.

1.3 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installation of columbarium niche covers will be performed by those companies who, through an

approved certification process, have demonstrated previous experience in installation of similar

design as indicated in the drawings and specified herein.

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated

Sections:

1. Section 03 48 24: PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMBARIUM UNITS, the precast concrete

niche units with: niche cover mounting hardware assemblies (installed); and niche cover

attachment hardware assemblies (provided for use to attach the Government provided niche

covers). Four each of the niche cover mounting hardware assemblies shall be furnished and

installed for each precast concrete niche opening. Four each of the niche cover attachment

hardware assemblies shall be provided for each precast niche opening, to be used to mount

the approved government niche covers as indicated and on the drawings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NICHE COVERS (GOVERNMENT PROVIDED) - CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE

A. Niche covers that have been inspected and accepted as being in compliance with manufacturing

tolerances for size, hole size and placement, perpendicularity, finish, and product stone quality

shall be furnished by the Government and delivered to the site on pallets. They shall be of size,

type, manufacturing, finish and quantities required for this project. The covers shall be delivered

to the site Freight on Board (FOB) and the Contractor shall be responsible to offload and secure

them at the job site. The general quantity and condition shall be observed and an adequate

count to cover all the installed columbarium units, plus required spares shall be verified by the

Contractor prior to accepting the units and performing the offloading operations. Note any

shipping damage and reject any damaged covers before the delivery truck leaves the site. Once

satisfied, take ownership of the acceptable covers, as all being approved as meeting the

government specifications and being suitable for installation at this project. Once the niche

covers are accepted at the site, they shall become the Contractors responsibility until installed

and the installation is accepted by the Owner's Representative.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. All materials shall be inspected prior to installation to insure compliance with the contract

documents and to insure there is no damage. Should conditions be different from those indicated

on the contract documents, contractor should immediately notify the Owner's Representative.

3.3 NICHE COVER ATTACHMENT HARDWARE

A. Each of the four niche cover attachment hardware assemblies provided, for each new precast

concrete niche opening, as part of Section 03 48 24, PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMBARIUM

UNITS, consists of: the stainless steel rosette, stainless steel tamperproof screw and the white or

clear washer beneath the rosette, that is to bear against the niche cover when rosette is snugged

up causing the cover to stay in place against the face of the niche opening due to friction. All of

the niche cover hardware (mounting and attachment assemblies) shall be as submitted and

approved as part of the work in Section 03 48 24, PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMBARIUM

UNITS.

B. The Contractor performing the installation of the niche covers shall maintain control of the niche

cover attachment hardware assemblies from delivery to the site through acceptance of the

installation of the government provided niche covers.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of the government provided niche covers shall include all materials, manpower, tools

and equipment required to receive the approved government provided niche covers from the

manufacturer, and handle them as necessary and perform whatever work is needed to result in



the successful installation of one niche cover for every precast concrete niche space created for

this project.

B. The niche covers shall be installed so as to create a visual straight line along the top of the row of

covers agreed to by the Owner's Representative as the primary visual vertical reference line in

the installation. The covers shall be spaced achieve, as close as possible, the intended design

spacing, taking into consideration the allowable fluctuations in the manufacturing tolerances for

the government provided niche covers.

C. The niche cover attachment assemblies shall be installed so that the threaded end of the

tamperproof screw is inserted into the threads of the stainless steel spring clip on the mounted

angle bracket behind each of the mounting holes in the niche covers. This should result in the

head of the screw being parallel with the face of the niche cover. The threaded hole in the spring

clip shall be fully visible when looking through the mounting hole in the niche cover to the

respective spring clip behind the hole. The position of the spring clip shall be adjusted so the

threaded tamperproof screw will enter the threaded hole in the spring clip and that the attachment

assembly can be tightened to secure the cover in the intended position. To achieve this

installation, the angle brackets shall be adjusted to be the correct height from the niche wall so

the hole in the spring clip can have the respective tamper proof screw inserted and tightened. To

achieve the proper positioning of the spring clips, the angle brackets shall be adjusted in their

position, or the hole in the angle bracket through which the tamper proof screw passes when

tightened into the spring clip, shall be enlarged as necessary to allow the adjustment of the spring

clip to align with the hole in the niche cover so the tamper proof screws through the individual

rosettes can each be inserted and tightened using the threaded spring clip. Only correct

installations of the tamperproof screws, inserted into the threads of the spring clip and being

tightened are acceptable. The head of the tamperproof screw shall be snugged up tight against

the rosette, and shall be seated against the rosette, which occurs when the tamperproof screw is

approximately perpendicular to the face of the niche cover.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Columbarium niche covers shall be shop cleaned at the time of fabrication. After installation,

carefully clean the markers, removing all dirt stains, and all other incident defacements.

1. Stiff bristle fiber brushes may be used, but the use of wire brushes or acid-type cleaning

agents and other solutions which may cause discoloration is expressly prohibited. Fabricator

should be contacted regarding the use of any cleaners and must approve of them before use.

2. Protection of Finished Work: All covers that are installed as part of the work in progress shall

be protected at all times during construction by use of a suitable strong, impervious film or

fabric securely held in place.

B. Clean up area of excess material and debris. Clean visible portions of all covers.



C. Clean all of the exposed fronts of the niche covers that may have been dirtied during the cover

installation and repair any damage to the coating on the face of the niche covers caused during

the installation of the covers, and report to the Contractor any damage that is observed prior to

the cover installation so the face of the precast niche units can made ready for the covers to be

installed.

END OF SECTION



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section covers all sealant and caulking materials and their application, wherever required for

complete installation of building materials or systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Sealing of site work concrete paving: Section 32 05 23, CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR

EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS.

B. Sealing joints in cut stone assemblies: Section 04 40 10, CUT STONE ASSEMBLIES.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has

resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify

selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of

materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other sections, that are indicated to receive

elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES.

B. Manufacturer's installation instructions for each product used.

C. Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.

D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Primers.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 2

2. Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact

with each other.


A. Convene a meeting on site, after submittals are received and approved but before any work, to

review drawings and specifications, submittals, schedule, manufacturer instructions, site logistics

and pertinent matters of coordination, temporary protection, governing regulations, tests and

inspections; participants to include Owner’s Representative and all parties whose work is effected



A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions:

a. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint

sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4 °C (40 °F).

b. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are

less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants

capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.8 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date of

manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon.

B. Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.

C. Do not subject to sustained temperatures less than 5° C (40° F) or exceeding 32° C (90° F).

1.9 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of terms in accordance with ASTM C717 and as specified.

B. Back-up Rod: A type of sealant backing.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 3

C. Bond Breakers: A type of sealant backing.

D. Filler: A sealant backing used behind a back-up rod.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty exterior sealing against leaks, adhesion, and cohesive failure, and subject to terms of

"Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period to be extended to

five (5) years.

B. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article will not deprive Government of other

rights Government may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and are in addition

to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract

Documents.






C717-12b Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants

C734-06(2012) Low Temperature Flexibility of Latex Sealants after Artificial

Weathering

C834-10 Latex Sealants

C920-11 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

C1021-08 Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants

C1193-13 Use of Joint Sealants

C1248-08(2012) Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants

C1330-02(2013) Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied

Sealants

D1056-07 Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 4

E84-12c Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

A. S-1:

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane.

2. Type M.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 20-40.

B. S-11:

1. ASTM C920 polyurethane.

2. Type M/S.

3. Class 25.

4. Grade P/NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 35 to 50.

C. S-12:

1. ASTM C920, polyurethane.

2. Type M/S.

3. Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent.

4. Grade P/NS.

5. Shore A hardness of 25 to 50.

2.3 COLOR

A. Match color of mortar joints at exposed masonry on existing columbarium walls.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 5

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with

joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications

indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to

control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures

down to minus 32° C (minus 26° F). Provide products with low compression set and of size and

shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum

sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint

surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-

adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5 FILLER

A. Mineral fiber board: ASTM C612, Type IVA.

B. Thickness same as joint width.

C. Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod.

2.6 PRIMER

A. As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or sealant material.

B. Stain free type.

2.7 CLEANERS-NON POUROUS SURFACES

A. Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer of sealants and sealant backing material, free of

oily residues and other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent

non-porous surfaces and formulated to promote adhesion of sealant and substrates.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker contamination and unsound materials at adherent

faces of sealant.

B. Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials.

C. Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant

manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATIONS

A. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified only when

installers are ready to initiate sealant application as soon as practicable after preparation and

before subsequent surface deterioration.

B. Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or sealants leaving joint dry to the touch, free from

frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy

or impair adhesion.

1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of

developing optimum bond with joint sealants.

2. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing

out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

C. Do not cut or damage joint edges.

D. Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before applying primers or sealing

compounds.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 7

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Apply primer to sides of joints wherever required by compound manufacturer's printed

instructions.

1. Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape.

2. Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints.

F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.

3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION

A. Install back-up material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified depth of

sealant.

B. Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up rod and position the rod at

proper depth.

C. Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.

D. Install back-up rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or minus 1/8

inch for sealant depths specified.

E. Where space for back-up rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or back) of

joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces.

F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.

3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY

A. At widths up to 1/4 inch, sealant depth equal to width.

B. At widths over 1/4 inch, sealant depth 1/2 of width up to 1/2 inch maximum depth at center of joint

with sealant thickness at center of joint approximately 1/2 of depth at adhesion surface.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for products and applications

indicated.



JOINT SEALANTS

07 92 00 - 8

B. For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C1193 unless specified otherwise.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and rub

clean with a solvent as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.

B. After filling and finishing joints, remove masking tape.

C. Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of completion. If, despite such protection, damage or

deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so

installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.8 LOCATIONS

A. Columbarium Joints, Horizontal and Vertical:

1. Metal to Masonry or Stone: Type S-1.

3. Masonry to Masonry or Stone: Type S-1.

4. Stone to Stone: Type S-1.

B. Horizontal Paving Joints:

1. Concrete Paving: Type S-11 or S-12.

END OF SECTION

DELAWARE VETERANS MEMORIAL CEMETERY ENHANCEMENTS PROJECT NO. DE-16-23MILLSBORO, DELAWARE 05-15-19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single conductor building wire.B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.C. Wiring connectors.D. Electrical tape.E. Heat shrink tubing.F. Oxide inhibiting compound.G. Wire pulling lubricant.H. Cable ties.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for

grounding conductors and grounding connectors.B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical

Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper

Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic

Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically

Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.H. NEMA WC 70 - Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical

Energy; 2009.I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.



1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under othersections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductorsizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminationssuitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtaindirection before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors

and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, andavailable sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actualrouting for underground circuits.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lowerthan 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installationbelow this temperature is unavoidable, notify DEDC, LLC and obtain direction before proceedingwith work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.F. Armored cable is not permitted.G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

33 00 - Submittal Procedures.



H. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.I. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway.K. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.L. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Provide products with insulation and temperature ratings as required per equipment installation

instructions where such ratings differ from those indicated herein.D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.H. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems.I. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as

sunlight resistant.J. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where

specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return airplenums.

K. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.

Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.L. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.a. Exceptions: Size homerun branch circuit conductors from power source to first outlet

in accordance with the following maximum circuit limits, using center of load servedas basis for computing circuit lengths:1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.M. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.N. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl

color coding electrical tape.3. Color Code:

a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.



2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.c. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color

code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authorityhaving jurisdiction.

d. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:1. Copper Building Wire:

a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.D. Conductor: Copper.E. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.F. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN unless otherwise indicated on plans.

2.04 WIRING CONNECTORSA. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the

conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C asapplicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26- Grounding andBonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape or insulatewith heat shrink tubing to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

D. Wiring Connectors for Non-Motor Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations

designed for terminal lugs.2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not lessthan required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compressionconnectors where connectors are required.

5. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connectionsto terminal screws.

6. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.E. Wiring Connectors for Motor Terminations: Use motor lead disconnects with slip-on insulating

boot, pin and silicone gel. Boot sealant shall be used with all insulating boots.



F. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use withconductors without stripping insulation.

G. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.H. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications

and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed ascomplying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

I. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Blackburn Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Polaris: www.polarisconnectors.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

J. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Blackburn Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

K. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable forconnection to be made.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Sta-Kon Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

L. Motor Lead Disconnects: Color-keyed compression-type with slip-on insulating boot, pin,silicone gel and boot sealant.1. Manufacturers:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.1) Motor Lead Disconnects: M2D Series.2) Boot Sealant: MDBOOT-SEAL.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.2.05 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listedas complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion,and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying withUL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 221 degrees F.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20510





4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying withASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

5. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

6. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without adhesive,oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum thickness of 7 mil;suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

7. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to beinstalled.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.c. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed andsuitable for use at the installation temperature.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com/#sle.c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.E. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Circuiting Requirements:






http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4388

















































1. All exposed raceway shall be run in a neat organized fashion and shall be parrallel withother building systems.

2. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.3. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.4. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.5. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

indicated.6. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and

power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.7. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.8. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as

separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated

neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.

9. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductorsamong single phase branch circuits is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/groundedconductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Remove existing conductors and cables from raceway before pulling in new (whereapplicable).

2. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and othercontaminants.

3. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.4. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.5. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same

manner.F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports

and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support frombuilding structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay onceiling tiles. Support at 6 foot maximum intervals using type MC cable supports designedand listed for the purpose.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceedspermissible limits.

G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.H. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a

minimum of 5 feet of slack.I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.


























































1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or makesplices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unsplicedconductors.1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical

tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape

or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering first apply varnished cambric

electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electricaltape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing

electrical tape.b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer

covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.N. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally

colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns oftape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

O. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification For ElectricalSystems.

P. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungroundedconductors at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises hasfeeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment anddevices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.S. Protect exposed cable from damage.T. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.U. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test

is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is notrequired.


B.

A.

























































1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.

END OF SECTION

C.

D.











GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.D. Ground rod electrodes.E. Ground enhancement material.F. Grounding and bonding components.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.1. Includes oxide inhibiting compound.

B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface

Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



B. Sequencing:1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding

and bonding system components.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution


this section with minimum three years documented experience.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.33 00 - Submittal Procedures.



D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completegrounding and bonding system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

D. Grounding System Resistance:1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless

otherwise approved by DEDC, LLC. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does notconstitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested accordingto IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, SystemNeutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using"point-to-point" methods.

E. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, andother normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electricalconductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance withNFPA 70.

2. Provide green insulated copper equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branchcircuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipmentgrounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. All electrical equipment, devices and raceways shall form continuously grounded systems. Neutral and equipment grounding conductors shall be bonded together only at serviceentrances or at secondary sides of separately derived systems.

6. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

7. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided toaccommodate conduit movement.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with

earth.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2070

























2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not inraceway).

2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules; sizebraided cables to provide equivalent gage of specified conductors.

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors

and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections or compression

connectors for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors or compression connectors for

accessible connections.4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections:a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. thermOweld, subsidiary of Continental Industries; division of Burndy LLC:

www.thermoweld.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Ground Rod Electrodes:1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required,

sectionalized ground rods may be used.5. Manufacturers:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com/#sle.b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com/#sle.d. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Ground Enhancement Material:1. Description: Factory-mixed conductive material designed for permanent and

maintenance-free improvement of grounding effectiveness by lowering resistivity.2. Resistivity: Not more than 20 ohm-cm in final installed form.3. Manufacturers:

a. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.b. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

























































3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or buryhorizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provideground plates.1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below

finished grade.D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitateinsertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, andcontact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for theitems to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended toolsand dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to

achieve specified resistance to ground.G. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, green insulated copper equipment

grounding conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end onsuitable lug, bus, or bushing.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the

previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION


A.

B.

C.

D.











































HANGERS AND SUPPORTS26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes,and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for boxes.C. Conduit and equipment supports.D. Anchors and fasteners.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;

2013.D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and

components to be installed.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required

for installation.3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at

the installed locations.4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other

potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.5. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete hasfully cured in accordance with Section ________.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel

(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete andmasonry anchors.

C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials ormethods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

53

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS





1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with NFPA 70.B. Comply with applicable building code.C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where

applicable.3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported with a minimum safety factor of five times the applied force. Includeconsideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unlessspecifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment whereinstalled.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise

indicated.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or

approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.1. Manufacturers:


b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A123/A123M



















c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.2. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.5. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.e. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories,

and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.f. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.

F. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic orrubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roofstructure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing

assembly.2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated

for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 12 inches under supported component to

top of roofing.4. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com/#sle.c. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com/#sle.d. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and

fastener types indicated for the specified applications.2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Wood: Use wood screws.




























































9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically

designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.a. Comply with MFMA-4.b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base

metal thickness.d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

11. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICCEvaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

12. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.itwredhead.com/#sle.c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com/#sle.d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size

and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire inconduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.C. Anchors and Fasteners:

ANCHOR HARDWARE TABLEPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.


































B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)

evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by DEDC, LLC, do not provide support from

suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by DEDC, LLC, do not provide support from roof deck.G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) tosupport equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted onhollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locationsto provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch highconcrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on itsown weight for support.

I. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for ElectricalSystems.

J. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepageduring concrete pour.

K. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.L. Remove temporary supports.M. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings with color

distinguishable from ceiling support wires in accordance with NFPA 70.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.E. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system

components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.2. Do not drill or cut structural members.

F. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance withadequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.


03 33 53.

D.

E.

F.

A.

B.

C.






















































H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1-5/8"off wall.

I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessedin hollow partitions.

END OF SECTION


H.

G.











CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 33.13 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33.13CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).B. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).C. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.D. Conduit fittings.E. Accessories.F. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable

(Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems, including usespermitted.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.C. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.D. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2012.F. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.G. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

2015.H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.I. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including

adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,

equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment

installed under other sections or by others.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.



4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve theintegrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete

between outlet, junction and splicing points.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and

fittings.C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs,where permitted.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground andconduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.


requirements.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicatedfor the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with themost restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from underground.4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use

galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.5. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of

less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soilsreport or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementarycorrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.




D. Embedded Within Concrete:1. Within Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural

Engineer): Use rigid PVC conduit.3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from concrete.E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.F. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.G. Exposed, Interior (including unfinished spaces), Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use

galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.H. Exposed, Interior (including unfinished spaces), Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized

steel rigid metal conduit.I. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.J. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel

rigid metal conduit.K. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.2. Maximum Length: 18 inches unless otherwise indicated.3. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.b. Motors.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTSA. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and

Bonding For Electrical Systems.B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSIC80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.1








d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled

as complying with UL 514B.3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.05 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUITA. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com/#sle.2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com/#sle.3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated; ratedfor use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 651; material to match conduit.2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord or 14 AWG zinc-coated steel with average breaking strength of not

less than 200 pound-force.E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.



























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514B
























F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for theconduits to be installed.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.D. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. All conduit penetrations into equipment enclosures shall be made by the Electrical Contractor.C. Install conduit securely in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.D. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.F. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.3. Conceal all conduits within finished walls, ceilings and floors unless specifically indicated to

be exposed.4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.b. Mechanical equipment rooms.c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:a. Across floors.b. Across roofs.c. Across top of parapet walls.d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortestpossible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel orperpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours wherepractical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between

pull points. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Usehydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at

sealing fittings where moisture may collect.12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This

includes, but is not limited to:a. Heaters.b. Hot water piping.c. Flues.

14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
























































G. Conduit Support:1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.

a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to providespace between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallelsurface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only

where approved). All such conduits shall be elevated a minimum of 12 inches above therooftop where exposed to direct sunlight.

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. Remove all wire used for temporary

supports.11. Use of perforated pipe straps for support of conduits is not permitted.12. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply

with the most stringent requirements.H. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use fittings compatible with conduit used and suitable for location.2. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized

steel conduits prior to making connections.3. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.4. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.5. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid

into connectors.6. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.7. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or

enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finishedfloor.

8. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protectconductors.

9. Bring conduit to shoulders of fittings. Secure joints and connections tightly to providemaximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. Use bonding bushings or wedgesat connections subject to vibration.

I. Penetrations:1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and

grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.2. All penetrations through floors or walls shall be core-drilled. Use of jack hammers shall not

be permitted. Maximum hole diameters shall not exceed 6 inches. All holes shall bespaced at least 18 inches apart in all directions. Re-use of existing penetrations shall bepermitted.

3. Prior to any core drilling through floors or walls, the Electrical Contractor shall visuallysurvey both sides to determine if any pipes, ducts or electrical utilities exist that maypresent obstacles. The Electrical Contractor shall also indentify locations of existing




























































concrete slab reinforcement or in-slab utilities using a pachometer, x-ray or similar device.All core-drilled penetrations shall be a minimum of 3 inches away from existing concreteslab reinforcement or in-slab utilities.

4. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.5. Provide steel sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.

Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.6. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.7. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.8. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall above or below

grade.9. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.10. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations arenecessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system andmaintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealingwith submittals.

11. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.J. Stub-Up Connections for Equipment: Extend conductors to equipment with rigid metal conduit

(RMC). Flexible metal conduit (FMC) or liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) may be used 6inches above the floor.

K. Underground Installation:1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Underground, Exterior: 60 inches.b. Under Slab on Grade: 60 inches to bottom of slab.

2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification forElectrical Systems along entire conduit length.

L. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs:1. Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.2. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete.

M. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansionand expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connectedequipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit

installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

N. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantialtemperature differential, provide conduit sealing fittings filled with listed sealing compound atapproved and accessible locations near the penetrations to prevent condensation. Forconcealed conduits, install each fitting in a flush steel box with blank cover plate having finishsimilar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers, or other refrigerated spaces.

O. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to beinstalled by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

P. Provide grounding and bonding of conduit in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding andBonding for Electrical Systems.

Q. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.


























































3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection

from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation ofconductors.

B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.C. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.D. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

END OF SECTION


A.

B.





















BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 33.16 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33.16BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pullboxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.C. Underground boxes/enclosures.D. Pull and junction boxes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.D. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2012.D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013.E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2013.H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors,clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement ofconnected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

03 30 53




7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation offlush-mounted boxes where indicated.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and

device boxes, junction and pull boxes, and cabinets and enclosures.1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE

77 for proposed substitutions.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for pull boxes and cabinets and

enclosures.D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.


requirements.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BOXES

A. General Requirements:1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway

system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull

Boxes:1. Use sheet-steel boxes for concealed interior dry locations unless otherwise indicated or

required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for exposed interior dry locations, and for

interior and exterior damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnishwith compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metalconduit is used.

4. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.5. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.6. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where

required.


http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org

http://www.scte.org
























7. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.8. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.9. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.11. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting ofluminaire where required.

12. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not usefield-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

13. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:a. Wiring Devices: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size.b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section ________.c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade

size.14. Manufacturers:


b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com.c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com.d. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co; __________: www.emerson.com/#sle.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Steel City Products: www.tnb.com/#sle.f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL

508A.2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwiseindicated.

6. Manufacturers:a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with

legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.2. Size: As indicated on drawings, or as required per code.3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than

12 inches.4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.5. Applications:

a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional NondeliberateVehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8load rating.








http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514A



















































b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 15 load rating.

c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehiculartraffic.

6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.a. Manufacturers:

1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle.2) MacLean Highline: www.macleanhighline.com/#sle.3) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are not acceptable. Useall-polymer concrete boxes/enclosures.

c. Product(s):1) MacLean Highline PHA Series: Straight wall, all-polymer concrete splice box/pull

box; available Tier 8, Tier 15, and Tier 22 load ratings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.D. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA

130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are notindicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are

indicated or permitted.H. Box Locations:

1. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location

at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide

minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated:a. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls

back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.b. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire

resistance will not be reduced.1) Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;

provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individualnoncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.





























http://www.necanet.org/store/products/index.cfm/NECA%20130-10


























2) Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches orsuch that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches forany 100 square feet of wall area.

6. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated orapproved by the Architect:a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.c. Electrical rooms.d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

I. Box Supports:1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 - Hangers

and Supports using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (otherthan boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections inaccordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or othersystems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceilingsupport system.

4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollowstud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.

J. Install boxes plumb and level.K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. sothat front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surfacemore than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box orassociated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at theedge of the box.

L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.M. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00,

minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures where indicated.5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section _________.P. Close unused box openings.Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment

installed or designated for future use.R. Provide grounding and bonding of boxes, enclusures and cabinets in accordance with Section

26 05 26.S. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

























































T. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.U. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.V. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.W. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.X. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.Y. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling

access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.Z. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and

backsplashes.AA. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires to be positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.AB. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.AC. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.AD. Locate flush mounting boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.

Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.AE. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.AF. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness.AG. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal

conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.AH. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until

ready for installation of conductors.B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION







































IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. Electrical identification requirements.B. Large Device Identification.C. Nameplates and Labels.D. Wire and cable markers.E. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for

power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2015.E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior tofabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until

identification products have been installed.2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product.C. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations,

materials, legends, and formats.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended bymanufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Panelboards:




1) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with adoor.

b. Enclosed switches and motor controllers:1) Identify voltage and phase.2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight

of equipment.3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

2. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remotedisconnecting means.

3. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards forelectrical equipment, such as panelboards or industrial control panels, that are likely torequire examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word

message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operatecontrols or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure tocomply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPErequirements" or approved equivalent.

4. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electricalhazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message"DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect allelectric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19 - Low

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.2. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for

power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:a. At each source and load connection.b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the

enclosure.C. Identification for Raceways:

1. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessibleconduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipmentterminations when source is not within sight.

2. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end.Identify purpose and termination location.

D. Identification for Boxes:1. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.

a. Identify circuits via power source and circuit numbers.1) Include voltage and phase for other than 120 V, single phase circuits.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELSA. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic nameplates suitable for exterior use.



3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electricallynon-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engravedtext.a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater

than 4 inches.4. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch

high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com/#sle.c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, andabrasion resistant.a. Use only for indoor locations.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unlessotherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:1. Minimum Size: 1.5 inches by 4 inches.2. Legend:

a. Equipment designation or other approved description.b. Voltage and phase (single-phase or 3-phase).c. Power source and circuit number.d. Other information as indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height:

a. Equipment Designation: 1/4 inch.b. Other Information: 1/4 inch.c. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10

feet above floor or working platform.5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: Black text on white background.D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe

operation and maintenance.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.5. Color: White text on blue background unless otherwise indicated.

E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe

operation and maintenance.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

F. Format for Control Device Identification (toggle switches, motor starters, etc.):1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.2. Legend: Load controlled, power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.



5. Color: Black text on white background.2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com.3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use heat-shrink sleeve type markers suitable for theconductor or cable to be identified.1. Do not use self-adhesive type markers.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cableties.

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use handwritten text.F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.H. Locations: Each conductor at pull boxes, junction boxes, and termination or connection points

including each load connection.I. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Power source and branch circuit or feeder number indicatedon drawings.

2.04 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC: www.clarionsafety.com.3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester orself-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; producedusing materials recognized to UL 969.a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessoriesrecommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.



3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rearaccess.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.6. Conduits: Legible from the floor.7. Boxes: Outside face of cover.8. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws or epoxy

cement and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or

wrinkles and edges properly sealed.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs

of improper adhesion.END OF SECTION


A.


WIRING CONNECTIONS26 05 83 - 1

SECTION 26 05 83WIRING CONNECTIONS


A. Electrical connections to equipment.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.B. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions,

configurations, and construction.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches and in individualequipment sections.

B. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.C. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables.D. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.


A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.



WIRING CONNECTIONS26 05 83 - 2

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduitwith watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable fortemperatures encountered.

D. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes andequipment connection boxes.

E. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to completeequipment wiring requirements.

F. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.G. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements.END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS26 28 16.13 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16.13ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Molded case circuit breakers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or

other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.


3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with theconductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit

breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon request.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installedfeatures and accessories.








1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to

enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and afterinstallation of enclosed circuit breakers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERSA. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit

breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489; ratings, configurations, and features asindicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptableto the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Interrupting Capacity:1. Provide circuit breaker(s) with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit

current rating(s) indicated.D. Conductor Terminations:

1. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.2. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

E. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time trippingelement for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuitprotection.

F. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated

requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and

Supports.E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding

for Electrical Systems.

Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.



G. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as directed.H. Identify enclosed circuit breakers in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification for

Electrical Systems.I. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except Section

4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1. Tests listed as optional are

not required.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.E. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker.F. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position.G. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1

requirements.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to

manufacturer's instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.


ENCLOSED SWITCHES26 28 16.16 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16.16ENCLOSED SWITCHES


A. Enclosed safety switches.B. Nonfusible switches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2013.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, orother potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.


3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with theconductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed

switches and other installed components and accessories.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,

short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installedfeatures and accessories.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.





E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenanceprocedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.





1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to

enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and afterinstallation of enclosed switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.F. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the

same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project andobtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHESA. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying

with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable

to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.F. Short Circuit Current Rating:



1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrentprotective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than theavailable fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.I. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug

for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.J. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unlessotherwise indicated.

K. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position withcapability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

L. Heavy Duty Switches:1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.2. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable ofaccepting three padlocks.

M. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to completeinstallation:1. Hubs: As required for environment type; sized to accept conduits to be installed.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29- Hangers and

Supports.E. Install enclosed switches plumb.F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inchesabove the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bondingfor Electrical Systems.

H. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53 - Identification for ElectricalSystems.

I. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70.

Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.



J. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and sizeinstalled.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated

components.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


SITE CLEARING

31 10 00 - 1

SITE CLEARING

31 10 00

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Site Preparation shall consist of clearing of the site within the limits of construction, including the following:

1. Removal and disposal of trees and brush, weeds, roots, and similar materials. 2. Removal and disposal of civil structures, paving, base course, utilities, and all other

materials and obstructions which are designated on the Plans for removal during construction.

3. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling, where applicable. 4. Saw-cutting existing concrete and paved surfaces. 5. Protection of existing utilities and adjacent property, structures, benchmarks, and

monuments. 1.2 STANDARDS

A. The quality and performance of work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, dated August 2016, as amended, hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”.

1. Section 201: Clearing and Grubbing 2. Section 211: Removal of Structures and Obstructions. 3. Section 762: Saw Cutting Portland Cement and Hot-Mix, Hot-Laid Bituminous

Concrete 1.3 PHASING

A. Clearing, grubbing, and removal shall be performed prior to the grading and stripping operations, within the limits of disturbance, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Following clearing, topsoil shall be stripped and stored for later use on the site or disposition by the Owner.

1.4 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect all trees, shrubs, plants, roads, walks, pavements, structures, civil improvements, and appurtenances not indicated to be cleared from the site. Methods of protection shall be by use of substantial wood or chain link fences, barriers, construction fencing, or other methods approved by the Engineer. Any trees, shrubs, plants, roads, walks, pavements, structures, or appurtenances indicated to remain that become damaged during construction of the project shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall contact all utility companies to mark the location of their facilities.

The contractor shall protect all existing utilities in place and maintain continuous service to the Owner. Any damage to the utilities shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating and/or relocating any utilities which must be relocated to accommodate the proposed construction.


SITE CLEARING

31 10 00 - 2


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Clearing and Grubbing

A. Clearing shall consist of the removal of all trees and shrubs, brush, down timber, rotten wood, heavy growth of grass and weeds, vines, rubbish, walks, roads, curbs, walls and foundations, existing utilities already abandoned, and all objectionable debris. All walls, foundations, slabs, pavements, curbs, and footings shall be removed to their full depth.

B. Grubbing shall consist of the removal of stumps, roots, root mats, stubs, buried logs, and

other debris within the project limits. The Contractor shall remove all stumps and root mats in their entirety and all buried logs and other debris from within building areas and from the limits of proposed drives and walks. Within proposed lawn areas, stumps, roots and debris shall be removed to a minimum depth of two feet below design rough grade.

C. Pruning and Root Pruning. Where indicated on the plans, plants shall be pruned to

remove all injured or dead wood, or to improve air circulations or shape of the plant. All pruning shall be done with sharp tools by workers skilled in the operations. All pruning and root pruning shall be accomplished under the supervision of a certified arborist. On all cuts over one inch in diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to the living tissue and removed. Wounds shall be smooth so as to preserve the branch bark ridge. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs beyond the branch collar.

D. Construction methods shall be in accordance with Section 201 of the Standard

Specifications.

3.2 Disposal of Cleared Materials

A. All timber and cleared materials shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Burning of materials on site is prohibited.

3.3 Demolition

A. Existing pavement shall be removed to its full depth. All pavement to be removed shall be saw cut in accordance with these Specifications.

B. Utilities shall be removed or capped where shown on the Plans. Coordinate utility

disconnection and removal with the appropriate utility companies. 3.4 Stripping and Storing Topsoil

A. Topsoil shall be considered to mean original surface soil, typical of the area, which is capable of supporting native plant growth.

B. All topsoil suitable for reuse, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be stripped to its full

depth, and stockpiled. C. Topsoil stripping shall be accomplished from all areas to be disturbed. D. Existing lawn sods may be left to decompose with the topsoil. Heavier strands of weeds

and grasses shall be removed or turned over, as directed by the Engineer, prior to the stripping operations.


SITE CLEARING

31 10 00 - 3

E. The topsoil shall be kept separate from the excavated material and stored in stockpiles,

the location of which shall be as directed by the Engineer. Topsoil shall be stockpiled so that it shall not be subject to abnormal erosion and loss, and it does not impede the flow of drainage runoff. Topsoil shall be stockpiled in the location shown on the Plans or as approved by the Engineer.

3.5 Removal of Structures and Obstructions

A. Removal of civil structures and obstruction shall be in accordance with Section 211 of the Standard Specifications.

3.6 Saw-Cutting

A. Mechanically saw cut patch edges or tie-in joints into existing paving using a concrete cutting machine with a suitable motor-driven diamond blade and a circular cutter unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

B. Saw-cut grooves shall be straight lines to a sufficient depth so that an even, neat joint can be cut to allow removal of material without damage to the adjacent pavement, sidewalk, or curb. A continuous water supply shall be supplied to the cutting blade.

END OF SECTION


SITE CLEARING

31 10 00 - 4



EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 1

EARTHWORK

31 20 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Filling and backfilling to attain indicated grades. 2. Excavation, rough and finish grading. 3. Furnishing and installing stone base course material for pavements, hot-mix patches,

and other structures. 4. Undercut excavation and furnishing stone base course material for undercut

excavation. 5. Furnishing excavation support systems, as required, including shoring and bracing. 6. Excavation for trenches. 7. Preparing topsoil stripped from the site and placing topsoil in locations requiring

seeding or sodding.

B. Definitions 1. Excavation: removal and disposal of all material encountered when establishing

required grade elevations, including pavements and other obstructions visible on the ground surface, and underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, and unsuitable subgrade material.

2. Unauthorized excavation: Removal of materials beyond specified subgrade elevations without approval of the Engineer.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. All excavations shall be in compliance with Federal Occupational Safety and Health

Act. 2. Excavation work shall be in compliance with application requirements of other

governing authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards 1. Refer to the following sections in the Delaware Department of Transportation

Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, dated August 2001, as amended, hereinafter referred to as the "Standard Specifications".

Section 202: Excavation and Embankment Section 205: Rock Excavation for Roadway Section 206: Rock Excavation for Structures and Trenches. Section 207: Excavation and Backfill for Structures Section 208: Excavation and Backfill for Pipe Trenches Section 209: Borrow Section 210: Furnishing Borrow Type "C" for Pipe, Utility Trench Section 212: Undercut Excavation Section 300: Bases Section 732: Topsoil Section 733: Topsoiling Section 813: Grading Requirements Minimum and Maximum Percentages

Passing Section 821: Graded Aggregates 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM);


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 2

D-1556: Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. D-698: Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures D-2049: Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. D-2166: Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil. D-2922: Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Material certification and delivery slips for: 1. Select Borrow 2. Graded Aggregate Base Course 3. Delaware # 57 Stone 4. Pea Gravel 5. Sand

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered

during excavation, consult the utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with the Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner.

2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to

be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active.

B. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted unless approved by the

Engineer.

C. Protection of Persons and Property 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning signs

as required to protect persons on the site. 2. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns and other features remaining as part of final landscaping. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage

caused by settlement, lateral movement undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

4. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements to the approval of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner.

D. Dust Control

1. Control dust on and near the work if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the conditions in which the Contractor leaves the site.

2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on the site.

E. Weather Conditions: Do not place, spread, or roll fill material during freezing, raining, or

otherwise unfavorable weather conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. For approval of borrow materials, at least five (5) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area, and provide material certifications or samples to prove the quality and suitability of the material.


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 3

2.2 ON-SITE FILL

A. All on-site materials used for fill shall be acceptable to the Engineer subject to the following requirements: 1. Free from deleterious substances, stumps, brush, weeds, roots, sod, rubbish,

garbage and matter that may decay. 2. Free of large rocks or lumps that may create voids or prevent proper compaction.

2.3 BORROW FILL MATERIAL

A. Free from deleterious substances, stumps, brush, weeds, roots, sod, rubbish, garbage and matter that may decay, and shall be Borrow Type "G" (Select Borrow), grade IV or V, conforming to Section 209 of the Standard Specifications.

2.4 TRENCH AND CIVIL STRUCTURE BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Backfill for civil structures shall conform to the requirements of Section 207 of the Standard Specifications.

B. Backfill for trenches shall conform to the requirements of Section 208 of the Standard

Specifications. C. All trench and civil structure backfill material shall meet the requirements of Section

209.03C of the Standard Specifications for Borrow Type C backfill. All suitable excavated material which meets the requirements of Section 209.03C of the Standard Specifications shall be used for structure or trench backfill as far as practicable.

2.5 GRADED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Graded Aggregate base course for bituminous and concrete pavements and other structures shall be Type “B” conforming to the requirements for Graded Aggregate in Section 821 of the Standard Specifications.

2.6 TOPSOIL

A. Refer to Section 32 90 00 “Planting”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling and grading are to be performed. No extra cost or time allowances will be granted for conditions existing and visible at the time of the bid opening.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prior to commencement of work, establish location and extent of all utilities in the work

areas. Maintain and protect, as required, existing utilities which pass through the work area.

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Unauthorized Excavation


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 4

1. Unauthorized excavation shall not be at the Owner's expense. Under roadways and pipes, fill unauthorized excavation by removing all loosened material and providing select material as required to attain a firm and unyielding subgrade and/or foundation and to attain required grade elevations.

B. Rock Excavation shall apply to the removal of bedrock and ledgerock which cannot be

accomplished without blasting or the use of rippers and the use or disposal of such material. Excavation of material classified as "rock" shall conform to the requirements of Section 205 of the Standard Specifications.

C. Rock Excavation for Structures and Trenches shall apply to the removal, use or disposal

of all boulders or other detached stones having a volume of 1/3 cubic yard or more. Excavation of such material shall conform to the requirements of Section 206 of the Standard Specifications.

D. Undercut Excavation

1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations notify the Engineer immediately.

2. Unstable bearing materials shall be removed to a depth of one foot below subgrade and replaced with graded aggregate base course.

3. Base course shall be placed in six inch lifts.

E. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having

jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of

backfilling.

F. Shoring and Bracing 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers

and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and

authorities having jurisdiction 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will

be open. 4. Brace, sheet, and support trench walls in such a manner that they will be safe and

that the ground alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that all existing improvements of every kind, whether on public or private property, will be fully protected from damage.

5. In the event of damage to such improvements, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Arrange bracing, sheeting and shoring so as to not place stress on any portion of the completed work until the general construction thereof has proceeded far enough to provide sufficient strength.

7. Exercise care in the drawing and removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing and timbering to prevent collapse and caving of excavation faces being supported.

G. Material Storage

1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed until required for use as backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. Excavated

material unsuitable for backfilling shall be kept separate from other materials excavated, and disposed of. Materials suitable for backfilling shall not be disposed of until completion of filling or backfilling operations.

H. Excavation for Pavements and Pavement Patches


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 5

1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross- sections, elevations and grades as shown.

I. Excavation for Trenches

1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for the particular item to be installed sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Trench width, to a point no less than two feet (2') above the outside top of pipe, shall be the pipe outer diameter plus twenty-four inches (24").

2. Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow lines and invert elevations.

3. Trenches for pipes shall not be opened more than the number of linear feet of pipe that can be placed and backfilled in one (1) day.

4. Grub roots and stumps within six inches (6") of outside surface of pipe bottom and sides to minimum depth of six inches (6") below grade. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within eighteen inches (18") of column or wall footings and which are carried below the bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to the level of the bottom of adjacent footing.

5. Pipe bedding shall be as shown on the Plans.

J. Cold Weather Protection 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less

than thirty-five degrees (35°). 3.4 BACKFILL FILL AND COMPACTION

A. General: 1. The project Inspector or Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of any fill,

backfill or compaction operations. 2. Place acceptable material in 8" lifts to required subgrade elevations. 3. Fills: Use suitable material (per Section 2.2 or 2.3 of this section) obtained from

on-site excavation, except use borrow material when suitable on-site material is not available or when specified by the Engineer or shown on the Plans.

4. Backfilling: Use suitable material (per Section 2.2 or 2.3 of this section) obtained from on-site excavation, except use select backfill where indicated on Plans. Backfill to a height of two feet (2') above the top of pipe with earth free from stones, rock fragments, dirt clogs or frozen material greater than two inches (2") in largest dimension.

5. Do not provide additional off-site borrow material until all acceptable excavated materials on the site have been utilized in the work unless approved by the Engineer.

6. Place the various types of materials in the areas as designated on the Plans.

B. Backfill excavation as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 4. Removal of trash and debris. 5. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals

1. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. After the work has been completely tested, inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Ground Surface Preparation Prior to Filling


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 6

1. Remove all vegetation, debris, topsoil, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions and deleterious materials from existing ground surface to a depth of not less than four inches (4") and not more than six inches (6") or to the depth of existing topsoil (whichever is greater) prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal to a depth of not less than six inches (6") so that fill material will bond with existing surface.

2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction," for the particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

E. Placement and Compaction

1. Place backfill materials in layers not more than eight inches (8") in loose depth. 2. Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density

specified for each area classification listed below. 3. Pavement areas are defined, for the purpose of this Section, as extending a minimum

of five feet (5') beyond the pavement. 4. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for

soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D-1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density determined in accordance with ASTM D-2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship. a. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top six inches (8") of subgrade and each layer

of backfill or fill material at 90 percent (90%) maximum dry density. b. Walkways: Compact top six inches (6") of subgrade and each layer of backfill or

full material at 95 percent (95%) maximum dry density or 90 percent (90%) relative dry density.

c. Pavement Areas: Compact top twelve inches (12") of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent (95%) maximum dry density or 90 percent (90%) relative dry density.

d. Base Course Materials: Compact each layer of base course material to 95% percent (95%) of maximum dry density.

e. Trench Stabilization Materials: Compact each layer of material to 95 percent (95%) of maximum dry density.

5. Moisture control: a. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before

compaction, uniformly apply water to the surface of the subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

b. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.

c. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. Moisture-condition fill materials to within 3 percent (3%) of the optimum moisture. Fill that is so wet that it is unstable under compaction equipment shall be dried and re-compacted to achieve a stable fill.

5. Puddling or jetting will not be permitted. 6. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice, or other unsuitable materials. 7. Place backfill and fill material evenly adjacent to structures, to the required elevations.

Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.

9. Compact backfill to height of two feet (2') above top of pipe using approved flat-faced mechanical tampers.

3.5 GRADING


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 7

A. General Uniformly grade areas to meet the limits of grading required under this section, including

adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.

B. Grading Outside Building Lines Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent

ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follow: 1. Lawn or unpaved areas: Finish area to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10

feet above or below the required subgrade elevations 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with

finish surface not more than one half (1/2) inch above or below the required subgrade elevation.

3. Pavement: Shape surface of areas under pavement line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than one half (1/2) inch above or below the required subgrade elevation. All topsoil and other unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable backfill.

C. Compaction

1. After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.

D. Treating after Grading

1. After grading is completed, permit no further excavating, filling or grading. 2. Prevent erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as

permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed.

E. Subgrade Preparation 1. All subgrade preparation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable

Sections of the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications except as may be modified by this Specification Section.

2. Subgrades for paving shall be firm and unyielding when proof-rolled in accordance with Section 202 of the Standard Specifications.

3.6 GRADED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. General 1. Base Course consists of placing graded aggregate base course material in layers of

specified thickness over subgrade surface to support pavements, pavement patches and civil structures, as shown on Plans.

2. Provide Base Course in accordance with Section 302 of the Standard Specifications, except as otherwise modified by this Specification Section.

B. Grade Control

1. During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of base course.

C. Placing

1. Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base course material during placement operations.

2. When a compacted base course is shown to be eight inches (8") or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than eight inches (8") thick, place


EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - 8

material in equal layers, except no single layer shall be more than eight inches (8") in thickness when compacted.

3. Spread, shape and compact all base course material deposited on the subgrade during the same day.


A. Quality control testing during construction. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.

B. If subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional

compaction and testing at no expense to the Owner. This shall include compaction and testing at areas initially tested and at other locations as directed.

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified

tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas 1. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction

operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove waste materials, including excess and unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off of the Owner's property.

3.10 TOPSOILING

A. Refer to Section 32 90 00 “Planting"

END OF SECTION


DEWATERING

31 23 19 - 1

DEWATERING

31 23 19 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies performance of dewatering required to lower and control ground

water table levels and hydrostatic pressures to permit excavation, backfill, and construction to be performed in the dry. Control of surface water shall be considered as part of the work under this specification.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. The work to be completed by the Contractor includes, but is not necessarily limited to the

following:

1. Implementation of the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan. 2. Dewater excavations, including seepage and precipitation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and

services necessary for care of water and erosion control. Excavation work shall not begin before the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan is in place.

1.3 REQUIREMENT:

A. Dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and capacity necessary to lower and

maintain ground water table to an elevation at least one foot below lowest foundation subgrade or bottom of pipe trench and to allow material to be excavated and stone and/or concrete placed, in a reasonably dry condition. Materials to be removed shall be sufficiently dry to permit excavation to grades shown and to stabilize excavation slopes where sheeting is not required. Operate dewatering system continuously until backfill work has been completed.

B. Reduce hydrostatic head below any excavation to the extent that water level in the

construction area is a minimum of one foot below prevailing excavation surface. C. Prevent loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick conditions or softening of foundation strata. D. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavation. E. Construction operations are to be performed in the dry. F. Control of surface and subsurface water is part of dewatering requirements. Maintain

adequate control so that:

1. The stability of excavated and constructed slopes are not adversely affected by saturated soil, including water entering prepared subbase and subgrades where underlying materials are not free draining or are subject to swelling or freeze-thaw action.

2. Erosion is controlled. 3. Flooding of excavations or damage to structures does not occur. 4. Surface water drains away from excavations.


DEWATERING

31 23 19 - 2

5. Excavations are protected from becoming wet from surface water, or insure excavations are dry before additional work is undertaken.

G. Permitting Requirements: The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required

permits from The Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control (DNREC) for de-watering excavations.

1.4 RELATED WORK:

A. Safety Requirements: Section 00 72 13, GENERAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT,

B. Submittal requirements as specified in Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT

DATA, AND SAMPLES. C. Excavation, backfilling, site grade and utilities: Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES. B. Drawings and Design Data:

1. Submit drawings and data showing the method to be employed in dewatering excavated areas 30 days before commencement of excavation.

2. Material shall include: location, depth and size of wellpoints, headers, sumps, ditches, size and location of discharge lines, capacities of pumps and standby units, and detailed description of dewatering methods to be employed to convey the water from site to adequate disposal.

3. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problem arises.

4. Capacities of pumps, prime movers, and standby equipment. 5. Design calculations proving adequacy of system and selected equipment. The

dewatering system shall be designed using accepted and professional methods of design and engineering consistent with the best modern practice. The dewatering system shall include the deep wells, wellpoints, and other equipment, appurtenances, and related earthwork necessary to perform the function.

6. Detailed description of dewatering procedure and maintenance method. 7. Materials submitted shall be in a format acceptable for inclusion in required permit

applications to any and all regulatory agencies for which permits for discharge water from the dewatering system are required due to the discharge reaching regulated bodies of water.

C. Inspection Reports. D. All required permits.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install a dewatering system to lower and control ground surface water in order to permit

excavation, construction of structure, and placement of backfill materials to be performed under dry conditions. Make the dewatering system adequate to pre-drain the water-


DEWATERING

31 23 19 - 3

bearing strata above and below the bottom of structure foundations, utilities and other excavations.

B. In addition, reduce hydrostatic pressure head in water-bearing strata below structure

foundations, utility lines, and other excavations, to extent that water levels in construction area are a minimum of one foot below prevailing excavation surface at all times.

3.2 OPERATION:

A. Prior to any excavation below the ground water table, place system into operation to lower water table as required and operate it continuously 24 hours a day, 7 days a week until utilities and structures have been satisfactorily constructed, which includes the placement of backfill materials and dewatering is no longer required.

B. Place an adequate weight of backfill material to prevent buoyancy prior to discontinuing operation of the system.

3.3 WATER DISPOSAL:

A. Dispose of water removed from the excavations in such a manner as:

1. Will not endanger portions of work under construction or completed. 2. Will cause no inconvenience to Government or to others working near site. 3. Will comply with the stipulations of required permits for disposal of water, the Erosion

& Sediment Control Plan, and the Delaware Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (2019).

4. Will Control Runoff: The Contractor shall be responsible for control of runoff in all work areas including but not limited to: excavations, access roads, parking areas, laydown, and staging areas. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain all ditches, basins, sumps, culverts, site grading, and pumping facilities to divert, collect, and remove all water from the work areas. All water shall be removed from the immediate work areas and shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable permits.

B. Excavation Dewatering:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all facilities required to divert, collect, control, and remove water from all construction work areas and excavations.

2. Drainage features shall have sufficient capacity to avoid flooding of work areas. 3. Drainage features shall be so arranged and altered as required to avoid degradation

of the final excavated surface(s). 4. The Contractor shall utilize all necessary erosion and sediment control measures as

described herein to avoid construction related degradation of the natural water quality. C. Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all surface and ground

water entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work during construction. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

3.4 STANDBY EQUIPMENT:

Provide complete standby equipment, installed and available for immediate operation, as

may be required to adequately maintain de-watering on a continuous basis and in the event that all or any part of the system may become inadequate or fail.


DEWATERING

31 23 19 - 4

3.5 CORRECTIVE ACTION:

A. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of the dewatering

system (loosening of the foundation strata, or instability of slopes, or damage to foundations or structures), perform work necessary for reinstatement of foundation soil and damaged structure or damages to work in place resulting from such inadequacy or failure by Contractor, at no additional cost to Government.

3.6 DAMAGES:

A. Immediately repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.7 REMOVAL:

A. Insure compliance with all conditions of regulating permits and provide such information

to the Resident Engineer. Obtain written approval from Resident Engineer before discontinuing operation of dewatering system.

END OF SECTION


EROSION CONTROLS

31 25 13 - 1

EROSION CONTROLS

31 25 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide temporary soil and sediment control measures in accordance with the Plans and Contract Documents.


B. Standards 1. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with

the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: a. Delaware Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (2019). b. Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and

Bridge Construction, dated August 2016, as amended, hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”.

C. Design Criteria 1. The primary objective of this specification is to control soil erosion to the maximum

extent practicable and to comply with the approved sediment and stormwater plan for the site construction.

2. The temporary control provisions contained herein shall be coordinated with permanent erosion control features to the extent practical to assure effective and continuous erosion control throughout the construction.

3. The erosion control measures described herein shall be continued until the construction is complete and all disturbed areas are fully stabilized.

4. Wherever construction exposes work which is subject to erosion, erosion control features or other work to be completed within such areas shall follow as soon after exposure as practicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Temporary mulches shall conform to Section 735 of the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Bridges and Highways.

B. Temporary grass mixtures shall be as shown on the Plans and shall conform with Section

734 of the Standard Specifications. C. Fertilizer and soil conditioners shall be a standard commercial grade. D. Temporary structural Erosion Control measures shall conform to the requirements of the

Delaware Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. E. Riprap: The stones shall be of durable rock, sized and graded so that at least fifty percent

(50%) of the pieces are larger than the d50 size shown on the Plans. The diameter of the largest stone shall not exceed 1.5 times the d50 size, nor shall the smallest stone be smaller than one-half the d50 size. All stone shall meet the requirements of Section 712 of the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. Filter cloth shall be a non-woven geotextile conforming to ASTM D-1777 or ASTM D-1682.


EROSION CONTROLS

31 25 13 - 2

F. Erosion control matting and blankets shall conform with the Delaware Erosion and

Sediment Control Handbook requirements for soil stabilization matting (SSM) I and II. Matting shall be composed of 100% agricultural straw (minimum 0.5 pounds per square yard) or 100% wood excelsior fiber (0.8 pounds per square yard) with a single or double netting of either photo-degradable or bio-degradable material. SSM-I shall be North American Green S75, American Excelsior Curlex I, or approved equal. SSM-II shall be North American Green S150, American Excelsior Curlex II, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Vegetative stabilization shall be used on graded or cleared areas which are subject to erosion for a period of 14 days or more.

B. All temporary erosion control measures shall be installed in accordance with the Delaware

Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. C. In the event of conflict between these requirements and pollution control laws, rules, or

regulations of other federal or state agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules, or regulations shall apply.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all soil erosion and sediment control

measures in an acceptable and functional manner. All temporary measures shall be removed by the Contractor after all other construction is complete, final restorations installed, and all disturbed areas have been adequately stabilized.

E. Erosion control matting shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written

instructions, the requirements of the Delaware Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, and the details on the Plans.

END OF SECTION


CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 23 - 1

CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 05 23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide new concrete sidewalk and courtyard paving in areas designated on Plans, marked in the field, or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Place Delaware #57 Stone Base Course below proposed concrete sidewalks.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. The quality and performance of work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, dated August 2016, as amended, hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”.

Section 300: Bases Section 705: Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalk Section 762: Saw Cutting Section 812: Portland Cement Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: All deliveries of concrete shall be accompanied by delivery slips. B. Manufacturers' Certificates and Data certifying that the following materials conform to the

requirements specified. C. Expansion joint filler D. Reinforcement E. Curing materials F. Jointing Plan for all concrete areas. G. Concrete Mix Design, including source, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, percentage of

wear, and other tests as specified and in referenced publications. H. Concrete Test Reports

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Allowable Concrete Temperatures

1. Cold weather: 60 degrees Fahrenheit. (18° C) when discharged from the mixer. 2. Hot weather: Maximum concrete temperature is 80 degrees Fahrenheit. (30° C).

B. Do not place concrete during rain, when atmospheric temperature is at or below 36 degrees

Fahrenheit. (2° C), or when conditions are otherwise unfavorable. 1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until concrete has been sufficiently cured.


CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 05 23 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete

1. Use Class A concrete developing a compressive strength of 4,500 p.s.i. at twenty-eight (28) days.

2. Use air-entrained concrete.

B. Cement aggregates, water and air-entrainment methods and materials shall conform to Section 812 of the Standard Specifications.

C. Joint filler: Pre-formed expansion joint material shall conform to Section 808.06 of the Standard

Specifications. D. Curing compound: White pigmented liquid, shall conform to AASHTO M 148 for Type 2, Class

A or B. E. Penetrating Sealer: Ghostshield Siloxa-Tek 8500 Penetrating Concrete Sealer or approved

equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR NEW SIDEWALK

A. Excavate subgrade and set forms so that finished sidewalk conforms to lines and grades shown on Plans.

B. Prepare sidewalk subgrade as specified in Section 705 of the Standard Specifications. C. Verify that earthwork is completed to correct line and grade. D. Verify that forms conform to line, grade and dimensions shown on Plans. E. Check that subgrade is smooth, compacted and free of excessive moisture. F. Do not commence work until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

A. Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 705 of the Standard Specifications.

B. The foundation shall be formed at the required grade to accommodate the elevations,

dimension, and details shown on the Plans for the bottom of the sidewalk. All soft and yielding or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be removed and replaced with Delaware #57 aggregate.

C. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of five days. The sidewalk shall not be opened to

pedestrian and vehicular traffic until the end of the curing period.

END OF SECTION


BRICK UNIT PAVING 32 14 16-1

BRICK UNIT PAVING

32 14 16

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brick pavers set in mortar on a rigid base.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. No related requirements.


A. Comply with references to extent specified in this section.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C144-11 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

2. C150/C150M-16 - Portland Cement.

3. C207-06(2011) - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

4. C270-14a- Mortar for Unit Masonry.

5. C902-15 - Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. Submittal Drawings:

1. Show brick paving layout and patterns.

2. Show special brick shapes.

C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Description of each product.

D. Samples:

1. Brick: Full size of each type and color.

a. Minimum five individual samples to show full color and texture range.

2. Mortar: Samples of brick with mortar joints of each color.


A. Mockups: Provide mockup of size indicated on drawings to confirm paving materials and pattern

and to establish workmanship quality.

1.6 DELIVERY

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed packaging.

B. Mark packaging, legibly. Indicate manufacturer's name or brand, type, color, production run

number, and manufacture date.



C. Before installation, return or dispose of products within distorted, damaged, or opened packaging.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry materials under waterproof covers on planking clear of ground.

B. Protect products from damage during handling and construction operations.


A. Environment:

1. Product Temperature: Minimum 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) for minimum 48 hours before

installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Construction Warranty: FAR clause 52.246-21, "Warranty of Construction."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Design brick complying with specified performance:

1. Slip Resistance: ASTM C902.

2.2 PRODUCTS - GENERAL

A. Provide each paving system component from one manufacturer and from one production run.

2.3 BRICK

A. Paving Brick: ASTM C902; Class SX, Type I.

1. Manufacturing Tolerances: Application PS.

2.4 MORTAR

A. ASTM C270, Type S, cement-lime proportion specification mix. Admixtures and Type N lime are

not acceptable.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type S.

C. Sand: ASTM C144.

D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M.

E. Coloring Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, lime proof and non-fading; added to mortar by the

manufacturer. Job colored mortar is not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine and verify substrate suitability for product installation.

1. Verify substrate depth accommodates brick paving installation thickness.

B. Protect existing construction and completed work from damage.

1. Prevent damage from contact with mortar.



C. Clean substrates. Remove contaminants capable of affecting subsequently installed product's

performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal drawings.

3.3 BRICK INSTALLATION

A. Do not use bricks with chips, cracks, discoloration, or other visible defects.

B. Layout brick paving according to pattern indicated on drawings.

C. Installation with Portland Cement Mortar:

1. Install brick in full bed joint. Remove excess mortar. Strike joints flush with top surface of

brick and tool slightly concave.

2. Cure mortar by maintaining damp condition for seven days.

D. Installation Tolerances:

1. Finished surface true to plane within 1 mm in 1000 mm (1/8 inch in 10 feet), non-cumulative.

2. Joint width deviation maximum 25 percent of dimension indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar before fully set.

B. Clean exposed brick and mortar surfaces. Remove contaminants and stains.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect brick paving from traffic and construction operations.

B. Cover brick paving with reinforced kraft paper, and plywood or hardboard.

C. Remove protective materials immediately before acceptance.

D. Repair damage.

END OF SECTION


PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23-1

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

32 17 23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Paint on pavement surfaces, in form of traffic lanes, parking bays, areas restricted to

handicapped persons, crosswalks, and other detail pavement markings.


A. No related requirements.



B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

1. TT-P-1952F - Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Waterborne.

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

1. No. 97 - Traffic Marking Paint, Latex.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.


1. Show pavement marking configuration and dimensions.

2. Show international symbol of accessibility at designated parking spaces.



2. Application instructions.

D. Samples:

1. Paint: 200 mm (8 inches) square, each type and color.

E. Certificates: Certify products comply with specifications.

F. Qualifications: Substantiate qualifications comply with specifications.

1. Installer with project experience list.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Regularly installs specified products.

2. Installed specified products with satisfactory service on five similar installations for minimum

five years.

a. Project Experience List: Provide contact names and addresses for completed projects.



1.6 DELIVERY


B. Mark packaging, legibly. Indicate manufacturer's name or brand, type, color, production run

number, and manufacture date.



A. Store products indoors in dry, weathertight conditioned facility.

B. Protect products from damage during handling and construction operations.


A. Environment:

1. Product Temperature: Minimum 13 degrees C (55 degrees F) for minimum 48 hours before

installation.

a. Surface to be painted and ambient temperature: Minimum 10 degrees C (50 degrees F)

and maximum 35 degrees C (95 degrees F).

B. Field Measurements: Verify field conditions affecting traffic marking installation. Show field

measurements on Submittal Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Design paint complying with specified performance:

1. Application: Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952.


A. Provide each product from one manufacturer and from one production run.

2.3 SANDBLASTING EQUIPMENT

A. Air compressor, hoses, and nozzles of proper size and capacity as required for cleaning painted

surfaces. Compressor to provide minimum 0.08 cu. m/s (150 cfm) of air at pressure of minimum

625 kPa (90 psi) at each nozzle used.

2.4 PAINT APPLICATOR

A. Apply marking paint with approved mechanical equipment. Provide equipment with constant

agitation of paint and travel at controlled speeds. Synchronize one or more paint "guns" to

automatically begin and cut off paint flow in case of skip lines. Equipment to have manual control

to apply continuous lines of varying length and marking widths as indicated on Drawings. Provide



pneumatic spray guns for hand application of paint in areas where mobile paint applicator cannot

be used.

2.5 PAINT

A. Paint: MPI No. 97. For obliterating existing markings comply with Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952. Provide

minimum 18 L (5 gallons) containers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


1. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for period of minimum 14 days before application of

marking materials.

B. Protect existing construction and completed work from damage.

C. Clean substrates. Remove contaminants capable of affecting subsequently installed product's

performance.

1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with

compressed air, rinsing with water, or combination of these methods.

2. Completely remove rubber deposits, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to

pavement with scrapers, wire brushings, sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or approved

chemicals as directed by Contracting Officer's Representative.

3. As an option, comply with Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952 for removal of existing paint markings on

asphalt pavement. Apply black paint in as many coats as necessary to completely obliterate

existing markings.

4. Scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other

approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application, Where oil or

grease are present on old pavements to be marked,

a. After cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through new

paint.

5. Clean and dry surface before pavement marking. Do not begin any marking until Contracting

Officer's Representative inspected surface and gives permission to proceed.

3.2 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Apply Temporary Pavement Markings of colors, widths and lengths shown on drawings or

directed by Contracting Officer's Representative. After temporary marking has served its purpose

and when so ordered by Contracting Officer's Representative, remove temporary marking by

carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method to

prevent damage on applied surface.



B. As an option, provide approved preformed pressure sensitive, adhesive tape type of temporary

pavement marking of required colors, widths and lengths in lieu of temporary painted marking.

Continuous durability and effectiveness of such marking is required during period for which its

use is required. Remove any unsatisfactory tape type marking and replace with painted markings.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal drawings.

1. When manufacturer's instructions deviate from specifications, submit proposed resolution for

Contracting Officer's Representative consideration.

3.4 PAINT APPLICATION

A. Apply uniformly painted pavement marking of required colors, length, and width with true, sharp

edges and ends on properly cured, prepared, and dried surfaces.

B. Comply with details as indicated on drawings and established control points.

C. Apply paint at wet film thickness of 0.4 mm (0.015 inch). Apply paint in one coat. When directed

by Contracting Officer's Representative, apply additional coats at markings showing light spots.

Comply with paint manufacturer's maximum drying time requirements to prevent undue softening

of asphalt, and pick-up, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic.

D. When deficiency in marking drying occurs, discontinue paint operations until cause of slow drying

is determined and corrected.

E. Remove and replace marking applied less than minimum material rates, deviates from true

alignment, exceeds stipulated length and width tolerances, or shows light spots, smears, or other

deficiencies or irregularities.

F. Remove marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other

approve method to prevent damage on applied surface.

3.5 DETAIL PAVEMENT MARKING APPLICATION

A. Apply Detail Pavement Markings, exclusive of actual traffic lane marking as follows:

1. At exit and entrance islands and turnouts.

2. On curbs.

3. At crosswalks.

4. At parking bays.

5. Other locations as indicated on drawings.

B. Apply International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. Color as shown on

drawings. Apply paint for symbol using suitable template that will provide pavement marking with

true, sharp edges and ends.

C. Install detail pavement markings of colors, widths and lengths, and design pattern at locations

indicated on drawings.



3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Length and Width of Lines: Plus or minus 75 mm (3 inches) and plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch),

respectively, in case of skip markings.

B. Length of intervals exceeding line length tolerance are not acceptable.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove excess paint before paint sets.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect pavement markings from traffic and construction operations.

1. Protect newly painted markings from vehicular traffic until paint is dry and track free.

2. Place warning signs at beginning of wet line, and at points well in advance of marking

equipment for alerting approaching traffic from both directions.

3. Place small flags or other similarly effective small objects near freshly applied markings at

frequent intervals to reduce crossing by traffic.

B. Repair damage.

END OF SECTION


SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 30 00-1

SITE IMPROVEMENTS

32 30 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made part of this Section of the

Specifications.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this

Section, including but not limited to the following:

1. Furnish and install the Flower-watering stations, including concrete pad, water spigot, trash

receptacle and complete any required work necessary to make the water supply equipment

operate using the water supply source indicated.

2. Furnish and install benches at the specified locations.

3. Columbarium wall, row and column identification (letters and numbers) shall be furnished and

installed as indicated, to match the same elements on the existing columbarium walls.

4. Site signage indicated on the drawings for the new work, shall be furnished and installed to

match the existing signage of the same respective type with installation as indicated.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated

Sections:

1. Section 03 30 53: CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE

2. Section 32 05 23: CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES:

1. General: For each item specified in description of work or Part 2 - Products, provide

information showing complete detail, location in the project, material and size of components,

method of joining various components and assemblies, finish, and location, size and type of

anchors. Mark items requiring field assembly for erection identification and furnish erection

drawings and instruction.

2. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3. Provide samples of full range of colors and finishes available for review and approval, prior to

ordering.



1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification and the work shall comply with

pertinent standards of the latest editions as specified below or by industry standards unless

designated otherwise herein.


B221-08 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Shapes, and Tubes

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

D1.2-97 Structural Welding Code Aluminum

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOWER WATERING STATIONS: GENERAL

A. Flower watering station materials, dimensions, functionality, construction, finishes and colors shall

fully comply with the specifications and Contract Drawings or be deemed as approved equal. To

achieve approval as an equal, submittal of a point by point comparison of the proposed equal

product to the specifications and Contract Drawings is required by the Contractor during the

submittal process. If the product being submitted for approval as an approved equal has any

features that are different than the specifications and Contract Drawings, they must be identified

in the submittal. If the differences result in a product that is deemed by the reviewer as being less

than that specified and shown in the Contract Drawings, then the process for attempting approval

as an approved equal shall NOT be performed as a submittals process and the submittal will be

returned unapproved Any further attempt to have the product approved for use in the project

shall be submitted with a variance request along with explanation of the differences, why they

should be accepted and any cost or project completion factors shall be included. The elements

included in the flower watering station to which this paragraph is applicable are:

1. TRASH RECEPTACLE (Paragraph 2.2 of this Specification Section)

2. WATER SPIGOT ASSEMBLIES (Paragraph 2.6 of this Specification Section)

2.2 TRASH RECEPTACLE

A. Trash receptacles shall match existing and completely meet the specifications and Contract

Drawings or be approved as an equal. Trash receptacle materials, dimensions, functionality,

construction, finishes and colors shall fully comply with the specifications and Contract Drawings

or be deemed as approved equal. To achieve approval as an equal, submittal of a point by point

comparison of the proposed equal product to the specifications and Contract Drawings is required

by the Contractor during the submittal process. If the product being submitted for approval as an

approved equal has any features that are different than the specifications and Contract Drawings,

they must be identified in the submittal. If the differences result in a product that is deemed by

the reviewer as being less than that specified and shown in the Contract Drawings, then the



process for attempting approval as an approved equal shall NOT be performed as a submittals

process and the submittal will be returned unapproved Any further attempt to have the product

approved for use in the project shall be submitted with a variance request along with explanation

of the differences, why they should be accepted and any cost or project completion factors shall

be included.

B. MATERIALS

1. Main body construction shall be 3/8” x 1” vertical solid steel bar; 1/4” x 2-1/2” horizontal solid

steel bands; 3/8” x 3” steel support bars; 5/8” solid steel top ring; leveling feet with 3/8”

diameter threaded steel shaft. All trash receptacles shall be signed to read “TRASH” as

indicated on the details in the Contract Drawings. Sign material, finish, color, font and font

size shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Mounting of signs shall be as shown on

approved Shop Drawings. All joints of steel components shall be fully welded and ground

smooth throughout.

2. Unit shall contain one 36-gallon capacity high density plastic inner liner with its weight not to

exceed 6 lbs. The unit manufacturer shall provide the black plastic inner liners which shall be

molded on tooling designed for and owned by the unit manufacturer. They inner liner shall

offer maximum capacity and strength with lightweight construction using critical molded ribs,

integral handholds, and high strength materials. This style of inner liner shall minimizes

handling difficulty and facilitate easy emptying and storage while affording long service life.

C. REQUIRED OPTIONS

1. Lids: Units shall be shipped with manufacturer’s standard formed lid with formed dome to

match existing.

2. Color: Match existing trash receptacles.

3. Mounting plate: Standard (1) anchor bolt hole.

D. FINISHES

1. All fabricated metal components are steel shotblasted, etched, phosphatized, preheated, and

electrostatically powder-coated with TGIC polyester powder coatings. Products are fully

cleaned and pretreated, preheated and coated while hot to fill crevices and build coating film.

Coated parts are then fully cured to coating manufacturer's specifications where the thickness

of the resulting finish averages a minimum of 200-250 microns.

2. Project location has been determined to be a high salt abusive climate. Hot dip galvanizing

before powder coating is required. Hot dip galvanizing will provide greater protection in salty

climates (or where deicing chemicals possibly containing salt may be used) but yields a

slightly less smooth coating finish. All of the fabricated metal components and castings shall

be hot dip galvanized.



2.3 BENCHES

A. Benches are to match existing. To establish an acceptable level of quality for the bench materials

and fabrication process, the following manufacturing features are listed and required for the

purpose of identifying manufacturers that provide work and materials generally complying with

these specifications. Their selection for this work shall not relieve them from performing the work

as specified. The basis of design for the benches is the Victor Stanley RB-28 Steelsites units.

B. Manufacturing Features: Front welds are to be ground and polished until they form a continuous

surface from the top tubular section to each vertical steel slat. Steel seat members shall be

gently reverse contoured for maximum comfort. The end sections shall be solid steel bar, welded

and ground, structurally adequate for the maximum loads, including an industry standard or

greater design load safety factor. End arm rests are required and shall be standard integral

welded configuration, with no center arm rests. All fabricated metal components are to be steel

shotblasted, etched, phosphatized, preheated and electrostatically powder-coated with TGIC

polyester powder coatings.

C. Benches shall be at the locations, sizes and in the quantities indicated on the Contract drawings.

D. Bench color shall match existing color, as approved during the submittal process.

E. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. Use of acorn nuts is required; exposed bolt ends

or flat bolt heads are not acceptable.

F. WARRANTY:

1. All benches shall be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a minimum period

of three years, from final acceptance. Warranty shall not apply to damage resulting from

accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence or abuse.

2.4 COLUMBARIUM LETTERS AND NUMBERS

A. Letters and numbers shall be installed on the Columbarium walls as indicated, with the specific

details of the materials, size, finish and mounting to match the respective elements on the

existing Columbarium walls.

2.5 SITE SIGNAGE

A. The location and information to be displayed on the new site signage shall be as indicated in the

drawings. The Contractor shall furnish and install the new site signage that matches the existing

signage for the same respective type.

2.6 WATER SPIGOT ASSEMBLIES

A. Water spigots and housing shall be constructed as indicated on the drawings. The water spigot

indicated on the drawings shall be an ADA compliant spigot operated with a paddle that allows

the water to flow when pushed either right or left, with 2 Kg (5 lbs) of force or less. The assembly

shall be installed with a pressure regulating valve and isolation valve installed in the meter box

and the assembly is to be blown out if located in a region where the temperatures seasonally go

below freezing. The spigot assembly shall contain all pipes, fittings, attachments, mounting base,



and any other ancillary materials or equipment to produce a fully functional water spigot

assembly, as indicated on the drawings, from the connection to the existing water system at the

isolation valve for the spigot.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to installation of any of the work in this section, contractor shall inspect the planned

installation locations to insure that conditions are not significantly different from those indicated on

the contract drawings. All materials shall be inspected prior to installation to insure compliance

with the contract documents and to insure there is no damage. Should conditions be different

from those indicated on the contract documents, contractor should immediately notify the Owner's

Representative.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake alignment and locations for all site furnishings for review and approval by Owner's

Representative. Verify that all elements in this section “fit” within location provided.

B. Install items rigid, plumb and true to lines and levels shown.

C. Assemble (if required) and install items as per manufacturer’s printed instructions, or approved

shop drawings, unless otherwise specified or shown.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Flower Watering Stations:

1. Stake location of flower watering stations and obtain approval from Owner’s Representative

prior to forming concrete pad. Install concrete pad in accordance with 32 05 23 – CEMENT

AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS.

2. Anchor trash receptacle and flower vase containers as shown on the Contract Drawings and

following the manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

3. Install water spigot assemblies according to manufacturer’s recommendations and as

indicated on the Contract Drawings, including pipe, fittings, pressure reducing valve and

valve boxes. Install mounting for the spigot and the "Do Not Drink" sign as indicated in the

drawings. All anchoring hardware shall be stainless steel. Coordinate all work with other

trades.

B. Benches:

1. Benches shall be shipped assembled. Mount benches as recommended by the manufacturer

and as specified herein. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. Use of acorn nuts is

required; exposed bolt ends or flat bolt heads are unacceptable.

C. Columbarium Numbers and Letters:

1. The installation shall match the existing columbarium walls and the Contractor shall provide a

mockup of the installation before the actual work, to demonstrate the intended work and

verify that the work does match the existing. Work shall not proceed until the mock-up of the



installation has been presented showing the match of the existing and is accepted by the

Owner's Representative.

3.4 CLEAN UP

A. Clean up area of excess material and debris. Clean above ground portions of all receptacles and

other site improvements.

END OF SECTION


SLIDE GATE OPERATOR32 31 14 - 1

SECTION 32 31 14SLIDE GATE OPERATOR

PART I - GENERAL1.01 INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION

A. Pre-wired, self-contained, slide gate operator for horizontal sliding gates, including all selectedattachments and accessory equipment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 32 31 13.11 - Chain Link Cantilever Slide GatesB. Section 03 30 53 - Cast in Place Concrete

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop drawings: Submit drawings showing connections to adjacent construction, range of travel,

and all electrical and mechanical connections to the operator. Drawings shall also show the sizeand location of the concrete mounting pad. Underground electrical runs and inductive vehicleobstruction loop locations shall be shown on shop drawings.

B. See section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.C. Test reports:

1. Submit affidavits from the manufacturer demonstrating that the gate mechanism has beentested to 200,000 cycles without breakdown.

2. Each operator shall bear a label indicating that the operator mechanism has been testedfor full power and pressure of all hydraulic components, full stress tests of all mechanicalcomponents and electrical tests of all overload devices.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company specializing in the manufacture of the Products

specified in this section with not less than ten years e xperience.B. Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment, provide proof of

attending factory technical training within previous three years, or obtain other significantmanufacturer endorsement of technical aptitude during the submittal process.

1.05 CODES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Operators shall be built to UL 325 standards and be listed by a testing laboratory. Complete all

electrical work according to local codes and National Electrical code. All fieldwork shall beperformed in a neat and professional manner, completed to journeyman standards.

B. Current safety standards require the use of multiple external sensors to be capable of reversingthe gate in either direction upon sensing an obstruction. See also 2.02D.

C. Current safety standards require gate operators to be designed and labeled for specific usageclasses. Powermaster Model SG-2004 is UL 325 Listed for use in Class I through IVapplication.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products upright in the original shipping containers, covered, ventilated and protected

from all weather conditions.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide a five-year limited warranty against all defects in materials or workmanship. Defective

materials shall be replaced, at no cost to the owner.1. Return completed warranty registration form (included in Installation and Reference

manual) to manufacturer.C. Operator shall have a 2 years service agreement with the owner.

Section 32 31 19 - Decorative Metal Fences and Gates


See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.



PART II - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Power Master: www.powermastergateoperatros.comB. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

2.02 GATE OPERATORSA. Power Master gate operators model SG-2004.

2.03 OPERATION - CHAIN DRIVEN OPERATORA. Operation shall be by means of a chain passing between a gear metal wheel. Model SG Slide

Gate Operator, for cantilever, rolling, or overhead sliding gates. Operator to have oilbath type,worm gear reducer. Output shafts minimum 1" diameter, supported by sealed rolller bearings. Operator shall be capable of handling gates weighing up to 1,800 pounds. Provide adjustabletorque limiting clutch and solenoid operated brake. Mechanical disconnect by means oflockable handle to allow manual operation. Adjustable limit switches of the positive chain driventype. A spring set, solenoid released, double shoe brake shall be provided to prevent gate fromcoasting.

B. Motor to be high starting torque, industrial type, removable without affecting limit switch settings,and shall incorporate thermal overload protection. The motor controller shall be a full voltage,across-the-line, mechanically interlocked reversing contactor.

C. The Control circuit shall be 24 VAC and shall include a maximum run timer to limit run time to90 seconds or less, a 1.5 second delay on reverse to reduce shock loads on gate andprovisions for all types of obstruction sensing devices. A clearly marked, thermal strip shall beprovided for all field connections. The control shall have provisions for connecting; 3 buttonstations, single button stations, radio controls, loop detectors and automatic closing timerwithout additional changes.

D. The operator shall be field convertible from right hand to left hand and for use as a single,master or slave without additional parts or modifications. An on/off switch will be provided todisconnect power at electrical enclosure. The operator stand shall be heavy gauge steel, primedand painted to resist corrosion with provisions for mounting to concrete pad. The weather proofcover shall have a lockable hinged cover for access to control equipment.

E. Electrical components shall include as a minimum:1. Solid state control board with diagnostic LED's to indicate all input and output functions.2. External control input terminal connections for:

a. Radio Receiver for use with Proximity Controllersb. Adjustable 7-day time clockc. Microswitch in Fire/Emergency Access Lockboxd. Push Button Control Statione. Key Switchesf. Loop Detectorsg. Card Key Readersh. Telephone Entry Systems, Etc.

3. Adjustable timer to close with 0-60 second adjustment.4. Maximum run timer for equipment protection (self-adjusting).5. Master/Slave option with dedicated terminal connection provided.6. Time delay on reverse to insure smooth gate motion and less stress on equipment.7. Spike suppressing circuitry for surge and lightning protection.8. Emergency control enabling circuitry for safety with security.9. Electrical dynamic or solenoid brake for precise gate positioning.10. Magnetic gate lock circuitry with control relay.11. Integral, speed sensing, anti-entrapment circuitry with independent opening and closing

sensitivity adjustment.



12. External anti-entrapment circuitry with separate terminal connections for easy installationof contact and non-contact sensors.

13. 3 phase instant reversing motors with thermal overload protection and high speed ballbearings for smooth, quiet operation.

14. Internal On/Off power switch.15. NEMA 1 three-button control station.16. Selectable three second advanced audio warning signal.17. All components shall have overload protection.

F. Mechanical components shall include as a minimum:1. Heavy duty #11 Ga. Galvanized steel frame providing a strong and durable unit.2. 40:1, oil bath type, gear reducer.3. Heavy duty #50 drive chain or larger with a spring loaded tensioning system.4. Heavy duty pillow block type ball bearings supporting output drive shaft and enabling

extended endurance under heavy loads with low maintenance.5. Padlockable drive disconnect with brass slide for manual operation in case of power

failure.6. Positive chain driven rotary limit switches for precision gate positioning. Settings are never

affected by manual operation.G. Techincal components shall include as a minimum:

1. Power requirements: 208V, 3 phase.2. Class 2 low voltage control circuit.3. Maximum gate weight: 1800 LBS4. Maximum cycles per hour: 30 CPH5. Maximum gate width: 50 feet6. Gate speed: 11 inches per second7. Shipping weight: approx. 235 LBS.

H. Accessories:1. Two sets of through-beam or retro-reflective photo eyes shall be installed to protect both

the open and close direction so that if the beam is broken by a solid object the gate willstop and not operate. The eyes shall be installed no further than 5” from the face of thegate and between 21 inches and 27.5 inches from the roadway surface.

2. Reversing Obstruction Loop Detectors on the inbound and outbound side of the gate.3. Exit Loop Detector on the outbound side of the gate.4. Gear Box Heater5. Safety Sensing Edges - hardwired to gate operator control interface or provided with

wireless transmitter/receiver with audible low battery indicator.6. Padlockable housing7. Provide contacts/accessories for connection into site wide access control system to allow

for remote opening, closing, locking, etc.8. Provide seven proximity controllers for use by the Owner's staff.9. Provide adjustable 7-day time clock10. Provide Fire/Emergency Access Lockbox with microswitch and brass handle with

mechanical cable release mechanism.11. Provide heater unit and scrapers to prevent snow build up from enter operator.

2.04 FACTORY TESTINGA. Fully assemble and test, at the factory, each gate operator to assure smooth operation,

sequencing and electrical connection integrity. Apply physical loads to the operator to simulatefield conditions. Tests shall simulate physical and electrical loads equal to the fully ratedcapacity of the operator components.

B. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. Check all welds forcompleteness and continuity. Check welded corners and edges to assure they are square andstraight.



C. Inspect painted finish for completeness. Touch up imperfections prior to shipment.D. Check all hydraulic hoses and electrical wires to assure that chafing cannot occur during

shipping or operation.PART III - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Locate concrete mounting pad in accordance with approved shop drawings.B. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate

operators. Do not proceed until gate panel is aligned and operates without binding.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Installer shall insure that the electric service to the operator is at least 20 AMPS. Operator

wattage is 2400.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping oruneven motion. Test limit switches for proper "at rest" gate position.

B. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation.C. Provide factory start up, training, and demonstration for all aspect of gate and operator.

END OF SECTION



DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 1

DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

32 31 19

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor is responsible for providing a system of fences and gates. Furnish all labor material,

supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation and perform all operations in connextion with and

incidental to the complete installation of the fences and gates and gurantee/warranty as shown on

the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included

are::

1. Decorative fence system at locations indicated on Drawings.

2. Concrete block and brick piers at locations indicated on Drawings.

3. Decorative fence gates at locations indicated on Drawings.


A. Materials product data and samples: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,

AND SAMPLES.

B. Concrete Footing: Section 03 30 53: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. Concrete Block & Brick Piers: Sections 04 05 13 MASONRY MORTARING and 04 20 00 UNIT

MASONRY

D. Cut Stone Assemblies: Section 04 40 10 CUT STONE ASSEMBLIES

E. Footing Excavation: Section 31 20 00: EARTHWORK.



B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. B221-12 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

D. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.2/D1.2M-14 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

E. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

1. No. 18 - Primer, Zinc Rich, Organic.

1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Submittal Procedures: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES:


1. Show size, configuration, and fabrication and installation details.






a. Point by point comparison of proposed "Equal" products.

2. Grommets indicating manufacturer recommendation for each application.

3. Installation instructions.

4. Warranty.

D. Samples:

1. Fence Material: 12 inches long, each type and color.

a. Submit quantity required to show full color and texture range.

2. Approved samples may be incorporated into work.

E. Certificates: Certify products comply with specifications.

F. Delegated Design Drawings and Calculations: Signed and sealed by responsible design

professional.

1. Show location and magnitude of loads applied to structural frame.

2. Identify deviations from details shown on drawings.


A. Manufacturer, Fabricator, Installer Qualifications:

1. Regularly manufactures, fabricates, and installs specified products.

2. Manufactured, Fabricated, and Installed specified products with satisfactory service on five

similar installations for minimum five years.


b. Provide photographs, drawings and other documents showing character and quality of

completed installation.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Regularly installs specified products.

2. Installed specified products with satisfactory service on five similar installations for minimum

five years.


b. Provide photographs, drawings and other documents showing character and quality of

completed installation.

C. Delegated Design: Comply with system performance.

1.6 DELIVERY


B. Mark packaging, legibly. Indicate manufacturer's name or brand, type, color, and manufacture

date.



A. Protect products from damage during handling and construction operations.

1.8 WARRANTY





B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant decorative fences and gates against material and

manufacturing defects.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Industrial Decorative aluminum fence and gate system with concealed picket attachment.


A. Delegated Design: Prepare submittal documents including design calculations and drawings

signed and sealed by registered design professional, licensed in state where work is located.

1. Minor deviations to details shown on drawings to accommodate manufacturer’s standard

products may be accepted by Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) when deviations

do not affect design concept and specified performance.

B. Design framework complying with specified performance:

1. Load Resistance: ASCE/SEI 7; Design criteria as indicated on Drawings // when tested

according to ASTM E330/E330M //.

C. Completed panels capable of supporting 135 kg (300 lb.) load (applied at midspan) without

permanent deformation, 25 percent inclination change in grade.


A. Provide decorative fence and gates from one manufacturer.

B. DECORATIVE FENCE SYSTEM.

1. Framework: ASTM B221 extruded aluminum, alloy 6005-T5 for posts and rails (outer

channels); alloy 6063-T5 for pickets and rail inner slide channels.

2. Picket Fence: Extruded aluminum, 25mm (1 inch) square by 1.5 mm (0.062") thick.

3. Rails: Extruded aluminum, 44mm (1.75 inch) square, 2.5mm (0.100 inch) thick top, 3mm

(0.120 inch) thick sidewalls, 2mm (0.080 inch) thick inner side channel, and holes at 118mm

(4.715 inch) o.c. to receive picket; seal with PVC grommets.

4. Retaining Rod: Galvanized steel, 3mm (0.125 inch).

5. Posts: Extruded aluminum, minimum 62.5mm (2-1/2 inch) square tube, 2mm (0.0800) thick,

2mm (0.080 inch) thick interior reinforcing web.

6. Gates: Extruded aluminum, 45mm (1.75 inch) sq., 45mm (1.75 inch sq.) x 6mm (.250 inch)

gate ends, and 25mm (1 inch) sq. x 3mm (.125 inch) pickets.

a. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.

7. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

a. Rail Attachment Bracket: One-way tamperproof security bolts with inverted “T-nuts”.

b. Post Connections Bracket: Self-drilling hex-head screws.

8. Rings, Post Caps, Finials, and Miscellaneous adornments: Cast aluminum.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Pre-cut pickets, rails, and posts in lengths indicated on Drawings. Pre-punch manufacturer's

concealed design system rails to accept pickets.

B. Fully insert rail inner slide into outer channel for internal retaining rod raceway.




C. Insert pickets through grommets into pre-punched holes in rails; align pre-drilled picket holes with

internal raceway.

D. Insert retaining rods in rail passing through pre-drilled holes in each picket.

E. Fabricate gates of reinforced concealed design system, picket and rails welded at joint

intersections.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Paint finish:

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Polyester powder coating, 0.0508 mm (2 mils)

minimum thickness. Comply with manufacturer's coating process.

a. Color: Black.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets: PVC, High quality.

B. Primer: Manufacturer’s spray cans or paint pens.

C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M, type to suit application.

D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI No. 18.

F. Touch-Up Paint: Match shop finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Correct substrate deficiencies.

1. Fill.

2. Grind.

3. Level.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Layout fence symmetrically, with minimum number of joints.

B. Installation:

1. Install fence and gates according to manufacturer's instructions.

2. Set posts in concrete footers minimum 900mm (36 inches) depth, or as indicated on

Drawings, whichever is greater.

3. Earthwork: As specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.

4. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 53 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

5. Posts setting by other methods as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are

permissible only when shown in engineering analysis of sufficient in strength for intended

application.

C. Installation Tolerances:

1. Variation from Indicated Grade: Maximum 50 mm (2 inches).

2. Variation from Indicated Line: Maximum 50 mm (2 inches).




D. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

1. Repair galvanized surfaces with galvanized repair paint.

2. Repair painted surfaces with touch up primer.

3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE

A. Seal expose surfaces when cutting or drilling rails or posts as follows:

1. Remove metal shavings from cut area.

2. Apply custom finish paint to match fence color. Prime and finish exposed surfaces with

manufacturer's spray cans or paint pens.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Set posts plumb, in concrete footings as indicated on Drawings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces. Remove contaminants and stains.

B. Clean site of excess materials, post-hole excavations, and debris removed or scattered uniformly.

END OF SECTION


PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 84 00–1

PLANTING IRRIGATION

32 84 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Contractor is responsible for providing a system with full and complete coverage. Furnish all

labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in

connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the irrigation system,

and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified

herein. Items of work specifically included are:

1. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and payment of required fees.

2. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig").

3. Maintenance period.

4. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire.

5. Adjustments and maintenance to existing booster pump.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 2-Site Work

B. Section 32 90 00, PLANTING


A. Contractor:

1. Irrigation Contractor must have demonstrated, using persons directly employed by the

Contractor, experience with the installation of at least five (5) irrigation systems having

large diameter gasketed pipe (6-inch and larger), centralized control systems using two-

wire decoder technology, and valve-in-head sprinklers (minimum 1-inch inlet with swing

joint).

2. Irrigation Contractor must be currently a Certified Irrigation Contractor (CIC) with the

Irrigation Association and in good standing.

B. System Requirements:

1. Full and complete coverage is required. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the

Government, make necessary adjustments to layout required to achieve full coverage of

irrigated areas.

2. Layout work as closely as possible to drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic to the extent

that swing joints, offsets and all fittings are not shown.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittal and provide number of copies per Division 1 specifications. Unless otherwise

noted, provide four (4) copies of irrigation information in a 3-ring binder with table of contents

and index sheet. Provide sections that are indexed and labeled for valves, sprinklers, pipe and



fittings, wire and wire connectors, ID tags, shop drawings and all other irrigation equipment

shown or described on the drawings and within these specifications. Highlight items being

supplied on the catalog cut sheets. Submittal package must be complete prior to being

reviewed by the Resident Engineer/Contracting Officer’s Representative (CO/COR).

Incomplete submittals will be returned without review.

B. Materials List: Include all materials and products that are part of the irrigation system

including, but not limited to: pipe, fittings, valves, pipe components, water emission

components, and control system components. Quantities of materials need not be included.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating

instructions for equipment shown on the materials list. For rotary sprinklers include Center for

Irrigation Technology Space Pro Single Leg Profile showing the Distribution Uniformity and

Scheduling Coefficient for the nozzles being used at the specified offset spacing.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details. Show products

required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note

modifications to the installation detail.

E. Testing: Submit a proof of testing report following completion of each test listed in Part 1 of

these specifications. Unless otherwise noted, include name of test, date of test, name of the

individual completing the test, name of the company completing the test and a summary of

the test results. If system fails test, document any and all retests until system passes test.

F. Maintenance and Operation Instructions: Submit information listed in Part 3 of these

specifications.

G. Record Drawings: Submit information listed in Part 3 of these specifications.



publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): RR-F-621E Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump And

Catch Basin, Manhole

C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):

1. B40.1 Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type Elastic Element

D. American Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE):

1. S398 Sprinkler Testing and Performance Reporting.



E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. B61-02 Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

2. B62-15 Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

3. D1785-12 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120

4. D2241-15 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

5. D2287-12 Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion

Compounds

6. D2464-15 Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

7. D2466-15 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

8. D2564-12 Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

9. D2855-96(2010) Making solvent Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe

and Fittings

10. D3350-14 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials

11. F714-13 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)4170 Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

Based on Outside Diameter

12. F477-90 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

13. F2164-13 Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene Pressure Piping Systems

14. B209-14 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C110-12 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-Inch Through 48-Inch for Water and

Other Liquids

2. C111-12 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings.

3. C115-11 Flanged and Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges

4. C151-09 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds, for

Water or Other Liquids

5. C153-11 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 Inch Through 12-Inch for Water and Other

Liquids.

6. C500-09 Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems

7. C504-10 Rubber Sealed Butterfly Valves

8. C600-10 Installation for Ductile-Iron water Mains and Their Appurtenances

9. C901-08 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, ½ In. (13 mm) Through 3 In.

(76 mm), for Water Service

G. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):

1. SP70-2011 Cast Iron gate Valves, Flanged and Thread Ends



H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250-2014 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); Revision 1, May

1986

I. National Electric Code: (latest edition 2014)

J. Uniform Plumbing Code: (latest edition 2015)

1.6 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Work and materials will be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code,

the Uniform Plumbing Code, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities.

B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger

size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size

required by the contract documents.

C. If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these quantities are

provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual

quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an

independent estimate of quantities and wastage.

1.7 DEMOLITION

A. Prior to demolition, operate sprinklers in adjoining areas. See Section 1.9 Testing.

B. Remove/salvage existing sprinklers, valves and other irrigation components as indicated on

drawings. Remove components in manner to minimize damage. Deliver only salvageable

components to Cemetery. Properly dispose of other items.

C. Abandon existing irrigation pipe in place. If existing irrigation pipe is encountered during

installation of new irrigation pipe, cut and remove two (2) feet of existing irrigation pipe on

either side of new irrigation pipe.

D. Reuse existing control wiring as indicated on drawings. Cut existing control wiring at remote

control valves or remove existing control wiring from controller. Permanently label end of wire

that is to be reused with existing station number. Protect existing control wiring during

construction of new irrigation system.

1.8 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES

A. The government shall make NO utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and

supplies except as follows. Upon completion of the irrigation system or completion of portions

thereof, the contractor through the permanent connection of the new irrigation system to the

temporary pumping system, shall be provided water for flushing and testing of the new

irrigation system. Once the system is deemed operable and approved, and prior to the final

inspection, the contractor may use water at no cost through the irrigation system for

establishing turf and maintaining plant material. No other expressed or implied uses of

government furnished water exist.



B. The Contractor, at Contractor's expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the

CO/COR, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines,

and meters required by the public utilities. Before final acceptance of the work by the

Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines,

meters, and associated appurtenances.

1.9 TESTING

A. Notify the CO/COR five working days in advance of testing.

B. Subject pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections to a pressure test after

partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints will be allowed

to cure at least 24 hours before testing.

C. Subsections of pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the CO/COR.

D. Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests

or retests.

E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test – Solvent Weld Pipe:

1. Subject lateral pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating pressure

of 80 PSI for 30 minutes.

2. Install swing joint and valve-in-head sprinklers.

3. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings.

4. Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve,

or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.

5. As an alternative to the visual inspection described in Item 4. above, the CO/COR may

request that a pressure drop test be performed:

6. Purge air from pipe before test. Attach pressure gauge to a riser in the middle of the

lateral.

7. Pressurize the lateral via the isolation valve then close the handle on isolation valve to

seal off lateral.

8. Observe pressure loss on pressure gauge. If pressure loss is greater than 5 PSI, identify

reason for pressure loss. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance.

Repeat test until pressure loss is equal to or less than 5 PSI.

9. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.

10. After lateral passes test and prior to operational test, backfill and compact all pipe, fittings,

joints, or appurtenance.

F. Operational Test – Existing Valve-In-Head Sprinklers

1. Prior to demolition, activate each existing valve-in-head sprinkler in the areas surrounding

the construction to confirm proper operation. Document the test results listing the station



number of the sprinkler and whether it operated properly or not. The CO/COR will visually

observe the test and confirm the results by signing the documentation.

2. After completion of construction, again, activate each existing valve-in-head sprinkler in

the areas surrounding the construction to confirm proper operation. The CO/COR will

visually observe the test. If a sprinkler is not operating the same as prior to demolition, the

CO/COR will determine if the cause of the failure is due to the new construction. If it is

determined that the new construction is the cause of the failure, repair or replace the

existing sprinkler to the satisfaction of the CO/COR.

G. Operational Test – Piping and Valve-In-Head Sprinklers:

1. Activate each valve-in-head sprinkler in sequence from controller. Manual operation of the

sprinkler using the ON-OFF-AUTO switch at the sprinkler is not an acceptable method of

activation. The CO/COR will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and

leakage.

2. Replace defective valve-in-head sprinkler, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct

operational deficiencies.

3. Replace, adjust, add, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage

deficiencies.

4. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage

problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.

5. Repeat test(s) until each lateral pass all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and

correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the CO/COR. Adjust system as needed.

H. Distribution Uniformity (DU):

1. Irrigation Audits

a. Complete an irrigation audit, to include two (2) “representative” irrigation zones/test

areas.

b. Identify the (2) areas to be tested based on cemetery site conditions in consultation

with the cemetery foreman and/or irrigation personnel, Design Engineer and/or

CO/COR.

2. Sprinkler Characteristics

a. Minimum one audit for each combination of sprinkler model, nozzle type, spacing,

and pressure commonly used for the site.

3. Final determination of the areas to be tested will be based on the recommendation of the

Contractor and their understanding of the purpose and goals of performing these irrigation

audits. Submit a map indicating the locations of the zones to be tested.



4. Follow the methodology found in the current edition of the Irrigation Association

Landscape Irrigation Auditor Manual and Irrigation Audit Guidelines for performing

irrigation audits.

a. During each audit, a wind anemometer shall be used and wind speed information

recorded every 5 minutes, and a graph of this information shall be provided with the

summary report and audit information.

1) If at any time during the audit the wind exceeds 5 mph, it shall be noted in the

summary report.

2) If at any time the wind exceeds 10 mph, the audit shall be stopped and restarted

(cans emptied and started anew) when the wind drops below 5 mph for an

extended period of time, at the discretion of the auditor.

3) If a site is being audited that consistently has winds above 10 mph, then the

Contractor and National Irrigation Specialist will determine the best course of

action to proceed as to the effect of the wind on the audits.

5. Provide all data called for in the irrigation audit worksheets used in the current edition of

the Irrigation Association Landscape Irrigation Auditor Manual.

a. Supply all data in a digital (MS Excel format) as well as paper report format to

CO/COR.

b. Create similar templates/data sheets as those forms represented in MS Excel if none

are readily available to the general public from the Irrigation Association.

c. Provide copies of all field notes, drawings, and data collection forms used in the field,

to be submitted along with the paper report and digital media versions of the audit

information.

6. Based on the area being audited, the Contractor shall use a number of catch cans that is

divisible by 4, with a minimum of 28 catch cans being used for each audit.

7. Catch cans shall be laid out in a grid format per the current edition of Irrigation

Association Landscape Irrigation Audit Manual, based on:

a. Number of catch cans used

b. Size of the area tested

c. Number of sprinklers tested

d. Site conditions

1) Spacing shall be consistent and in a square pattern throughout each testing area.

8. Catch cans shall be as level as possible prior to beginning the audit. Cal Poly ITRC Catch

Cans shall be used or approved equal.

9. If water gets into the catch cans prior to the audit beginning, then all catch cans shall be

emptied out and the sprinklers test shall start over.



10. Depending on the type of sprinklers being audited, the following general rules shall be

followed for determining sprinkler run times:

a. Rotor type sprinklers – a minimum of 10 minute run time and a maximum of a 30

minute run time;

11. Catch can data collection shall be performed by the same person for all irrigation audits

for consistency of data purposes.

12. All worksheets shall be filled out to the fullest extent possible. As much data as can be

reasonably determined on each site for each test shall be provided in the worksheets.

a. Any missing worksheet data shall be accounted for with a written explanation as to

why the data is not present in the worksheets. An example of this would be:

b. No flow meter information provided

c. Reason – no flow meter present on site

d. Worksheets shall include all collected catch can data and determination of Low

Quarter Distribution Uniformity (DULQ) and Precipitation Rate (PR) along with all of

the other pertinent data in the worksheets.

13. On a copy of the irrigation plan accurately (within 1-foot) show the following:

a. All sprinklers and associated valves for each test area;

1) Any surrounding hardscape, plants, or physical site surroundings (roads,

walkways, headstones, benches, water spigots, trees, shrubs, etc.)

2) All catch cans (numbered per the worksheets) and associated data collected.

14. A summary report (maximum of one page per audit) shall be provided along with a map

and audit data for each location audited along with associated worksheets filled out as

specified above.

15. If any conclusions can be drawn based on the area tested, distribution uniformity or

precipitation rate, they should be explained in the summary page, along with any

recommendations for improvements of irrigation uniformity for the audit condition.

16. Submit Entire audit report to CO/COR within 10 working days of the completed field work.

I. Control Wire Grounding:

1. Test for proper grounding of control wire at decoders per manufacturer’s

recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer’s guidelines for

acceptance.

2. Replace defective wire, grounding rod or appurtenances. Repeat the test until the

manufacturer's guidelines are met.

3. If the test is acceptable, the individual completing the test must document the results of

the grounding test via a written report. Documentation should include station number,



date of test, and the ohms resistance to ground. Provide report to CO/COR within 10

working days of the completed tests.

J. Acceptance Test Prior to Final Inspection:

1. Upon completion of construction and prior to Final Inspection, an Acceptance Test must

be passed.

2. Coordinate start of Acceptance Test with CO/COR 5 days prior to beginning of test.

3. During the Acceptance Test, the irrigation system must be fully operational from the

control system. The irrigation system must operate with no faults for 14 consecutive days.

If at any time during the 14 day test period, a system fault occurs, the source of the fault

must be determined and corrected and the 14 day evaluation period will start again. If a

system fault occurs, make repairs within 72 hours of notification from CO/COR.

Document any faults in the proof of test report listing date of fault, fault, cause of the fault

and the corrective action taken.

4. When the system has operated for 14 days without fault, contact the CO/COR to

schedule Final Inspection.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS

A. The purpose of on-site reviews by the CO/COR is to periodically observe the work in

progress, the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents, and to address

questions with regard to the installation.

1. Schedule reviews for irrigation system layout or testing with the CO/COR as required by

these specifications.

2. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project.

3. A Final Inspection will occur at the completion of the irrigation Acceptance Test. The

intent of the Final Inspection is to verify that all installation; testing; maintenance and

operation submittals; and project record drawing submittals are completed prior to the

start of the Maintenance and Guarantee/Warranty periods.

4. All costs, including travel expenses and site visits by the Veterans Administration or

Veterans Administration representative(s) for additional Inspection(s) that may be

required after the Final Inspection due to non-compliance with the Construction

Documents are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.11 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT

A. The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Government receives irrigation

materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner.

B. Guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for a

period of one year from Final Inspection by CO/COR. Fill and repair depressions. Restore

landscape, utilities, structures or site features damaged by the settlement of irrigation



trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by construction or a

defective item. Make repairs within 72 hours of notification from CO/COR.

C. Replace damaged items with identical materials and methods per contract documents or

applicable codes. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price.

D. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements

made during the guarantee/warranty period.

1.12 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate construction of irrigation system with CO/COR and Cemetery Staff. See irrigation

plans and installation details for required coordination efforts related to the installation of

specific irrigation components.

B. Control of Excavations: See Section 3.3 for safety and access directions.

C. Install irrigation components in landscaped areas only.

D. Construction cannot proceed unless staking of irrigation pipe, valve locations and sprinkler

locations are reviewed and accepted by the CO/COR.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 QUALITY

A. Use new materials without flaws or defects.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Unless noted otherwise, use specified equipment to match and be compatible with existing

equipment. CO/COR must approve equipment prior to construction.

B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be

increased at Contractor’s option.

2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solvent Weld Pipe and Fittings:

1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation

Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of

Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled

end suitable for solvent welding.

2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to dimensions and tolerances

established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than

Class 160 in the case of small nominal diameters not manufactured in Class 160.

3. Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings

conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use primer approved by

pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564, of type

approved by pipe manufacturer.



B. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:

1. Joint sealant: Use only teflon-type tape or teflon based paste pipe joint sealant on plastic

threads. Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on water-

carrying pipes on metal threaded connections.

2.4 PIPE COMPONENTS

A. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly:

1. As presented in the installation details.

2. Brass construction, 1-inch nominal size, operating pressure 5-125 PSI with locking rubber

or vinyl cover. Acceptable manufacturer and model is Toro 100-SLSC to match and be

compatible with existing equipment.

3. Swing Joint: Use pre-manufactured triple swing joint. Acceptable manufacturer is Spears,

Lasco or approved equal.

4. Quick Coupler Anchor: Use pre-manufactured bolt on anchor. Acceptable manufacturer

is Harco or approved equal.

5. Valve Box: Use plastic 10-inch round valve box with black lid. Acceptable manufacturer is

Carson, Maclean Highline (Pentek), NDS or approved equal.

6. Filter Fabric: Use a spunbond polyester 3.5 oz. per square yard landscape fabric.

2.5 VALVE-IN-HEAD SPRINKLER COMPONENTS

A. Sprinkler Assembly:

1. As presented in the installation details.

2. Use a valve-in-head gear drive sprinkler capable of covering the radius with the discharge

rate at the pressure as presented on the drawings. Furnish part circle sprinklers with a

minimum adjustable arc of 30- to 345-degrees, and full circle sprinklers with a non

adjustable arc. Nozzle must be tested per ASAE S398.1 and be verified to deliver

Distribution Uniformity of 80% or more and a Scheduling Coefficient of 1.2 or less at the

specified offset spacing. Furnish sprinkler with closed case construction, stainless steel

retract spring, ACME inlet threads, minimum 1 1/2-inch size inlet, top serviceable rock

screen, replaceable valve seat, pressure regulation range from 60 to 100 PSI and nozzle

trajectory of 25-degrees. Minimum pop-up height is 3 1/4-inches. Acceptable

manufacturer and model is Toro FLX800 55 to match existing equipment.

3. Swing Joint: Use pre-manufactured triple swing joint compatible with service tee. Use

ACME threads on inlet and outlet per ASTM F2768. Acceptable manufacturer is Spears,

Lasco, Toro or approved equal.

4. Service Tee: Use PVC solvent weld service tee rated at 315 PSI working pressure and

tested at 788 PSI per ASTM F1970. Use service tee with solvent weld ends and 1 1/2-

inch ACME thread outlet. Acceptable manufacturer is Lasco, Toro or approved equal.



5. Decoder: Use single station decoder compatible with existing control system.

6. Wire connectors: Use 3M DBR/Y-6.

7. Sod: One 18-inch by 18-inch square around each head, sod type per Landscape

Specifications.

2.6 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Existing Control System: Toro Site Pro Synergy Central with GDC 2-wire control system and

decoders.

B. Control Wire:

1. Control Wire: Use Toro #14/2 jacketed decoder cable (Paige #170800) to match and be

compatible with existing decoder cable. Strip color to match existing.

2. Color: Wire color must be continuous over its entire length.

3. Splices: Use 3M DBR/Y-6 splices as recommended by control system manufacturer.

4. Valve Box: Use plastic standard rectangular valve with black lid. Acceptable manufacturer

is Carson, Maclean Highline (Pentek), NDS or approved equal.

5. Decoder Cable Fuse Device: Use Paige Electric Model 270DCFD (two way) or approved

equal.

6. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive

chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide colored red and

imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW", in black lettering.

2.7 OTHER COMPONENTS

A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts and other items

indicated in the General Notes of the drawings.

B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation

details that are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been

referenced in these specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS

A. Site Inspections:

1. Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section.

Report irregularities to the CO/COR prior to beginning work.

2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"):

1. Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground utilities,

and with cemetery maintenance personnel.

2. Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at no

additional cost to the contract price.



C. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the staking

has been completed. Notify the CO/COR one week in advance of review. The CO/COR will

identify modifications during this review.

3.2 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. Stake locations of alley and sprinklers in burial sections using a licensed surveyor. Use alleys

as identified on the drawings.

B. Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: irrigation pipe, quick coupling valves

and sprinklers.

C. If staked irrigation components conflict with utilities or other components or site features,

coordinate rerouting of components with CO/COR.

3.3 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit workspace for

installing connections and fittings.

B. Survey Markers:

1. Protect markers during construction.

2. If a survey marker is disturbed during construction, the Contractor is responsible for

replacing the marker. The Contractor must hire a licensed surveyor to resurvey the

location of the marker and replace it.

C. Minimum cover:

1. 30-inches or deeper to match existing pipe under in landscape areas. (distance from top

of pipe to bottom of road base)

2. 18-inches over irrigation lateral pipe to sprinklers in landscaped areas. (distance from top

of pipe to finish grade)

3. 6-inches above warning tape.

4. 2-inches minimum horizontal separation between pipes and wiring in a common trench.

5. Install sleeves at depth to maintain specified depth of pipe or wire routed through sleeve.

D. Install and maintain safety fencing around all unattended excavation. Place safety signs

adjacent to construction area roadway to the satisfaction of the CO/COR.

E. All excavations must be backfilled by the end of each workday. Do not leave any open

trenches overnight, on weekends or on holidays.

F. If trenching operation restricts access to a burial section, provide plywood and safety fencing

across open trench to allow access to burial section. Provide access to the satisfaction of the

CO/COR.

G. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill will be free from rubbish,

vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension.



Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe will be free of sharp

objects that may damage the pipe.

H. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc in sleeves. Backfill sleeves in

the following manner:

1. Backfill trench using excavated material in 6-inch layers. Minimum compaction of backfill

for sleeves shall be a minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698-78. Backfill to

bottom of road base under roads or to finish grade under walks and curbs.

I. Backfill pipe and wiring in turf areas in the following manner:

1. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe or

wire in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil.

J. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc., in sleeves.

K. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Remove excess backfill to on-site location as

directed by the CO/COR.

L. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the CO/COR for trench

depth adjustments.

3.4 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. General:

1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe

ends.

2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue

assembly.

3. Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the limits of the

curvature of the pipe. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20-foot length of pipe by

pipe size are shown in the following table. All curvature results from the bending of the

pipe lengths. No deflection will be allowed at a pipe joint.

SIZE

RADIUS

OFFSET PER

20' LENGTH

1 ½"

25'

7'-8"

2"

25'

7'8"



2 ½"

100'

1'-11"

3"

100'

1'-11"

4”

100’

1'-11"

B. Solvent Weld Pipe and Fittings:

1. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe:

a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in manner recommended by manufacturer

and in accordance with accepted industry practices.

b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before pressurizing or installing

with vibratory plow.

c. Snake pipe from side to side within trench.

2. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted.

C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:

1. PVC Threaded Connections:

a. Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted.

b. Apply thread sealant in manner recommended by component, pipe and sealant

manufacturers and in accordance with accepted industry practices.

c. Use plastic components with male threads and metal components with female

threads where connection is plastic-to-metal.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE COMPONENTS

A. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly:

1. As presented in the installation details, per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Install where indicated in the irrigation plans.

3. Brand “QC” in 2-inch high by 3/16-inch deep letters on valve box lid.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVE-IN-HEAD SPRINKLER COMPONENTS

A. Valve-In-Head Rotary Sprinkler Assembly:

1. Thoroughly flush pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. Water must be clear of any

debris before flushing operation stops.

2. Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings

3. Install sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent edges of paved areas.

4. Install sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade.



5. Install swing joint with the appropriate angle between the lateral pipe and the lay length

nipple per the installation details.

6. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best

performance.

7. Adjust pressure regulation to 65 PSI.

8. Adjust trajectory and radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance.

9. Use wire connectors and waterproof sealant to connect two-wire cable, decoders and

solenoids. Install connections and sealant per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

10. Install 18-inch by 18-inch square piece of sod around all VIH sprinklers in areas to be

seeded.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Control Wire:

1. Route two-wire cable in pipe trench.

2. Make connections between two-wire cable, decoders and solenoids per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

3. Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90 degree

change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along continuous

runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil 24-inch length of wire within each valve-in-head

sprinkler.

4. If a cable must be spliced, make splice with waterproof connectors and sealant installed

per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in turf areas using a valve box that

contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate valve box. Use same procedure for

connection to valves as for in-line splices. If a separate valve box is used for wire splices,

brand “WS” in 2-inch high by 3/16-inch deep letters on valve box lid.

5. Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and below pipe.

6. Protect wire not installed with pipe with a continuous run of warning tape placed in the

backfill 6-inches above the wiring.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS

A. Tools and Spare Parts:

1. Prior to the Review at completion of construction, provide operating keys, servicing tools,

spare parts, and any other items indicated on the drawings.

B. Other Materials:

1. Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details that are

part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in

these specifications.



3.9 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. Irrigation System Maintenance:

1. Prior to Final Inspection, provide a four (4) hour training session to operating personnel on

proper operation and maintenance of the renovated irrigation system. Training session

should cover aspects of maintaining, operating and repairing the new irrigation system

components.

2. Unless otherwise noted, provide irrigation operation and maintenance information in a 3-

ring binder with table of contents and index sheet. Provide sections that are indexed and

labeled. Provide the following information:

a. Catalog cut sheets for control system, valves, sprinklers, pipe and fittings, wire and

wire connectors, ID tags, shop drawings, and all other irrigation equipment shown or

described on the drawings and within these specifications.

b. Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance manuals.

c. Manufacturer’s Technical Service Bulletins.

d. Manufacturer’s Warranty Documentation.

e. Recommended routine maintenance inspections for weekly, monthly and annual

inspections and recommended actions for the inspections and a recommended

method for recording the findings of the inspections.

f. Predictive schedule for component replacement.

g. Listing of technical support contacts.

3. Operation and maintenance submittal package must be complete prior to being reviewed

by the CO/COR. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review.

B. Control System Programming:

1. Reprogram the stations on the existing control system impacted by the new construction

with a peak season irrigation schedule.

2. Using the precipitation rate results of the Distribution Uniformity tests calculate the peak

season run time for each station.

3. Verify operation of program.

4. Prepare a memorandum documenting the details and assumptions of the programming.

Turn over memorandum to CO/COR. Completion of the memorandum is a prerequisite

for final inspection and operational testing of the irrigation system.

5. Program must be created by manufacturer’s training personnel or an individual with

documented experience in programming the control system. Provide documentation of

programming experience if requested by the CO/COR.



3.10 COLORED CONTROLLER CHARTS:

A. Prepare a map diagram showing location of all valves, sprinklers, pipe and route of the control

wires installed in this project. Identify all valves as to size, station, number and type of

irrigation. “As-built” drawings must be approved before charts are prepared.

B. Include legend listing components used for the controller. Include a separate sprinkler table

listing station number, sprinkler manufacturer and model, zone capacity, and number of

sprinklers on the zone.

C. Provide one colored full sized controller chart for area impacted by this project. Provide two

11”x17” reduced colored charts of the actual “as-built” drawing for the area impacted by this

project. Chart must be readable at the reduced size.

D. Laminate one 11”x17” sized colored chart and place laminated chart at central controller.

3.11 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor is responsible for documenting system installed and all changes to the design

for this project only. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one

complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not

permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded.

B. Record irrigation components, pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work that is

installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference

dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation

system valve, each controller or control unit, each stub-out for future pipe or wiring

connections, and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box.

C. Prior to project completion label each sheet of the project drawings (redlines) as “Record

Drawing" and turn over to CO/COR for delivery to Engineer. Completion of the Record

Drawings is a prerequisite for Final Inspection.

3.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Operate and maintain irrigation system installed in this project for a duration of 30 calendar

days from Final Inspection. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system

components so as to achieve the most desirable application of water as needed.

3.13 CLEANUP

A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and

rubbish. Restore site to normal or original condition.

END OF SECTION


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 1

SECTION 32 90 00 PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. This work consists of furnishing and installing all planting materials required for landscaping. The

landscape contractor shall be required to visit the site prior to submitting Bid Proposal to become

familiar with all conditions affecting the proposed work. The contractor shall identify and review all

underground utility locations prior to commencing work and shall exercise caution when working

close to utilities and shall notify the Owner's Representative of apparent conflicts with

construction and utilities so that adjustment can be planned prior to installation.

B. Agronomic consultation on the appropriateness of all plant materials proposed for installation

during this project must be obtained from the State Agronomist and/or via coordination through

the Owner's Representative prior to project initiation and actual plant installation. In general, all

plant material must be regionally adapted to the climate of the site, be of appropriate mature

dimensions to fit the planting location and be low maintenance species. This requirement will

generally exclude or severely limit the use of rose plants, wild flowers and ground covers.

C. Any exceptions to these species exclusions must be approved by the State Agronomist via

coordination through the Owner's Representative prior to project initiation.

1.2 EQUIPMENT

Maintain all equipment, tools and machinery while on the project in sufficient quantities and

capacity for proper execution of the work.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 10 00, SITE CLEARING, Stripping and Storing Topsoil.

B. Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, Topsoil Testing.

C. Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK.

D. Section 32 84 00, PLANTING IRRIGATION.

E. Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit the following samples for approval before work is started:

Inert Mulch 5 pounds of each type to be used.

Organic Mulch 5 pounds of each type to be used.

All pesticides required such as preemergence

or post emergence herbicides, insecticides,

or fungicides.

EPA approved labeling and MSDS sheet for each such product selected for use.


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 2

B. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery, notarized certificates attesting that

the following materials meet the requirements specified shall be submitted to the Owner's

Representative for approval:

1. Plant Materials (Department of Agriculture certification by State Nursery Inspector from the

state in which the plant material originates declaring material to be free from insects and

disease).

2. Fertilizers.

3. Lime

4. Peat

5. Seed

6. Sod

7. Membranes

8. Asphalt Adhesive


1. Metal edging

2. Antidesiccant

3. Erosion control materials

4. Hydro mulch

5. Pre-emergent herbicide

D. Licenses: Licenses of Arborist shall be submitted (one copy), to the Owner's Representative.

E. Soil laboratory testing results and any soil amendment recommendations from the Contractor.

Submit soil test results for each variable soil type and condition that exists on the construction

site.

1. Organic Soil Amendment and Imported Topsoil: The Contractor shall provide a 5 pound

representative sample from each proposed source for testing, analysis, and approval.

Contractor shall deliver samples to testing laboratories and shall have the testing report sent

directly to the Owner's Representative. Testing reports shall include the following tests and

recommendations.

a. Mechanical gradation (sieve analysis) and chemical (pH soluble salts) shall be performed

by public extension service agency or a certified private testing laboratory in accordance

with the current standards of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. A

hydrometer shall be used to determine percent of clay and silt.

b. Percent of organics shall be determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried samples.

Test samples shall be oven-dried to a constant weight at a temperature of 110 °C, plus or

minus 5°C.

c. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium Nitrogen,

Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Aluminum, Soluble Salts, and acidity (pH).


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 3

d. Tests, as specified, for gradation, organics, soil chemistry and pH shall be performed by

a testing laboratory retained by the Department of Veterans Affairs as described in

Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

e. Soil analysis tests shall show recommendations for soil additives to correct soils

deficiencies as necessary, and for fertilizing and liming applications to support successful

turfgrass growth.

f. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the current standards of the Association

of Official Agricultural Chemists.

2. Amended soil (in place): Following the incorporation of amendments and additives, the

Contractor shall provide a minimum of six (6)samples per forty thousand (40,0000) square

feet, six inch (6”) depth by three inch (3”) diameter core samples of amended soil taken from

the site for testing, analysis, and approval. The location of each sample shall be as directed

by the Owner's Representative from areas designated to receive turfgrass or be established

to turfgrass on the Contract Drawings. No seeding or hydroseeding operations shall occur

until acceptance of the amended soil samples has been obtained. Contractor shall deliver

samples to testing laboratories and shall have the testing report sent directly to the Owner's

Representative. Tests shall be as directed in paragraph 1.4 E.1.d. of this Section.

3. Seed: Submit a manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance to the Specifications with each

shipment of each type of seed. These certificates shall include the guaranteed percentages

of purity, weed content and germination of the seed, and also the net weight and date of

shipment. No seed may be sown until the Contractor has submitted the certificates.

4. Fertilizer: Submit four (4) certificates of analysis for each type of fertilizer.

5. Hydro Mulching: Prior to the start of hydro mulching, submit a certified statement for

approval as to the number of pounds of materials to be used per gallon of water.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Delivery:

1. Notify the Owner's Representative of the delivery schedule in advance so the plant material

may be inspected upon arrival at the job site. Remove unacceptable plant material from the

job site immediately.

2. Protect plants during delivery to prevent damage to root balls or desiccation of leaves.

Protect trees during transport by tying in the branches and covering all exposed branches.

3. The use of equipment such as "tree spades" is permitted provided the plant balls are sized in

accordance with ANSI Z60.1 and tops are protected from damage.

4. Deliver fertilizer and lime to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing the

manufacturer's warranted chemical analysis, name, trade name or trademark, and in

conformance to state and federal law. In lieu of containers, fertilizer and lime may be


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 4

furnished in bulk and a certificate indicating the above information shall accompany each

delivery.

5. During delivery: Protect sod from drying out and seed from contamination.

B. Storage:

1. Sprinkle sod with water and cover with moist burlap, straw or other approved covering, and

protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight. Covering should permit air circulation to

alleviate heat development.

2. Keep seed, lime, and fertilizer in dry storage away from contaminants.

3. Store plants not installed on the day of arrival at the site as follows:

a. Shade and protect plants from the wind when stored outside.

b. Heel in bare root plants.

c. Protect plants stored on the project from drying out at all times by covering the balls or

roots with moist sawdust, wood chips, shredded bark, peat moss, or other similar

mulching material.

d. Keep plants, including those in containers, in a moist condition until planted, by watering

with fine mist spray.

1.6 PLANTING AND TURFGRASS INSTALLATION SEASONS AND CONDITIONS

A. Perform landscape planting operations within the following dates, but not before irrigation system

installed, tested, and approved.

1. Spring Planting: March 1st to June 30

th.

2. Fall Planting: September 1st to November 15

th.

B. Perform turfgrass installation operations within the following dates, but not before irrigation

system installed, tested, and approved.

1. Spring Planting: April 1st to May 15

th.

2. Fall Planting: September 1st to October 15

th.

C. No work shall be done when the ground is frozen, snow covered, too wet or in an otherwise

unsuitable condition for planting. Special conditions may exist that warrants a variance in the

specified planting dates or conditions. Submit a written request to the Owner's Representative

stating the special conditions and proposal variance for approval.

1.7 LANDSCAPE PLANT AND TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

A. The Establishment Period for landscape plants and turfgrass shall begin immediately after

installation, with the approval of the Owner's Representative and continue for a period of time

during the growing season sufficiently long (optimally a minimum of 3 months) for the turfgrass

and landscape plant materials to achieve an establishment condition and appearance satisfactory

to the State Agronomist and NCA. These conditions and appearance are described as follows:

Turfgrass shall have obtained a minimum of 98% surface cover that is generally weed-free and

Landscape Plant Materials shall be fully rooted, actively growing and healthy and planting beds


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 5

generally weed-free. The contractor shall be responsible for the health and maintenance of plants

and turfgrass during the establishment period. Plants and turfgrass will not be accepted until after

completion of an acceptable establishment period. During the Landscape Plant and TurfGRASS

Establishment Period the Contractor shall:

1. Water all plants and turfgrass to maintain a moist soil surface at all times until the plants and

turfgrass are well established. An adequate supply of moisture must also be maintained

within the root zone. Apply water at a moderate rate so as not to displace the mulch, create

any water ponding or runoff from the soil supporting the plants and turfgrass. The actual

quantity of applied water required to achieve and maintain these conditions is best

determined on site by the State Agronomist in consultation with the Owner's Representative.

2. Prune plants and replace mulch as required.

3. Replace and restore stakes, guy straps, and eroded plant saucers as required.

4. In plant beds and saucers, remove grass, weeds, and other undesired vegetation, including

the root growth, before they reach a height of 3 inches. After all unwanted vegetation has

been removed and proper mulch quantities have been placed/restored, treat all mulched

areas with pre-emergence granular ornamental herbicide containing 2.0% trifluralin and 0.5%

isoxaben. Apply at 200 lb per acre prior to both early spring and early fall weed seed

germination.

5. Spray with approved insecticides and fungicides to control pests and ensure plant survival in

a healthy growing condition, as directed by the Owner's Representative in coordination with

the State Agronomist.

6. Provide the following during turfgrass establishment:

a. Eradicate all weeds. Water, fertilize, overseed, and perform any other operation

necessary to promote the growth of turfgrass.

b. Mow the turfgrasses as often as necessary to maintain the specified mowing height for

each type of turfgrass prior to final acceptance. Begin mowing when cool season

turfgrass is 4 inches high. For warm season turfgrasses mow at heights as appropriate

for species and cultivar as directed by the Owner's Representative in consultation with

the State Agronomist. Final mowing height is 3.0 inches for cool season turfgrasses and

as appropriate for warm season turfgrasses and mow as often as necessary to maintain

the proper height while never removing more than 1/3 of the total height of grass leaves

in a single mowing. Mow any portion of the newly developing turfgrass stand that requires

mowing without waiting for other areas of slowly developing seedlings to catch-up.

7. Replace dead, missing or defective plant material during the establishment period and an

active growing season. Immediately replace each plant with one of the same size and

species.

8. Replant any areas void of turfgrass during an active growing season only.


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 6

a. Sod shall be evaluated for species and health thirty (30) days after laying the last piece of

sod and reevaluated each 15 days during the establishment period. A satisfactory stand

of grass plants from the sod operation shall be living sod uniform in color and leaf texture.

Bare spots shall be a maximum two (2) square inches. Joints between sod pieces shall

be tight and free from weeds and other undesirable growth.

b. Seeding shall be evaluated for species and health thirty (30) days after final planting and

reevaluated each 15 days during the establishment period. A satisfactory stand of grass

plants from the seeding operation shall be 98% coverage uniform in color and leaf

texture. Bare spots shall be a maximum of one-half (0.5) square foot. Unsatisfactory

areas shall be reseeded within seven (7) days during an active growing season.

9. Complete remedial measures directed by the Owner's Representative in consultation with the

State Agronomist to ensure plant and turfgrass survival.

10. Repair damage caused while making plant or turfgrass replacements.

1.8 LANDSCAPE PLANT AND TURFGRASS ACCEPTANCE.

A. Landscape plant and turfgrass acceptance will occur after completion of the LANDSCAPE

PLANT AND TURFGRASS ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD. The Contractor shall have completed,

located, and installed all plants and turfgrass according to the plans and specifications. All plants

and turfgrass are expected to be living and in a healthy condition at the time of inspection and

acceptance. The Contractor shall make a written request two weeks prior to final inspection of

the landscape plants and turfgrass. Upon inspection when work is found to not meet the

specifications, the PLANT AND TURFGRASS ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD shall be extended at

no additional cost to the Government until work has been satisfactorily completed, inspected and

accepted.

B. Criteria for acceptance of landscape plants.

1. Planter beds and earth mound water basins are properly mulched and free of weeds.

2. Tree support stakes, guys, and turnbuckles are in good condition.

3. Total plants on site as required by specifications and required number of replacements have

been installed.

4. Remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure plant material survival and

promote healthy growth have been completed.

C. Criteria for acceptance of turfgrass shall be as follows:

1. A satisfactory stand of grass plants from the sod operation shall be living sod uniform in color

and leaf texture and well rooted into the soil below so that gentle pulling of the turfgrass

leaves by hand does not dislodge the sod. Bare spots shall be a maximum two (2) square

inches. Joints between sod pieces shall be tight and free from weeds and other undesirable

growth.


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 7

2. A satisfactory stand of turfgrass plants from the seeding operation shall be 98% coverage

uniform in color and leaf texture. Bare spots shall be a maximum of one-half (0.5) square

foot.

1.9 PLANT AND TURFGRASS WARRANTY

1. A One Year Plant and Turfgrass Warranty will begin on the date that the Government accepts

the plants and turfgrass but not before the end of the Landscape Plant and Turfgrass

Establishment Period.

2. The Contractor will replace any dead plant material and any areas void of turfgrass

immediately during the warranty period and during an active growing season. A one year

warranty for the plants and turfgrass that are replaced will begin on the day the replacement

work is completed and accepted.

3. Replacement of relocated plants, that the Contractor did not supply, is not required unless

they die from improper handling and care during transplanting. Loss through Contractor

improper handling, care, or negligence requires replacement in kind and size.

4. The State will reinspect all replacement plants and turfgrass at the end of the One Year

Warranty. The Contractor will replace any dead, missing, or defective plant material and

turfgrass immediately and during an active growing season. The Warranty will end on the

date of this inspection provided the Contractor has complied with the work required by this

specification.

5. The Contractor shall remove stakes, guy straps and any required tree wrappings from plants

having been installed for one year, unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative

in consultation with the State Agronomist.


A. NCA Handbook 3420 – Turfgrass Maintenance in VA National Cemeteries re-certified 2011. The

Agronomic and Horticultural practices specified in this handbook shall serve as the contractor’s

official reference guide to all establishment and preliminary maintenance practices employed

during this construction project.

B. The publications listed below, form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:

ANSI Z60.1-04 ........................... Nursery Stock

ANSI Z133.1-06 ......................... Tree Care Operations-Pruning, Trimming, Repairing,

Maintaining, and Removing Trees and Cutting Brush- Safety

Requirements

D. Hortus Third, most current edition. A Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the U.S. and

Canada.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 8

C136-06 ..................................... Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

C516-08 ..................................... Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation

C549-06 ..................................... Perlite Loose Fill Insulation

D977-05 ..................................... Emulsified Asphalt (AASTHO M140)

D1557-09 ................................... Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction of Soil

D2028-97 (Rev. 2004)................ Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-curing Type)

D2103-08 ................................... Polyethylene Film and Sheeting

D5851 (Rev 2006) ...................... Planning and Implementing a Water Monitoring Program

F. Turfgrass Producers International:Turfgrass Sodding.

G. U. S. Department of Agriculture Federal Seed Act.

Amended July 2011 ................... Rules and Regulations

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

All plant and turfgrass material will conform to the varieties specified or shown in the plant list and

be true to botanical name as listed in Hortus Third.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENT

A. All areas to receive turfgrass seeding, sodding or sprigging may require an organic soil

amendment to increase organic content and water retention as well as enhance turfgrass growth.

If native topsoil has an organic matter content below 4% it should be amended in-place after

grading activities are completed to effectively create a satisfactory topsoil horizon.

B. Organic soil amendment will be spread and incorporated into the finished subgrade at the depths

indicated on the Contract Drawings in order to raise the organic content of the soil to a minimum

of four percent (4%) and a maximum of six percent (6%). Contractor will allow for additional

depth of the organic soil amendment to bring all grades to the required finished grades as per the

grading plans.

1. Organic Soil Amendment shall be dark brown or black in color and capable of enhancing

plant growth. Ninety-eight percent (98%) of the material should pass a one inch (1”) screen.

There shall be no admixture of refuse (i.e. noticeable inert contamination) or other materials

toxic to plant growth.

2. Acceptable types of Organic Soil Amendments include peat moss, humus or peat, well rotted

manure, various mature composts, and commercially available combinations thereof.

Acceptable compost may be derived from natural organic sources such as food or animal

residuals, yard trimmings, or biosolids. Organic Soil Amendment shall be free of all woody

fibers, seeds, and leaf structures, plastic and other petroleum products, and free of toxic and

non-organic matter. Unacceptable sole sources of organic matter include untreated sludge

from wastewater treatment plants, fresh manure, sawdust, and immature composts.


PLANTING 32 90 00 - 9

3. Organic Soil Amendment shall conform to the following minimum material requirements:

Test Parameter Acceptable Ranges

Organic Matter 27% to 80%

pH 5.5-8.5

Ash 20-65%

Nitrogen 0.4%-3.5%

Phosphorus 0.2%-1.5%

Potassium 0.4%-1.5%

C:N Ratio 25-30:1

CEC 50-150 meq/100 g

Heavy Metals

Less than max. limits

established by EPA 503

Inert Contents < 1% by weight

Water-Holding Capacity 150-200%

Pathogen/Weed Seed Destruction Proof of EPA minimum

Heating requirements

4. Organic content to be determined by the loss of ignition of oven-dried samples. Test samples

shall be oven-dried to a constant weight at a temperature of 110 °C, plus or minus 5°C.

5. Any topsoil stripped and stockpiled on the site may be used provided that, after testing and

addition of necessary additives, it meets the above specification. The Contractor shall

provide additional Organic Soil Amendment as required to complete the required work.

6. All Organic Soil Amendment proposed for use shall be tested for conformance to the

specifications and results provided to the Owner's Representative/State Agronomist.

2.3 PLANTS

A. Plants shall be in accordance with ANSI Z60.1, except as otherwise stated in the specifications or

shown on the plans. Where the drawings or specifications are in conflict with ANSI Z60.1, the

drawings and specification shall prevail.

B. Provide well-branched and formed planting stock, sound, vigorous, and free from disease,

sunscald, windburn, abrasion, harmful insects or insect eggs with healthy, normal, and unbroken

root systems. Provide trees, deciduous and evergreen, that are single trunked with a single

leader, unless otherwise indicated, display no weak crotches. Provide symmetrically developed

deciduous trees and shrubs of uniform habit of growth, with straight boles or stems and free from

objectionable disfigurements, and evergreen trees and shrubs with well developed symmetrical

tops with typical spread of branches for each particular species or variety. Provide ground cover

and vine plants with the number and length of runners for the size specified, and the proper age

for the grade of plants specified. Provide vines and ground cover plants well established in


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 10

removable containers, integral containers, or formed homogeneous soil sections. Plants shall

have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project.

C. The minimum acceptable sizes of all plants, measured before pruning with branches in normal

position, shall conform to the measurements designated. Plants larger in size than specified may

be used with the approval of the Owner's Representative, with no change in the contract price.

When larger plants are used, increase the ball of earth or spread of roots in accordance with

ANSI Z60.1.

D. Provide nursery grown, Grade 1, plant material conforming to the requirements and

recommendations of ANSI Z60.1. Dig and prepare plants for shipment in a manner that will not

cause damage to branches, shape, and future development after planting. Never pick-up or move

tree species by grasping the trunk. Trees must be moved by lifting the root ball, box or container.

E. Balled and burlapped (B&B) plant ball sizes and ratios will conform to ANSI Z60.1, consisting of

firm, natural balls of soil wrapped firmly with burlap or strong cloth and tied.

F. Bare-root (BR) plants shall have the root system substantially intact, but with the earth carefully

removed. Cover roots with a thick coating of mud by "puddling" after the plants are dug.

G. Container grown plants shall have sufficient root growth to hold the earth intact when removed

from containers, but shall not be root bound.

H. Make substitutions only when a plant (or its alternates as specified) is not obtainable and the

Owner's Representative in consultation with the State Agronomist authorizes a change order

providing for use of the nearest equivalent obtainable size or variety of plant having the same

essential characteristics with an equitable adjustment of the contract price.

I. When existing plants are to be relocated, ball sizes shall conform to requirements for collected

plants in ANSI Z60.1, and plants shall be dug, handled, and replanted in accordance with

applicable sections of these specifications.

2.4 LABELS

Each plant, or group and bundles or containers of the same species, variety, and size of plant,

shall be legibly tagged with a durable, waterproof and weather-resistant label indicating the

correct plant name and size specified in the plant list. Labels shall be securely attached and not

be removed.

2.5 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be a well-graded soil of good uniform quality. It shall be a natural, friable soil

representative of productive soils in the vicinity. Topsoil shall be free of admixture of subsoil,

foreign matter, objects larger than one inch in any dimension, toxic substances, weeds and any

material or substances that may be harmful to plant growth and shall have a pH value of not less

than 6.0 nor more than 7.0, and should be best suited to the region, climate and plant material

specific to the project.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 11

B. Obtain material from stockpiles established under Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING,

subparagraph, Stripping Topsoil that meet the general requirements as stated above. Amend

topsoil not meeting the pH range specified by the addition of pH Adjusters.

C. If sufficient topsoil is not available on the site to meet the depth as specified herein, the

Contractor shall furnish additional topsoil. At least 10 days prior to topsoil delivery, notify the

Owner's Representative of the source(s) from which topsoil is to be furnished. Obtain topsoil from

well drained areas. Additional topsoil shall meet the general requirements as stated above and

comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY

SERVICES. Amend topsoil not meeting the pH range specified by the addition of pH adjusters.

2.6 LIME

Lime shall be agricultural limestone containing not less than 90 percent calcium and magnesium

carbonates. Lime must be ground to such fineness that not less than 90% must pass No. 8 mesh

and not less than 25% must pass No. 100 mesh. Moisture is not to exceed 10%.

2.7 SOIL CONDITIONERS

A. Peat shall be a natural product of sphagnum moss peat, peat moss, or hypnum moss derived

from a fresh-water site conforming to Fed. Spec. Q-P-166, except as otherwise specified. Peat

shall be shredded and granulated to pass through a 1/2 inch mesh screen and conditioned in

storage piles for at least six months after excavation.

B. Coarse Sand: Coarse concrete sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, shall be clean, sharp, and free

of limestone, shale and slate particles and of toxic materials.

C. Perlite shall conform to ASTM C549.

D. Vermiculite shall be horticultural grade and free of any toxic materials and conform to ASTM

C516.

E. Pine Bark shall be horticultural-grade milled pine bark, with 80 percent of the material by volume

sized between .004in. and .59in.

1. Pine bark shall be aged sufficiently to break down all woody material. Pine bark shall be

screened

2. pH shall range between 4.0 and 7.0.

3. Submit manufacturer’s literature for approval.

F. Organic Matter shall be commercially prepared compost, composted sufficiently to be free of all

woody fibers, seeds, and leaf structures, and free of toxic and nonorganic matter.

2.8 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE

The planting soil mixture shall be composed of 3 parts topsoil, and 1 part peat moss.

2.9 PLANT FERTILIZERS

A. Provide plant fertilizer that is commercial grade and uniform in composition and conforms to

applicable state and federal regulations.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 12

B. For new plant material, provide a uniform free-flowing granular complete analysis fertilizer

containing a minimum of 10% by weight of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash with a minimum

of 50% of the nitrogen from a controlled release source such as sulfur coated urea.

C. For existing trees, provide a uniform free-flowing granular fertilizer bearing the manufacturer's

warranted statement of analysis. Granular fertilizer shall contain a minimum percentage by weight

of 10% nitrogen (of which 50 percent shall be from a controlled release source such as sulfur

coated urea.), 10% available phosphoric acid, and 10% potash.

2.10 TURFGRASS FERTILIZER

Provide turfgrass fertilizer that is commercial grade, free flowing, uniform in composition, and

conforms to applicable state and federal regulations. Granular fertilizer shall bear the

manufacturer's warranted statement of analysis. Granular fertilizer shall contain a minimum

percentage by weight of 20% nitrogen (of which 50 percent shall be from a controlled release

source such as sulfur coated urea), 5% available phosphoric acid, and 15% potash. Liquid starter

fertilizer for use in the hydro mulch slurry will be commercial type with 50 percent of the nitrogen

from a controlled release source.

2.11 MULCH

A. Mulch shall be free from deleterious materials and shall be stored as to prevent inclusion of

foreign material.

B. Inert mulch materials shall be riverbank stone, granite chips, marble chips, volcanic rock or

similar and shall range in size from one inch to 2-1/2 inches in accordance with ASTM C 136.

C. Organic mulch materials shall be wood based products such as chips, nuggets or shredded

hardwood:

1. Straw for turfgrass seed bed mulch shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice that

are free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable material. Straw shall be in an air-

dry condition and suitable for placing with blower equipment.

2. Wood cellulose fiber mulch for use with hydraulic application (Hydro mulch) with fertilizer

shall consist of specially prepared wood cellulose fiber, processed to contain no growth or

germination-inhibiting factors, and dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of

the application of materials. Do not apply any turfgrass seed in this type mixture. On an air-

dry weight basis, the wood cellulose fiber shall contain a maximum of 12 percent moisture,

plus or minus three percent at the time of manufacture. The pH range shall be from 3.5 to

5.0. The wood cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that:

a. After addition and agitation in slurry tanks with fertilizers, water, and other approved

additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a

homogenous slurry.

b. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material will form a blotter like cover.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 13

c. The cover will allow the absorption of moisture and allow rainfall or applied water to

percolate to the underlying soil.

2.12 ASPHALT ADHESIVE

Asphalt adhesive for application with straw mulch shall be liquid asphalt conforming to ASTM

D2028, designation RC-70, or emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D977, Grade RS-1.

2.13 EROSION CONTROL

A. Refer to Section 31 25 13 EROSION CONTROLS.

2.14 STAKES AND GUYING STRAPS

A. Provide stakes for tree support as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Stakes shall be a

minimum 3 inches in diameter, 8 feet long and pointed at one end.

B. Hose chafing guards shall be new or used 2-ply reinforced rubber or plastic hose of all the same

color on the project.

C. Guying straps shall be a fabric material designed specifically to guy newly planted trees. No wire

should ever be used for this purpose.

D. Turnbuckles shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated and have a 3 inch minimum lengthwise

opening fitted with screw eyes.

2.15 EDGING

As a general requirement no artificial or constructed product shall be used to edge landscape

beds that are bordered by turfgrass. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved by the

Owner's Representative after consultation with both the State Agronomist. Properly mulched

beds shall be edged by the newly established turfgrass plantings that border and/or surround

them.

2.16 WATER

A. Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life.

B. Refer to Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

2.17 ANTIDESICCANT

Antidesiccant shall be an emulsion specifically manufactured for agricultural use that will provide

a protective film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration.

2.18 SEED

A. Seed shall be state-certified seed of the latest season's crop and shall be delivered in original

sealed packages bearing the producer's warranted analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity,

germination, weed seed content, and inert material. Seed shall be labeled in conformance with U.

S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations under the Federal Seed Act and applicable

state seed laws. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged will not be acceptable.

Onsite seed mixing shall be done only in the presence of the Owner's Representative. All

turfgrass seeding operations shall be done separately and prior to the application of any mulch

material.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 14

B. Minimum Acceptable Seed Quality standards for all turfgrass seed utilized are as follows: Purity

95%, Germination 85%, Weed Seed Content less than 0.5%, Noxious Weeds 0.0%, Inert Material

less than 3%, Germination Test Date no older than 6 months.

C. All turfgrass seed mixtures, or sod composition shall conform to the species and cultivar

requirements detailed here:

1. Seed Mix: Team-Mates Mix (Lesco Inc.) comprised of 80% of three tall fescues (Cimarron,

Trailblazer, Trailblazer II, Lancer or Wrangler) and 20% Commander Perennial Rye.

2. Seeding Rate: 4 lb/1,000 sq. ft.

Any deviation from these turfgrass species requirements must be approved in writing by the

Owner’s Representative.

2.19 SOD

Sod shall be nursery grown, certified sod as classified in the TPI Guideline Specifications to

Turfgrass Sodding. Sod must also conform to the turfgrass species limitations as outlined in

seeding mixtures in 2.20C above in this spec.

2.20 HERBICIDES AND OTHER PESTICIDES

All herbicides and other pesticides shall be properly labeled and registered with the U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency. Keep all pesticides in the original labeled containers indicating

the analysis and method of use.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 LAYOUT

Stake plant material locations and bed outlines on project site for approval by the Owner's

Representative before any plant pits or beds are dug. The Owner's Representative may approve

adjustments to plant material locations to meet field conditions.

3.2 FINE GRADING AND ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENT INCORPORATION

A. Contractor shall obtain Owner's Representative’s written approval of previously completed rough

grading work prior to commencing organic soil amendment incorporation work.

B. Immediately prior to dumping and spreading the approved organic soil amendment, the subgrade

shall be cleaned of all stones greater than two inches (2”) and all debris or rubbish. Such

material shall be removed from the site. Prior to spreading of the organic soil amendment,

subgrades which are too compact to drain water and too compact based upon compaction tests

shall be ripped with a claw one foot (1’) deep, pulled by a bulldozer two feet (2’) on center, both

directions. Contractor shall then regrade surface.

C. Organic soil amendment material shall be placed and uniformly spread over approved finish sub-

grades to a depth sufficiently greater than the specified depth so that after natural settlement and

light rolling, the specified minimum compacted depth will have been provided and the completed

work will conform to the lines, grades and elevations indicated. Incorporate organic soil

amendment by disc harrowing, rototilling or other means in a uniform manner. The depth of


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 15

incorporation shall be based upon the organic content of the tested and approved organic soil

amendment, so as to produce a finished soil with an organic matter content of between four (4)

and six percent (6%). Supply additional organic soil amendment material, after in-place testing

and approval (see paragraph 1.4. E.1d), as may be needed to give the required organic matter

content and finished grades under the Contract without additional cost to the Government.

D. Disturbed areas outside the limit of work shall be spread with four inch (4”) minimum depth of

organic soil amendment material to the finished grade.

E. No subsoil or organic soil amendment material shall be handled in any way if it is in a wet or

frozen condition.

F. Sufficient grade stakes shall be set for checking the finished grades. Stakes must be set in the

bottom of swales and at the top of slopes. Connect contours and spot elevations with an even

slope.

G. After organic soil amendment material has been incorporated into the subsoil, it shall be carefully

prepared by scarifying or harrowing and hand raking. Remove all large stiff clods, lumps, brush,

roots, stumps, litter and other foreign matter. Remove all stones over one and one half inch (1-

1/2”) diameter from the amended soil bed. The amended soil shall also be free of smaller stones

in excessive quantities as determined by the Owner's Representative.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTING

A. The whole surface shall then be compacted with a roller or other suitable means to achieve a

maximum dry density of 88 to 90 percent in accordance with compaction standards of ASTM

D1557 Method D. During the compaction process, all depressions caused by settlement or

rolling shall be filled with additional organic soil amendment and the surface shall be regraded

and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish corresponding to the required grades. The

acceptable condition of the finished soil grade for all areas that are to be established to turfgrass

is best described as “fine textured and firm”. The test for satisfactory firmness requires that

the surface soil not be fluffy or powdery and will support the weight of an average adult

person without creating a visible depression.

B. Prior to excavating for plant pits and bed, verify the location of any underground utilities. Damage

to utility lines will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Where lawns have been established

prior to planting operation, cover the surrounding turfgrass before excavations are made in a

manner that will protect turfgrass areas. Barricade existing trees, shrubbery, and beds that are to

be preserved in a manner that will effectively protect them during the project construction.

C. Remove rocks and other underground obstructions to a depth necessary to permit proper planting

according to plans and specifications. Where underground utilities, construction, or solid rock

ledges are encountered, the Owner's Representative may select other locations for plant

material.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 16

D. Dig plant pits by any approved method so that they have vertical sides and flat bottoms. When

pits are dug with an auger and the sides of the pits become glazed, scarify the glazed surface.

E. Where ground cover and planting beds occur in existing turfgrass areas, remove turfgrass to a

depth that will ensure the removal of the entire root system, with additional bed preparation as

specified in the next paragraph.

F. Where existing soil is to be used in place, till new ground cover and plant beds to a depth of 4

inches. Spread peat soil amendment uniformly over the bed to depth of 2 inches and thoroughly

incorporate it into the existing soil to a depth of 4 inches using a roto-tiller or similar type of

equipment to obtain a uniform and well pulverized soil mix. Where existing soil is compacted

(former roadways, parking lots, etc.) till the soil down to a depth necessary to support the growth

of new planting. During tillage operations, remove all sticks, stones, roots, and other

objectionable materials. Bring plant beds to a smooth and even surface conforming to established

grades.

G. In areas of new grading where existing soil is being replaced for the construction of new ground

cover and plant beds, remove four inches (4”) of existing soil and replace with topsoil. Plant beds

shall be brought to a smooth and even surface conforming to established grades. Till two inches

(2”) of peat soil amendment into the topsoil as specified.

H. Using topsoil, form earth saucers or water basins for watering around plants. Basins to be two

inches (2”) high for shrubs and four inches (4”) high for trees.

I. Treat plant saucers, shrub, and ground cover bed areas, after mulching, with preemergence

granular ornamental herbicide containing 2.0% trifluralin and 0.5% isoxaben. Apply at 200 lb per

acre prior to both early spring and early fall weed seed germination. Plant ground cover in areas

to receive erosion control material through that material after material is in place.

3.4 SETTING PLANTS

A. Handle balled and burlapped and container-grown plants only by the ball or container. Remove

container-grown plants in such a way to prevent damage to plants or root system. Set plants

plumb and hold in position until sufficient soil has been firmly placed around the roots or ball. Set

plants so that the root crown is 1” higher than the surrounding grade. Plant ground cover plants

after the mulch is in place. Avoid contaminating the mulch with the planting soil.

B. Backfill balled and burlapped and container-grown plants with the native soil removed from the

planting hole to approximately half the depth of the ball and then tamp and water. It is desirable to

use 100% percent native soil to backfill the hole, but do not use unsuitable fill containing clay,

rock or other unsuitable material. For balled and burlapped plants, carefully fold back the top half

of the burlap and remove tying materials. Any wire caging or similar material, must be completely

removed. Where plastic wrap or treated burlap is used in lieu of burlap, completely remove these

materials before backfilling. Tamp and water remainder of backfill native soil; then form earth

saucers or water basins around isolated plants with topsoil.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 17

C. Plant bare-root stock arranging the roots in a natural position. Form a hill or mound in the center

of the planting hole to allow the plant to sit at the proper depth. The roots are then spread out,

over, and down the “hill” in a natural position. The “hill” should be firm to avoid settlement of the

entire plant. Remove damaged roots with a clean cut. Carefully work native soil in among the

roots. Tamp and water the remainder of native soil; then form earth saucers or water basins

around isolated plants with topsoil.

3.5 STAKING AND GUYING

A. Stake and guy plants as shown on the drawings and as specified.

B. Drive stakes vertically into the ground to a depth of 2-1/2 to 3 feet in such a manner as not to

injure the ball or roots, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. Remove stakes and guy straps after one year.

3.6 EDGING PLANT BEDS

A. Uniformly edge beds using a sharp tool to provide a clear cut division line between the planted

area and the adjacent turfgrass. Do not use any type of manufactured edging material. The

properly mowed and maintained turfgrass will serve as edging for all landscape beds.

3.7 MULCHING PLANTS

A. Mulch within 48 hours after planting and apply a preemergence granular ornamental herbicide

containing 2.0% trifluralin and 0.5% isoxaben. Apply at 200 lb per acre prior to both early spring

and early fall weed seed germination. Do not mulch in ground cover areas that shall have organic

material placed before planting.

B. Placing Organic Material: Spread a mulch of wood based origin to a uniform minimum thickness

of 2-3 inches.

C. Keep mulch out of the crowns of shrubs and off buildings, sidewalks, light standards, and other

structures.

3.8 PRUNING

A. Prune new plant material and indicated existing plant material in the following manner: Remove

dead, broken and crossing branches. Make cuts with sharp instruments as close as possible to

the branch collar. Do not make flush cuts. Do not make "Headback" cuts at right angles to line of

growth. Do not pole trees or remove the leader. Remove trimmings from the site. Do not use any

type of wound dressing on pruning cuts.

B. Existing trees to be pruned are shown on the drawings. Perform tree pruning and cavity work by a

licensed arborist an arborist in accordance with ANSI Z 133.1. Remove dead wood 1/2 inch or

more in diameter, branches interfering with or hindering the healthy growth of the trees, and

diseased branches with a clean cut made flush with the branch collar. Cut back or remove

branches as necessary to give the trees proper shape and balance. In removing large limbs,

make the initial cut on the underside at a safe distance from the trunk or lateral, to prevent ripping

of bark. Ensure branches and trimmings do not endanger traffic or cause damage to property


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 18

during removal. Section large branches or limbs that cannot be removed in one piece without

endangering traffic or property. Lower sections by ropes. Repair any damage resulting from the

Contractor's negligence during pruning. Workmen are not permitted to climb trees with climbing

spurs. To promote proper healing, cut off flush with the branch collar stubs or limbs that have

resulted from improper cuts or broken as a result of former pruning. Remove girdling roots.

3.9 FERTILIZATION OF EXISTING TREES

Apply fertilizer to existing trees shown on the drawings at the rate of 2 pounds per inch caliper.

Apply in 4 inch to 8 inch deep holes 1-1/2 to 2 inches in diameter, made by an earth auger,

distributed evenly at not more than 2 feet on center throughout the outer half of the branch spread

zone of each tree. Fertilize to within 4 inches of the surrounding grade. Use topsoil to bring the

surface up to the surrounding grade. When using fertilizer in packet, tablet, or wedge form, apply

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.10 TILLAGE FOR TURFGRASS AREAS

Thoroughly till the soil to a depth of at least 6 inches by scarifying, disking, harrowing, or other

approved methods. This is particularly important in areas where heavy equipment has been used.

Remove all debris and stones larger than one inch remaining on the surface after tillage in

preparation for finish grading. To minimize erosion, do not till areas of 3:1 slope ratio or greater.

Scarify these areas to a two inch depth and remove debris and stones.

3.11 FINISH GRADING

After tilling the soil for bonding of topsoil with the subsoil, spread the topsoil evenly to a minimum

depth of 6 inches. Incorporate topsoil at least 2 to 3 inches into the subsoil to avoid soil layering.

Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Correct irregularities in finished

surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or

pedestrian traffic. Complete lawn work only after areas are brought to finished grade.

3.12 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER AND LIME FOR TURFGRASS AREAS

A. Apply turfgrass fertilizer at a rate that will deliver 1 pound of nitrogen per 1000 sq.ft. In addition,

adjust soil acidity as recommended by soil test results and add any soil conditioners as specified

herein for suitable topsoil under PART 2, Paragraph 2.2AandB, and 2.5 TOPSOIL.

B. Spread lime as recommended by the soil test results.

C. Incorporate lime into the soil to a depth of at least 4 inches as part of the finish grading operation.

Starter fertilizer should be lightly mixed with the top ½ inch of soil. Immediately restore the soil to

an even condition before any seeding or sod placement.

3.13 MECHANICAL SEEDING

A. Broadcast seed by approved application equipment at the rate as outlined in section 2.20C in this

spec above. All turfgrass seed shall be planted prior to the application of any mulch material. The

seed shall be uniformly distributed in a minimum of 2 directions at right angles to each other.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 19

Drag the seeded area to inter-mingle the seed and surface soil by means of spike-tooth harrow,

cultipacker, or other approved device.

B. Immediately after dragging, firm the entire area with a roller not exceeding 150 pounds per foot of

roller width.

C. Immediately after preparing the seeded area, evenly spread an organic mulch of straw by hand or

by approved mechanical blowers at the rate of 2 tons per acre. Application shall allow some

sunlight to penetrate and air to circulate but also reduce soil and seed erosion and conserve soil

moisture. Anchor mulch by a mulch tiller, asphalt emulsion, twine, or netting. When asphalt

emulsion is used, apply either simultaneously or in a separate application. Take precautionary

measures to prevent asphalt materials from marking or defacing structures, pavements, utilities,

or plantings.

3.14 HYDRO-MULCHING

When hydro-mulching, mix the slow release starter fertilizer, approved wood cellulose mulch

material in the required amount of water to produce a homogenous slurry and then uniformly

apply slurry under pressure to deliver the recommended quantity of fertilizer per 1000 sq.ft.

3.15 SODDING

A. Accomplish sodding in accordance with the ASPA Guideline Specifications for sodding. Lay sod

at right angles to slope or the flow of water. On slope areas, start at the bottom of the slope.

B. After completing the sodding operation, blend the edges of the sodded area smoothly into the

surrounding area. All sod should be rolled with a lightweight roller after being laid to eliminate

air spaces between the sod and the firmed soil.

3.16 WATERING

A. Apply water to the turfgrass areas immediately following installation at a rate sufficient to ensure

thorough wetting of the soil to a depth of at least 2 inches. Supervise watering operation to

prevent run-off. Supply all pumps, hoses, pipelines, and sprinkling equipment. Repair all areas

damaged by water operations. Keep soil surface constantly moist, not wet, until turfgrass plants

are well established.

B. Contractor shall deep water all trees twice each week during the Plant Establishment Period,

providing water penetration throughout the root zone to the full depth of the planting pits, as

verified in the field by the Owner's Representative. Watering shall cease at the first hard frost in

the fall and shall resume upon ground thaw in the spring.

3.17 PROTECTION OF TURFGRASS AREAS

Immediately after installation of the turfgrass areas, protect against traffic or other use by erecting

barricades, as required, and placing approved signs at appropriate intervals until final

acceptance.


PLANTING

32 90 00 - 20

3.18 EROSION CONTROL MATERIAL

A. Install and maintain erosion control material meeting the requirements of this specification on the

designated areas as shown and specified. Prepare, fertilize and vegetate the area(s) to be

covered, as specified, before the erosion material is placed. Immediately following the planting

operations lay the material evenly and smoothly and in contact with the soil throughout. Omit the

straw mulch from all seeded areas receiving the erosion control material.

B. Maintenance shall consist of repairs made necessary by erosion, wind, or any other cause.

Maintain, protect, repair, or replace the erosion control material until the Termination of the Plant

and Warranty Period.

3.19 RESTORATION AND CLEAN-UP

Where existing or new turfgrass areas have been damaged or scarred during planting and

construction operations, restore disturbed area to their original condition. Keep at least one paved

pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building clean at all times.

In areas where planting and turfgrass work have been completed, clear the area of all debris,

spoil piles, and containers. Clear all other paved areas when work in adjacent areas are

completed. Remove all debris, rubbish and excess material from the station.

3.20 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

All work and Contractor operations shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 57 19,

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

END OF SECTION


STORM SEWER UTILITIES 33 40 00 - 1

STORM SEWER UTILITIES

33 40 00

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install high density polyethylene (PE) gravity storm sewer pipe and

appurtenances as shown on the Plans and described herein. B. Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and appurtenances as shown on the Plans

and described herein. C. Furnish and install catch basins, manholes, and yard drains, and connect existing pipes to

manholes or catch basins, and connect proposed pipes to existing manholes or catch basins where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

D. Adjust manhole and catch basin tops where shown on the Plans.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D-3034: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D-3212-76: Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. ASTM 1785: Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe. ASTM C-270: Mortar for Unit Masonry. ASTM C-443: Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

B. Delaware Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction, dated August 2001, as amended, hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”:

Section 612: Reinforced Concrete Pipe Section 708: Drainage Inlets and Manholes Section 710: Adjusting and Repairing Drainage Inlets and Manholes Section 812: Portland Cement Concrete

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Materials

1. Store materials to prevent physical damage. 2. Store pipe and fittings off ground to prevent dirt and debris from entering. 3. Store flexible gasket materials and joint primer or adhesive compounds in cool dry place. 4. Keep rubber gaskets clean, away from oil, grease, excessive heat, and out of direct

sunlight. B. Handling of Materials

1. Protect materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage. 2. Do not install out-of-round pipe. 3. Unload pipe to prevent abrasion. 4. Do not drag or push pipe while handling or distributing on project site.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. P.V.C. Pipe and Fittings ASTM D-3034, SDR 26. ASTM 1785, Schedule 40. Joint material: Elastomeric ring rubber gasket, ASTM D-3212. Joint material Primer/Adhesive: As provided or specified by pipe manufacturer. B. High Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

1. All polyethylene pipe shall have a corrugated outer wall and an integrally formed smooth interior. Pipe 12-inches or larger in diameter shall meet AASHTO M294 and DelDOT specifications for Type “S” high density polyethylene pipe. Pipe smaller than 12-inches in diameter shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S.

2. Pipes, couplings, and fittings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M294, modified as follows: Minimum pipe stiffness shall be 35 psi at 5% deflection and 30 psi at 10% deflection, when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2412.

3. Pipe joints shall be water-tight. 4. Pipe shall be “N-12” as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. (ADS), “Sure-

Lok”, as manufactured by Hancor, or approved equal. 5. Corrugated polyethylene pipe underdrains shall have a single corrugated wall with annular

interior and exterior corrugations. Pipe and fittings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M252. Pipe joints shall be by cleated bell, split, internal and snap couplers, and shall be soil tight. Pipe shall be as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems., Hancor, or approved equal.

C. All catch basins and manholes shall be precast or cast-in-place Portland cement concrete

(p.c.c.) and shall conform to Section 708 of the Standard Specifications. Precast manholes shall conform with ASTM C-478, except where noted on the Plan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL INSPECTION

A. The following information shall be clearly marked on each pipe section of P.V.C. pipe:

1. Pipe type and SDR number. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. The PVC cell classification. 4. Name or trademark of manufacturer. 5. The ASTM Specification designation.

B. P.V.C. Fittings shall have the following markings:

1. The ASTM Specification designation. 2. Manufacturer's name or trademark. 3. Nominal size. 4. The material designation.

C. Polyethylene pipe shall be marked with the pipe class, date of manufacture, and the name or

trademark of the manufacturer. E. The Contractor shall carefully examine all pipe and special castings before placing the same

in the trench. Any pieces which are broken or show evidence of cracks or fractures shall be rejected by the Contractor. Such inspection shall carry with it the responsibility on the part of the Contractor for the removal at the Contractor’s own expense of all pipe, special castings,



and appurtenances, incorporated in the work, and which under test are found to be cracked or otherwise defective.

F. Assure that all materials are of the type specified and are not defective. Unmarked pipe or

pipe and materials not meeting Specifications requirements shall be removed from the site as directed by the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fine grade trench bottom so that pipe is supported for its full length. B. Install piping beginning at the low point of the system, true to grades and alignment indicated

on the Plans. Place the bell ends of the pipe facing upstream. C. Do not lay pipe on unsuitable material, in wet trench, or in same trench with another pipe or

utility. D. General Procedure for Joining Pipe

1. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together. 2. Hold pipe securely and in proper alignment when joining. 3. Do not disturb previously made joints. Check completed piping to assure joints are intact.

Insure placement of backfill over pipe is accomplished without disturbing pipe position. 4. Do not allow earth, stones, or other debris to enter pipe or fittings. 5. Method of installing joint materials and joining piping shall be in strict accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Polyethylene pipe shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions

or as directed by the Engineer. Joints for all polyethylene pipe greater shall be water-tight in accordance with ASTM D3212. Gasket shall meet the requirements of ASTM-F477.

3.3 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

A. Bedding and Initial Backfill

1. Bedding and initial backfill shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instruction or, in absence of said instructions, in accordance with the Plans and with Section 31 20 00 EARTHWORK of these Specifications.

2. Install initial backfill material as shown on the Plan details for the type of pipe being used. 3. When required, material shall be placed under the pipe haunch to provide adequate side

support. Material shall be installed for entire trench width and shall be tamped and rodded to insure full contact with pipe at haunch up to the spring line.

4. Little or no tamping of the initial backfill directly over the pipe shall be done. B. Final Backfill

1. Final backfill shall be in accordance with Section 31 20 00 EARTHWORK of these Specifications.

3.4 CATCH BASINS AND MANHOLES

A. Catch basins and manholes shall be installed in accordance with Section 708 of the Standard

Specifications and in accordance with the requirements of the City of Wilmington Department of Public Works.

B. Installation of rubber gaskets for precast catch basins and manholes shall be in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.



C. Frames shall be well bedded in mortar, making a watertight joint. Cover and frame shall have a shop coat of asphaltic pitch and shall have a field coat of similar paint after the frame is set in final position.

D. Adjusting and repairing catch basins and manholes shall be in accordance with Section 710 of

the Standard Specifications.

END OF SECTION


FOUNDATION DRAINAGE 33 46 13 - 1

FOUNDATION DRAINAGE

33 46 13

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies materials and procedures for construction of foundation drainage systems, including installation, backfill, and cleanout extensions, to a point of connection to storm sewer.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK .

B. Materials testing and inspection during construction: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

C. Submittals: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Subdrainage: Foundation drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water from crypt fields and columbaria area.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. B. PE: Polyethylene plastic. C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to storm sewer system, if approved, with the Public Agency responsible for the storm sewer system.

B. Coordinate exterior utility lines and connections to foundation building drain.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Products Criteria: 1. When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are

required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 2. A nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or trademark, including model number,

shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment. In addition, the model



number shall be either cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Agency having jurisdiction over the connection to public storm sewer lines or the requirements for discharge of subsurface drainage.



publications are referred in the text by basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C14-07........................... Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe C33/C33M-11 ................ Concrete Aggregates C443-10......................... Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets C1173-08....................... Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems D448-08......................... Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction D1621-10....................... Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid

Cellular Plastics D2235-04(2011) ............ Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic

Pipe and Fittings D2321-11....................... Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and

Other Gravity-Flow Applications D2751-05....................... Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034-08....................... Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3350-10a..................... Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Material D4491-99a(2009) .......... Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by

Permittivity D4716-08....................... Test Method for Determining the (In-plane) Flow Rate per Unit

Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head

D5926-09....................... Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing Systems

D6707-06 (2011) ........... Circular-Knit Geotextile for Use in Subsurface Drainage Applications

F405-05 ......................... Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings F477-10 ......................... Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe F667—06....................... Larger Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings F2648-10 ....................... 2 to 60 Inch Annular Corrugated Profile Wall Polyethylene (PE)

Pipe and Fittings for Land Drainage Applications

1.9 WARRANTY

The Contractor shall remedy any defect due to faulty material or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom within a period of one year from final acceptance. Further, the Contractor will furnish all manufacturer's and supplier's written guarantees and warranties covering materials and equipment furnished under this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS

A. Standardization of components shall be maximized to reduce spare part requirements.

B. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.

2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational system that conforms to contract requirements.

2.3 UNDERSLAB HEADER

A. PE pipe and fittings per ASTM F2648, ASTM F405, ASTM F667, or ASTM F2678.

B. PVC sewer pipe and fittings per ASTM D3034, with ASTM F477, elastomeric seal gaskets.

2.4 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR VAULTS OR MANHOLES

A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe shall be ASTM D2648, ASTM F405, or ASTM F667, Type CP; corrugated, for

coupled joints. 2. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings shall be ASTM D3034.

2.5 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings shall meet ASTM D2751.

1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2235. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F477.

B. PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3350 or F405.

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034.

1. Gaskets: ASTM F477.

2.6 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts: Cast-iron parts shall conform to ASTM A48. Lid shall be secured, scoriated Highway Loading class. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug.

B. Cleanout PVC Extension shall conform to ASTM D3034. PVC extensions shall have watertight joints and long sweep elbow fittings. PVC cleanout shall have threaded plug and threaded pipe hub.

2.7 DRAINAGE CONDUITS



A. Multi-pipe Drainage Conduits shall be prefabricated geocomposite with interconnected, corrugated, perforated-pipe core molded from HDPE and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 1. Nominal Size shall be 6 inches by approximately 1-1/4 inches thick.

a. Minimum In-Plane Flow shall be 15 gpm at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 percent when tested according to ASTM D4716.

2. Filter Fabric shall be nonwoven geotextile. 3. Fittings shall be as per manufacturer. 4. Couplings shall be as per manufacturer.

B. Smooth PVC Drainage Conduits shall have perforated fittings and couplings complying

with ASTM D3034. 1. Nominal size shall be 8 inches).

a. Minimum flow rate equal to a NPS 4 pipe. 2. Fittings shall be as per manufacturer.

2.8 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Drainage Material 1. Bedding shall be Delaware #57 Stone in accordance with the Standard Specifications. 2. Fill to 1 foot above pipes shall be Delaware #57 Stone in accordance with the

Standard Specifications.

B. Concrete Sand shall be ASTM C33.

2.9 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A. Geotextile fabric sleeves shall conform to ASTM 6707. Elongation will be greater than 50 percent and the flow rate shall range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. 1. Structure Type shall be Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament. 2. Style shall be sock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Underground Subdrainage Piping shall be: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints.

B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping shall be:

1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings and loose, bell-and-spigot joints.

C. Header Piping shall be:

1. ABS pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed and solvent-cemented joints. 2. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.



3.3 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS

A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. At Grade in Earth shall be Cast-Iron cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas shall be Cast-Iron cleanouts.

B. In Underslab Subdrainage Piping:

1. In all Areas shall be Cast-Iron cleanouts.

3.4 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for underslab drainage system before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over geotextile filter fabric, to depth of not less than 4 inches.

D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock

sections with adhesive or tape. Install drainage piping.

E. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.

F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of

bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.

1. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum

slope of 0.5 percent. 2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing

upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Install PE piping and PVC piping according to ASTM D2321.

3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to ASTM A74. Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings.

B. Join ABS pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2751.



C. Join PE pipe or perforated PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints

according to ASTM D2321.

D. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2729.

E. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2729.

F. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.

3.7 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Cleanouts for Subdrainage: 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and

at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping

branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas.

3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid-wall-piping storm drainage system. B. Where required, connect low elevations of underslab and subdrainage to stormwater

sump pumps.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.

B. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.


A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to

ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.

3.11 CLEANING

Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION